Home

Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router

Contents

1. The router treats the packet as a packet destined for him Discard the packet 1 Numbered mode means that each WAN interface has an IP address In that case you need the single official IP address for your WAN interface Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 119 User manual Configuring the router 7 4 5 PAT limitations Example of PAT and multiple remote networks over Frame Relay Suppose your network is connected to the Internet via a Frame Relay network and to another site that does not have official IP addresses either Now you have to choose whether to apply PAT to e all traffic towards the Frame Relay network or e the traffic destined for the Internet only IP address WAN interface 195 7 12 22 IP address WAN interface 195 7 12 254 ISP 6 A 1 Internet ww IP subnet 192 168 48 0 mask 255 255 255 0 Frame Relay or PDH SDH network modem IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 IP address WAN interface 195 7 12 23 Suppose PAT is only used for the traffic destined for the Internet In that case the configuration of the most relevant attributes of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is as follows telindus1421Router router defaultRoute gateway 195 7 12 254 interface wan telindus1421Router router routingTable network 192 168 48 0 gateway 195 7 12 23 telindus1421Router router defaultNat patA
2. The bridge cache time out If devices on the network are re moved then the MAC address interface relation changes refer to What is the bridge cache Therefore the bridge cache entries are automatically removed from the cache after a fixed time out This time out period can be set with the bridgeTimeOut attribute This in case no topology change is detected otherwise the time out is equal to the value of the bridgeForwardDelay ele ment of the spanningTree attribute When checking the bridgeCache it may appear that some entries are present for a longer time than is con figured with the bridgeTimeOut attribute This because the entries in the bridgeCache are not monitored con tinuously but once per minute As a result some entries may appear to be overtime However this should be no more than 75 seconds im Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 233 Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup name Default bridge Range 1 24 characters Use this attribute to assign an administrative name to the bridge telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup ip Default lt empty gt Range structure see below Use this attribute to configure the IP related parameters of the bridge Important remark If you set the configuration attribute telindus1421Router laninterface mode to bridging then the settings of the configuration attribute telindus1421Router laninte
3. ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface hdlc bridging Default Range structure see below Use this attribute to configure the bridging related parameters of the HDLC link Refer to e 8 Configuring the bridge on page 137 for more information on bridging e 8 9 6 Explaining the bridging structure on page 150 for a detailed description of the bridging structure 196 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 5 Line configuration attributes ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface line channel Default remote Range central remote Use this attribute to determine which unit is the central unit and which the remote unit l e it determines which unit acts as master and which as slave during the synchronisation procedure Therefore set one device to central and its remote counterpart to remote ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface line region Default auto Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to determine which SHDSL standard is used The region attribute has the following values annexA The North American SHDSL standard is used annexB The European SHDSL standard is used auto The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router itself determines which standard it has to use ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface line timingMode Default synchronous Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to set the timing mode It is importa
4. blocking The port does not participate in frame forwarding listening The port prepares to participate in frame forwarding but it does not update its MAC address database also called bridge cache learning The port prepares to participate in frame forwarding and it learns the present MAC addresses forwarding The port participates in frame forwarding These are the only possible port states for a bridge that is not run ning the Spanning Tree protocol IEEE p802 1D Refer to 8 5 The Spanning Tree bridge port states on page 142 for more informa tion on port states subState This gives additional information on the port state Possible values are This is the port through which the root bridge can be reached Consequently the root bridge itself does not have a root port All other bridges must have a root port designated This is the designated port for this virtual LAN All ports of the root bridge are designated ports alternate This port is not active Either because of a management action or through protocol intervention Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes 255 ene ee designatedPriority Together these two elements form a unique bridge identifier Depending whether the current port is a designated port or not these two elements display the unique bridge identifier of designatedMac e the bridge to which this port belong
5. Configure the mib2Traps attribute Select this value if the management station is any SNMP sta tion without the TMA for HP OpenView application In that case the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router sends the alarms cold Boot warmBoot and linkDown as MIB2 traps instead of enterprise specific private MIB traps Select this value if the management system is the TMA for HP OpenView application In that case the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router sends all alarms as enterprise specific private MIB traps Set for each object of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router e the alarms that you want to send using the attribute alarmMask e the importance of each alarm using the attribute alarmLevel By default only the most important alarms are enabled 240 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 9 Management configuration attributes kal telindus1421Router management cms2Address Default 0 Range 0 65535 Use this attribute to assign an absolute address to the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router What is relative and absolute addressing If you want to connect with TMA to a Telindus device you have to specify the address of the device in the Connect window Refer to 4 Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router on page 27 There are two different address types relative and absolute The following table explains the difference between these address types relative This type
6. disabled The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router does not send ICMP communication prohib ited messages Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Reference manual Chapter 10 211 Configuration attributes i telindus1421Router router dhcpStatic Use this attribute to assign a fixed IP address to a client its MAC address and this for an infinite time Default lt empty gt Range table see below The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router supports the DHCP server protocol This attribute and the following two attributes describe the configuration parameters to customise the DHCP server behaviour The dhcpStatic table contains the following elements FS e O ipAddress Use this element to assign an IP address to a certain client This client is identified with its MAC address Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 If no IP address is specified then there is no connection to the client In that case all other attributes in the table are ignored for this client mask Use this element to set the client its subnet mask Default 255 255 255 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 gateway Use this element to set the default gateway for the cli ent its subnet If no gateway is specified then the gateway of the LAN channel is used Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 259 255 255 255 nameServer Use this element to set the IP address of the name server that is available to the client
7. Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 tftpServer Use this element to set the IP address of the TFTP server that is available to the client It is the next server to use in boottrap Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 macAddress Use this element to enter the client its MAC address If no MAC address is specified then there is no con Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 Range up to ff ff ff ff ff ff nection to the client Therefore all other attributes in the table are ignored for this client bootFile Use this element to set the location of the boot file Default lt empty gt Range max 128 characters hostName Use this element to set the name of the client Default lt empty gt Range max 20 characters domainName Use this element to set the name the client should use when resolving hostnames via the Domain Name System DNS Default lt empty gt Range max 20 characters netbiosNameServer Use this element to set the IP address of the NetBios server Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 259 255 255 255 netbiosNodeType Use this element to configure the client as described in RFC1001 RFC1002 Default lt opt gt Range enumerated see below The netbiosNodeType element has the following values no node B node P node M node H node 212 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Reference manual Chapter 1
8. vi Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router User and reference manual Graphical conventions Preface The following icons are used in this manual Name This icon indicates Remark remarks or useful tips Caution text to be read carefully in order to avoid damage to the device Warning text to be read carefully in order to avoid injury DIP switch a DIP switch or strap table Basic attribute a basic attribute in the containment tree of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Advanced attribute an advanced attribute in the containment tree of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Structured attribute a structured attribute within another attribute in the containment tree of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Action an action in the containment tree of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router User and reference manual Table of contents EIS OT Mean eA iss sserrep anai iaraa eia aae tatio iE nahi EAE diaa adeat 1 1 Introducing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 3 1 1 What is the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2000 00 ccccccccccccccccceccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 4 1 2 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router applications ccc cesssesseccceeeeeeeaeceaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 5 1 3 Management TOONS sca caisen cd secu speuidnns feta te cu ep od eve une temeas caatn oll Seaside tiedan done nnpes eee ucuneeee 6 1 4 Management tools
9. Reference manual Configuration attributes Suppose e telindus1421Router router trafficPolicy method is set to tosDiffServ e for queue 1 you set maxLength1 100 maxLength2 200 and maxLength3 50 In this case the following applies Queue 1 contains data An incoming data packet with is packets drop level 1 drop level 2 drop level 3 less than 50 accepted accepted accepted more than 50 less than 100 accepted accepted dropped more than 100 less than 200 dropped accepted dropped more than 200 dropped dropped dropped 1 As defined in the TOS field kal telindus1421Router router trafficPolicy tos2QueueMapping Default lt empty gt Range table see below In case you have set the telindus1421Router router trafficPolicy method attribute to tosMapped then use the tos2QueueMapping table to specify which data has to be redirected to which queue The tos2QueueMapping table contains the following elements a startTos Use these elements to set the Type Of Service field Default 0 start 255 end value Range 0 255 endTos Packets that have a Type Of Service field value within the specified range are redi rected to the targetQueue targetQueue Use this element to set the destination queue Default Queue1 The targetQueue element has the following values Range enumerated see below Queue1 Queue2 Queue3 Queue
10. Use this element to set the Virtual Channel Identifier Default 32 VCI Range 32 65535 The VPI in conjunction with the VCI identifies the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on the way to its destination higherLayerProtocol Use this element to define which protocol has tobe Default rfc2684 mapped onto the ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 Range enumerated see below The higherLayerProtocol element has the following values rfc2684 Select this value in case you want to encapsulate routed or bridged data in AAL5 packets according to RFC2684 ppp Select this value in case you want to encapsulate routed or bridged data in PPP over ATM PPPoA according to RFC2364 pppOverEthernet Select this value in case you want to encapsulate routed or bridged data in PPP over Ethernet PPPoE accord ing to RFC2516 This data is then further encapsulated in AAL5 packets according to RFC2684 D In the PPPoE context the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router can only act as a client 192 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Reference manual Chapter 10 Configuration attributes Co a S multiProtocolMech Use this element to define how the protocol has to be mapped onto ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 The multiProtocolMech element has the following values Default llcEncapsulation Range enumerated see below llcEncapsulation Logical Link Control LLC enca
11. telindus1421Router sysUpTime This attribute displays the elapsed time since the last power on or cold boot of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter telindus1421Router sysServices This attribute displays the service identification This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 249 Reference manual Status attributes ra telindus1421Router flash1 Version This attribute displays the code and version of the application software stored as CONTROL1 Example Txxxx xxxxx 01 01 00 12 00 In this example the following parameters are visible e Txxxx is the application software code for this device e xXxxxx is the application software version e 01 01 00 is the application software release date e 12 00 is the application software release time ra telindus1421Router flash2 Version This attribute displays the code and version of the application software stored as CONTROL2 ra telindus1421Router activeFlash This attribute displays which application software is currently active Possible values are The application software CONTROL1 is active The application software CONTROL2 is active ra telindus1421Router flashVersions This attribute displays how many application software versions can be stored in the file system 4 telindus1421Router bootVersion This attribute displays the code version release date and time of the boot software currently used i
12. transmitWindowSize Use this element to set the window size for transmit Default 4 ting control messages Range 1 30 receiveWindowSize Use this element to set the window size for receiving Defauita control messages Range 1 30 udpChecksum Use this element to enable on or disable off the Default off UDP checksum Range on off It is recommended to enable the UDP checksum on lower quality links 222 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 6 4 Routing filter configuration attributes The routingFilter object is not present in the containment tree by default If you want to use a routing filter then add this object first Refer to 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 39 ra telindus1421Router router routingFilter filter Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to set up a RIP update filter RIP updates coming from a network that is specified in the filter table are forwarded All other RIP updates are blocked If the filter table is empty then all RIP updates are forwarded The filter table contains the following elements e E network This is the IP source address of the RIP update The Defauit 0 0 0 0 address may be a sub network address Range up to 255 255 255 255 mask This is the IP subnet mask for the network By combin pefault 255 255 255 0 ing a
13. 255 255 255 2 1 77 10 255 255 248 172 31 75 0 255 255 255 0 In the routing table the following routes are defined e network 172 31 75 0 is reachable via 172 31 77 10 e 172 31 77 10 is reachable via DLC 16 172 31 77 2 e 172 31 77 10 is also reachable via DLCI 17 172 31 77 6 routingT able network interface b1 172 31 75 0 255 255 255 0 172 31 77 10 10 2 b 2 172 31 77 10 255 255 255 248 172 31 77 2 wan 10 2 b 3 172 31 77 10 255 255 255 248 172 31 77 6 wan 10 2 Now in order to reach network 172 31 75 0 DLCI 16 is used However when DLCI 16 goes down the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router automatically uses DLCI 17 in order to reach network 172 31 75 0 l e it automatically reroutes and this without the need of a routing protocol e This only works for the entries of the routing table not for the default gateway e This type of route is always up In the status information the interface element of such a route displays internal Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 103 User manual Configuring the router 7 3 Configuring the Routing Information Protocol This section introduces the Routing Information Protocol RIP and gives a short description of the attributes you can use to configure RIP The following gives an overview of this section e 7 3 1 Introducing RIP on page 104 e 7 3 2 Configuring RIP on page 105 e 7 3 3 Explaining the rip structure on page 106 e 7 3 4 Configuring RIP authenti
14. The next example shows an access list that allows all traffic except the traffic from subnet 192 168 48 0 source ddress mask action _ The second entry is the rule to add if you want all pack ets that do not match the previous entries to be allowed b2 0000 gt 1 192 168 48 0 255 255 255 0 deny 0 0 0 0 allow 242 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Reference manual Chapter 10 Configuration attributes kal telindus1421Router management snmp Use this attribute to accept enable or discard disable SNMP requests Default enabled Range enabled disabled kal telindus1421Router managementitelnet Use this attribute to accept enable or discard disable Telnet sessions Default enabled Range enabled disabled telindus1421Router management tftp Use this attribute to accept enable or discard disable TFTP sessions Default enabled Range enabled disabled telindus1421Router management consoleNoTrafficTimeOut Use this attribute to set the time out period after which a management ses sion is closed when there is no user interaction Default 00000d 00h 30m 00s Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s 24855d 03h 14m 07s The purpose of such a timer is to protect the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router against unauthorised access in case the last user did not close his session ra telindus1421Router management ctriPortProtocol Use this attribu
15. consoleNoTrafficTimeOut ctrlPortProtocol gt gt gt tunnels alarmFilter 2tpTunnels gt gt gt loopback ipAddress gt gt gt routingFilter ihe filter gt gt gt trafficPolicyt method trafficShaping tos2QueueMapping dropLevels gt gt gt priorityPolicy algorithm countingPolicy queueConfigurations lowdelayQuotum gt gt bridge gt gt gt bridgeGroup bridgeCache bridgeTimeOut name ip arp spanningTree vlan gt gt gt accessList iM macAddress gt gt gt trafficPolicy vlanPriorityMap 3 Not present by default has to be added 172 a a Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 2 General configuration attributes telindus1421Router sysName Default lt empty gt Range 0 64 characters Use this attribute to assign a name to the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router The sysName attribute is an SNMP MIB2 parameter telindus1421Router sysContact Default lt empty gt Range 0 64 characters Use this attribute to add contact information You could for instance enter the name and telephone number of the person to contact in case problem occur The sysContact attribute is an SNMP MIB2 parameter telindus1421Router sysLocation Default lt empty gt Range 0 64 characters Use this attribute to specify the physical location of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router
16. Configuration examples 9 1 LAN extension over a PDH SDH network In this example a remote office is connected to a central office over a PDH or SDH network A modem link connects the remote office to the PDH or SDH network At the local office a Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is installed The central router is a third party router The WAN encapsulation is PPP with active link monitoring WAN interface IP 192 168 100 1 mask 255 255 255 252 LAN interface IP 192 168 47 254 Router modem eo oo IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 WAN interface IP 192 168 100 2 mask 255 255 255 252 LAN interface IP 192 168 48 254 network IP subnet 192 168 48 0 mask 255 255 255 0 The configuration of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router in CLI format is as follows action Load Default Configuration SET SELECT lanInterface LIST ip address 192 168 47 254 mode routing SELECT wanInterface LIST encapsulation ppp SELECT ppp LIST ip address 192 168 100 1 netMask 255 255 255 252 linkMonitoring operation enabled SELECT router LIST routingTable a 192 168 48 0 192 168 100 2 network gateway action Activate Configuration Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router User manual Chapter 9 159 Configuration examples 9 2 LAN extension over a Frame Relay network In this example a remote office is connect
17. Do this by typing the index name of the added priorityPolicy object in the appropriate element Refer to 7 6 7 Applying a priority policy on a certain interface on page 134 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 131 User manual Configuring the router 7 6 4 Configuring a traffic policy on the router Refer to 7 6 1 Introducing traffic and priority policy on page 128 for an introduction This section shows you which configuration attributes you can use to configure a traffic policy on the router The trafficPolicy object is not present in the containment tree by default If you want to use traffic policy then add this object first Refer to 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 39 First you have to choose a method you want to use to fill the queues when a traffic overload condition occurs Do this using the attribute telindus1421Router router trafficPolicy method on page 223 Once you choose a traffic policy method you can fine tune this method using the following attributes If you choose the method then use the following attribute to fine tune this method trafficShaping e telindus1421Router router trafficPolicy trafficShaping on page 224 e telindus1421Router router trafficPolicy dropLevels on page 226 only the maxLength1 element tosDiffServ telindus1421Router router trafficPolicy dropLevels on page 226 tosMapped e telindus1421Router router trafficPolicy tos2Qu
18. This attribute displays the IP information of the interface The ip structure contains the following elements ec status This is the current operational status of the IP layer layer 3 address This is the IP address of the interface It is either configured or retrieved automat ically netMask This is the IP subnet mask of the interface It is either configured or retrieved auto matically ra telindus1421Router lanInterface macAddress This attribute displays the MAC address of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router its LAN interface The LAN interface has been allocated a fixed Ethernet address also called MAC Medium Access Con trol address The MAC address is globally unique and can not be modified It is a 6 byte code repre sented in hexadecimal format Each byte in the code is separated by a colon Refer to What is the ARP cache on page 177 for more information on the MAC addresses Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 253 Reference manual Status attributes telindus1421Router laninterface arpCache This attribute displays all the MAC address IP address pairs from ARP requests and replies received on the LAN interface Refer to What is the ARP cache on page 177 for more information The arpCache table contains the following elements ee macAddress This is the MAC address ipAddress This is the associated IP address type This is the ARP cache entry type Possible values are dynamic The
19. Typing the string discard discards all packets for the corresponding destination preference Use this element to set the level of importance of the Default 10 route with respect to routes learnt via RIP Range 1 200 RIP routes always have a preference of 60 Routes with a lower preference value are chosen over routes with higher preference value Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 203 Reference manual Configuration attributes Benet Besson O O metric Use this element to set with how much the metric Default 1 parameter of a route has to be incremented Range 1 15 If two routes exist with the same preference then the route with the lowest metric value is chosen This element is only important when combining static routes and RIP routes Refer to 7 3 3 Explaining the rip structure on page 106 for more information on the metric parameter Ta telindus1421Router router routingProtocol Default none Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to activate or deactivate the Routing Information Protocol RIP Refer to 7 3 Configuring the Routing Information Protocol on page 103 for more information on RIP The routingProtocol attribute has the following values No routing protocol is used Only static routes are used The RIP routing protocol is active You can set the RIP version per interface Refer to the elements txVersion and rxVersion in the ri
20. User manual DIP switches of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 3 1 The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router motherboard The figure below shows the position of the DIP switches on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router mother board Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 3 25 User manual DIP switches of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 3 2 DIP switches of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router The following table gives an overview of the DIP switches on DIP switch bank DS1 DAR DIP switch name DS1 no Setting Function loader mode Normal operation Start up in loader mode load default Normal operation configuration Load default configuration l z Refer to 3 3 Opening and closing the housing on page 26 to find out how to open the housing in order to change the DIP switch settings 26 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 3 User manual DIP switches of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 3 3 Opening and closing the housing When you want to change the DIP switch settings you have to open and close the housing of the Telin dus 1421 SHDSL Router This section explains how to do so Opening the housing To open the housing of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router proceed as follows w pooo S Disconnect the external power supply Unscrew the two screws located at the back of the housing Remove the cover as follows 1 Carefully lift the back of the cover a few centimetres Gently pull the cover backwards from witii unde
21. countingPolicy 230 ctriPortProtocol 242 defaultRoute 201 dhcpCheckAddress 214 dhcpDynamic 212 dhcpStatic 211 diciTable 185 dmzHost 217 dropLevels 226 encapsulation 180 filter 222 gateway 216 helperProtocols 208 ip 176 181 184 233 ipAddress loopback 243 I2tpTunnels 218 linkMonitoring 182 Imi 187 lowdelayQuotum 230 macAddress 236 maxFifoQLen 180 maxSpeed 198 maxSpeed2P 199 method 223 mib2Traps 239 minSpeed 198 minSpeed2P 199 mode 178 181 199 name 176 180 233 patAddress 215 portTranslations 215 pppSecretTable 207 priorityPolicy 180 pvcTable 189 queueConfigurations 230 region 196 retrain 197 ripHoldDownTime 205 rip Updatelnterval 204 ripv2SecretTable 206 routingProtocol 203 routingTable 202 security 173 sendAdminUnreachable 210 sendPortUnreachable 210 sendTtlExceeded 209 servicesAvailable 216 snmp 242 spanningTree 234 startupMargin 198 sysContact 172 sysLocation 172 sysName 172 sysSecret 207 tcpSockets 217 tcpSocketTimeOut 217 378 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Annex telnet 242 tftp 242 timingMode 196 tos2QueueMapping 227 trafficShaping 224 trapDestinations 238 udpSockets 217 udpSocketTimeOut 217 vlan 235 vilanPriorityMap 237 attribute performance addressesAvailable 319 allocFails 319 bridgeAccessList 324 bridgeCache 323 bridgeDiscards 323 bridgeFloods 323 cliSessionCount 325 cllmInFrames 311 cms2SessionCount 325 currUsedProcPower 327 d7Line 313 d7LineParameters 315 d7Performanc
22. create at least one with write and security access If not you will be unable to make configuration and password changes after activation of the new configuration 174 i Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1421Router alarmMask telindus1421Router alarmLevel Refer to e 13 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 331 for more information on the configuration attributes alarmMask and alarmLevel and on the alarms in general e 13 3 General alarms on page 334 for more information on the alarms of the telindus1421Router object telindus1421Router Activate Configuration If you execute this action the editable non active configuration becomes the active configuration This action corresponds with the TMA button Send all attributes to device 4 i amp When use this action Use this action after you made all the necessary configuration settings and you want to activate these settings telindus1421Router Load Default Configuration If you execute this action the non active configuration is overwritten by the default configuration After executing this action click on the TMA button Retrieve all attributes from device 4 to see the S new non active configuration When use this action If you install the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router for the first time all configuration attributes have their default values If the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router has
23. e 2 7 The front panel LED indicators on page 19 10 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2 1 Safety instructions IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Disconnect the power supply before installing adjusting or servicing the unit Cy ACHTUNG WICHTIGE SICHERHEITSINSTRUKTIONEN Vor s mtlichen Arbeiten am Ger t Installation Einstellungen Reparaturen etc sollten Sie den Netzstecker aus der Steckdose ziehen A SAFETY WARNING To avoid damage to the unit please observe all procedures described in this chapter A SICHERHEITSBESTIMMUNGEN Um eine Besch digung des Ger tes zu verhindern beachten Sie bitte unbedingt die Sicherheitsbestim mungen die in diesem Abschnitt beschrieben werden Ensure that the unit and its connected equipment all use the same AC power and ground to reduce noise interference and possible safety hazards caused by differences in ground or earth potentials Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 11 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2 2 Unpacking Checking the shipping carton Rough handling during shipping causes most early failures Before installation check the shipping car ton for signs of damage e If the carton box is damaged please place a claim with the carrier company immediately Ifthe carton box is undamaged do not dispose of it in case you need to store the unit or ship it in t
24. e 7 1 Introducing routing on page 94 for an introduction on routing e 7 3 1 Introducing RIP on page 104 for an introduction on RIP Routers exchange information between each other for management purposes They do this using the Router Information Protocol RIP For security reasons you can enable RIP authentication You can do this per interface Use the following to configure RIP authentication e Use the authentication element in the rip structure to enable RIP authentication per interface You can also select the authentication method Refer to 7 3 3 Explaining the rip structure on page 106 e Use the ripv2SecretTable attribute to define the secrets used for the RIP authentication Refer to telindus1421Router router ripv2SecretTable on page 206 112 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 4 Configuring address translation This section explains Network Address Translation NAT and Port Address Translation PAT Firstly it gives an introduction Secondly a table is presented that will help you to determine which translation method meets your requirements Then this section teaches you how to configure NAT and PAT The following gives an overview of this section 7 4 1 Introducing NAT and PAT on page 113 7 4 2 When use NAT and or PAT on page 114 7 4 3 Configuring PAT on page 115 7 4 4 How does PAT work on page 116 7 4 5 PAT limitations on page 119 7 4 6 PAT limitation
25. eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 73 6 4 Configuring ATM encapsulation eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 82 6 5 Configuring HDLC encapsulation cccccceeeeeeesenceceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeesteneeneaeeetes 91 7 Configuring the router sssssssssssunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 93 Lal Introducing TOUtNngar eanes a e elie ata Gals nant alana Aaa TOAN NSE 94 7 2 Configuring static POUTSS vec asia tisenccn ts seats Rute abe uhadhsgetentwaenahhneruatoneekGa iia ticeete aeelahes 96 7 3 Configuring the Routing Information Protocol ccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaees 103 7 4 Configuring address translation ccceeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeees 112 7 5 Configuring L2TP tunnelling siscccdscg otesevcassecaseeeavapneedancaneqeevane Wlsadceonea env aestiteann ces 124 7 6 Configuring traffic and priority policy on the router eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 127 7 7 Configuring an extended access liSt ccc ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeensneeeeeeees 135 8 Configuring the bridge 2 cscs noses eee eee 137 8 1 Introducing DEO GING i sasiacstceg cdvaecusses say sg cue eahe denne ena cya pneedae cunt cnetasuaen twos ncuuneredeane deneaces 138 8 2 The self learning and Transparent Spanning Tree bridge cccccceeceeeeeeeeeees 139 8 3 The Spanning Tree root b
26. ifOperStatus This attribute displays the current operational status of the line pair This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter Possible values are up The line pair is up data transfer is possible This is the case when the value of the linePair status attribute is dataState down The line pair is down data transfer is not possible testing A line test is active telindus1421Router wanInterface line linePair ifSpeed This attribute displays the current line pair speed in bits per second bps This is an SNMP MIB2 param eter telindus1421Router wanInterface line linePair timeSinceLastRetrain This attribute displays the elapsed time since the last retrain cycle telindus1421Router wanInterface line linePair status This attribute displays the current status of the line pair Possible values are idle No link is present training A training cycle is in progress dataState A data link is present telindus1421Router wanInterface line linePair lineAttenuation This attribute displays the current line pair attenuation in dB telindus1421Router wanInterface line linePair signalNoise This attribute displays the current noise margin of the line pair in dB The status attributes lineAttenuation and signalNoise do not display meaningful information when the line is not trained These attributes are only relevant for a trained line telindus1421Router wanInterface line linePair
27. inArp TimeOut Use this element to set the time between the trans Default 00000d 00h 00m 30s mission of two consecutive Reverse ARP frames Range 00000d 00h 00m 01s 00000d 01h 00m 00s oamF5Loopback Use this element to configure the transmission of Default OAM F5 loop back cells Range structure see below Refer to telindus1421Router wanInterface atm pvcTable atm oamF5Loopback on page 193 for a detailed description of the oamF5Loopback structure Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 193 Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1421Router waninterface atm pvcTable atm oamF5Loopback Default Range structure see below Use the oamF5Loopback structure in the atm structure in the pvcTable to con figure the transmission of OAM F5 loop back cells The oamF5Loopback structure contains the following elements a operation Use this element to enable or disable OAM F5 loop Default disabled back operation Range enabled disabled The operation element has the following values disabled OAM F5 loop back operation is disabled i e the OAM F5 loop back are not sent This means that the ifOperStatus of the PVC becomes up when the ATM is syn chronised globally However this does not guarantee that the PVC is configured correctly on the remote side enabled OAM F5 loop back operation is enabled i e the Telin dus 1421 SHDSL Router sends OAM F5 loop back cells at regular in
28. other hand is user configurable This means that the user associates an IP address with the predefined MAC address The MAC address IP address pairs are kept in a table called the ARP cache Refer to telindus1421Router laninterface arpCache on page 253 for an example of such a table How does the ARP cache work Before the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router sends an IP packet on the LAN interface it has to know the MAC address of the destination device If the address is not present in the ARP cache table yet the Tel indus 1421 SHDSL Router sends an ARP request on the Ethernet to learn the MAC address and asso ciated IP address of the destination device This address pair is then written in the ARP cache Once the address pair is present the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router can reference to this pair if it has to send an IP packet to the same device later on The ARP cache time out Summarised all the MAC address IP address pairs from ARP requests and replies received on the LAN interface are kept in the ARP cache However if devices on the network are reconfigured then this MAC address IP address relation may change Therefore the ARP cache entries are automatically removed from the cache after a fixed time out This time out period can be set with the timeOut element 178 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 im mm a a Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1421Router lanInterface mode Default bridging Range
29. ppp object telindus1421Router wanInterface ppp ip trafficPolicy You can find the trafficPolicy element in the ip structure within the pvcTable attribute under the atm object telindus1421Router waninter face atm pvcTable ip trafficPolicy This means that you can specify a traffic policy per PVC tunnels in the ip structure within the l2tpTunnels attribute under the tunnels object telindus1421Router router tunnels 2tp Tunnels ip trafficPolicy bridge in the ip structure under the bridgeGroup object telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup ip 1 The interface can be a physical interface such as the LAN interface but can also be a DLC a PVC a tunnel etc 134 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 6 7 Applying a priority policy on a certain interface This section shows you where to find the appropriate priority policy attribute in order to apply a priority policy on a certain interface The priorityPolicy attribute can be found under the wanInterface object telindus1421Router wanInterface priorityPol This implies that in case of Frame Relay you can not specify a priority policy per DLCI In case of ATM however you can specify a priority policy per PVC To do so use the priorityPolicy element in the pvcTable under the ATM object telindus1421Router wanInterface atm pvcTable priorityPolicy 1 The interface can be a physical interface such as the LAN int
30. received an IP address This request is a local broadcast message If it sent over the WAN link the peer router should have an IP helper address for the DNS server If no reply is received within 10 seconds this phase is repeated once more If a DNS reply is received it contains the domain name The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router only uses the hostname part of the domain name host name domain toplevel_domain Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 15 347 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router pees a E Now there are two possibilities is the router requests the file hostname cms as a limited broad cast hostname cms is the router its configuration file in binary format If this request is sent over the WAN link the peer router should have an IP helper address for the TFTP server If no reply is received within 5 seconds the router requests the file hostname cli as a local broadcast hostname cli is the router its configuration file in ASCII format Again there is a reply time out of 5 seconds If still no valid answer is received the router alternatively repeats both requests up to four times not known the procedure described above is executed with the file name hostname replaced by the concatenation of the decimal repre sentation for each byte in the IP address with leading zeroes and without dots in between the bytes Example a router with IP address 192 168 100 1 reques
31. tions between them Therefore you should configure Default q933 Annex A Range enumerated see below the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router according to the standard that is used by your service provider The type element has the following values ImiRev1 Set this value only for compatibility with older equip ment ansiT1 617 d Set this value for ANSI LMI compliance q933 Annex A Set this value for ITU T LMI compliance frf1 2 Set this value for FRF 1 amp 2 compliance pollinginterval Use this element to set the time between successive Defaylt 00000d 00h 00m 10s Status Enquiry messages Range 00000d 00h 00m 05s 00000d 00h 00m 30s errorThreshold Use this element to set the maximum number of unan Default 3 swered Status Enquiry messages that the Telindus Range 1 10 1421 SHDSL Router will accept before declaring the DLCI down Also see the monitoredEvents element 188 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes Fe Fa monitoredEvents Use this element to set the number of status polling Default 4 intervals over which the error threshold is counted Range 1 10 In other words if the station receives an errorThreshold number of unanswered Sta tus Enquiry messages within a monitoredEvents number of pollinginterval intervals then the interface is declared down Example If the station receives 3 unanswe
32. which was received from the network for congestion on any of the DLCls Possible values are none e short term excessive traffic long term excessive traffic e short term equipment failure long term equipment failure e short term maintenance action long term maintenance action short term unknown cause long term unknown cause unknown cause Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 269 Reference manual Status attributes 11 4 4 ATM status attributes ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface atm atmSync This attribute displays the ATM synchronisation status Possible values are synced notSynced 4 telindus1421Router wanlInterface atm pvcTable This attribute gives the complete status information of all known PVCs The pvcTable table contains the following elements pe ee This is the name of the PVC as you configured it If you did not configure a name then this element displays lt WAN interface name gt vci lt vci number gt E g wan vei 40 ifOperStatus This is the current operational status of the PVC ifLastChange This is the system up time on the moment the PVC entered its current operational state l e the moment the value of the ifOperStatus element changes from up to down or vice versa the system up time value is written into the ifLastChange element This displays the IP information of the PVC Refer to telindus1421Router wanInterface
33. 11 261 Reference manual Status attributes telindus1421Router waninterface ppp IcpMy Options During the LCP handshake a number of options can be exchanged between the local and remote side of the link This attribute lists the LCP options for the router at this side local side of the link The IcpMyOptions table contains the following elements The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router supports the following LCP options This is the Authentication Protocol option This is the Magic Number option For more information on the LCP configuration options refer to RFC1661 This is the length of the option field This is the option value represented as an octet string hexadecimal ASCII repre sentation telindus1421Router wanlInterface ppp IcpHisOptions This attribute lists the LCP options for the router at the other side remote side of the link The IcpMyOptions table contains the same elements as the telindus1421Router wanInterface ppp IcoMyOptions table Other option values than the ones supported by the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router may be present 262 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes kal telindus1421Router waninterface ppp ipcpMyOptions During the IPCP handshake a number of options can be exchanged between the local and remote side of the link This attribute lists the IPCP options for the router at this side local side of the link The ipcpMyOptions table c
34. 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 12 309 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 3 2 Frame Relay performance attributes ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface frameRelay dlciTable This attribute lists the complete performance information of all known DLCls The diciTable table contains the following elements mon peen o name This is the name of the DLCI as you configured it mibCounters This displays the SNMP MIB2 parameters of the DLCI These are the same as the SNMP MIB2 parameters on the LAN interface Refer to 12 2 LAN interface performance attributes on page 304 frameRelay This displays the specific Frame Relay related performance information of the DLCI Refer to telindus1421Router wanInterface frameRelay diciTable frameRelay on page 310 for a detailed description of the frameRelay structure 310 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 12 Reference manual Performance attributes telindus1421Router wanInterface frameRelay diciTable frameRelay The frameRelay structure in the diciTable displays the specific Frame Relay related performance information of the DLCI The frameRelay structure contains the following elements Benet pe O dici This is the DLCI identification number inFecn This is the number of frames received from the network indicating forward conges tion and this since the virtual circuit was created inBecn This is the number of frames received from the network indicating back
35. 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 6 75 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols What is the Discard Eligible bit When the CIR is exceeded all subsequent frames get marked Discard Eligible by setting the DE bit in the Frame Relay header This is performed at the local Frame Relay switch If congestion occurs at a node in the Frame Relay network packets marked DE are the first to be dropped Upon detecting con gestion a Frame Relay switch will send a Backward Explicit Congestion Notifier BECN message back to the source If the source e g the router has sufficient intelligence to process this message it may throttle back to the CIR 76 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 6 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 3 2 Configuring IP addresses on the Frame Relay WAN When you use Frame Relay encapsulation on the WAN interface you can configure the IP related parameters on two levels Using the ip structure in the Use this structure to configure the IP related parameters of frameRelay object all the DLCls for which e in the diciTable no IP address is defined for that specific DLCI and the mode element is set to routing or routingAndBridgning In other words use this attribute to globally configure the IP param eters of the DLCls Refer to Example DLCI global IP diciTable attribute one specific DLCI Refer to Example DLCI specific IP Refer to 5 2 3 Explaining the ip
36. 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 137 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 Configuring the bridge This chapter introduces bridging on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router and lists the attributes you can use to configure bridging The following gives an overview of this chapter 8 1 Introducing bridging on page 138 8 2 The self learning and Transparent Spanning Tree bridge on page 139 8 3 The Spanning Tree root bridge on page 140 8 4 The Spanning Tree topology on page 141 8 5 The Spanning Tree bridge port states on page 142 8 6 The Spanning Tree Bridge Protocol Data Unit on page 143 8 7 The Spanning Tree behaviour on page 144 8 8 The Spanning Tree priority and cost on page 145 8 9 Configuring bridging on page 147 8 10 Configuring traffic and priority policy on the bridge on page 152 q Refer to the Reference manual on page 167 for a complete overview of the attributes of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 138 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 1 Introducing bridging What is bridging The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router can be configured to act as a bridge This enables you to split up your LAN network into smaller parts or segments This decreases the amount of data traffic on the separated LAN segments and consequently increases the amount of available bandwidth Example The following figure s
37. 4 to see the new non active configuration When use this action If you install the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router for the first time all configuration attributes have their default values If the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router has already been configured but you want to start from scratch then use this action to revert to the default configuration 66 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Basic configuration 5 6 5 Loading the default configuration using the DIP switch The following procedure shows how to load the default configuration using the Load Default Configura tion DIP switch on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router PCB Disconnect the power supply and open the housing as described in 3 3 Opening and closing the housing on page 26 Set DIP switch bank DS1 position 2 to off Refer to 3 1 The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router motherboard on page 24 to locate this DIP switch bank Replace the cover without fastening the screws and reconnect the power supply gt The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router reboots and loads the default configuration Activate the loaded default configuration Open a TMA session on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Refer to 4 1 Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router with TMA on page 28 Execute the Activate Configuration action 1 If you are performing this load default configuration procedure because you accidentally made a configuration error you have the possibility to retr
38. 6 87 2048 kbps 512 kbps 2048 kbps 512 kbps 2048 kbps 512 kbps 2048 kbps 512 kbps Because all PCRs are set to auto each PVC tries to get a maximum bandwidth Hence the total available bandwidth 2 Mbps is divided equally over the four PVCs 88 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router User manual Scenario Configured PCR Chapter 6 Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols Amount of data sent 2048 kbps Assigned bandwidth 512 kbps 1024 kbps 512 kbps 640 kbps 512 kbps 512 kbps 512 kbps Because all PCRs are set to auto each PVC tries to get a maximum bandwidth Hence the total available bandwidth 2 Mbps is divided equally over the four PVCs So in this scenario PVC 3 is the only one that gets all of its data on the ATM network Scenario Configured PCR Amount of data sent 2048 kbps Assigned bandwidth 2048 kbps Because PVC 1 is the only one sending data and because its PCR is set to auto it gets the total available bandwidth 2 Mbps and is able to send its data at 2048 kbps Scenario Configured PCR 2048 kbps Amount of data sent 2048 kbps Assigned bandwidth 1024 kbps 1024 kbps 2048 kbps 512 kbps 512 kbps 2048 kbps 256 kbps 512 kbps 2048 kbps 256 kbps n this case the PCRs of the PVCs are over dimensioned i e the sum of the PCRs exceeds the bandwidth of th
39. ES peen officialAddress This is the official IP address as you entered it in the addresses configuration attribute privateAddress This is the private IP address that is currently linked with the official IP address status This is the status of the official IP address Possible values are free This official IP address is currently not in use fixed This address has a pre configured mapping between the official and private IP address allocated This official IP address is currently assigned to a private IP address but it is not fixed This indicates how many sessions are currently used by this official IP address If the attribute value becomes zero the assigned official IP address becomes free again and can be assigned to another private IP address 284 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes 11 6 3 L2TP tunnel status attributes ra telindus1421Router router tunnels I2tpTunnels This attribute gives you status information on the L2TP tunnels The 2tpTunnels table contains the following elements ES peen name This is the name of the tunnel as you configured it ifOperStatus This displays the operational status of the tunnel Possible values are up The tunnel is up data transfer is possible down The tunnel is down data transfer is not possible dormant The tunnel is stand by As soon as data has to be sent over the tunnel control connect
40. Each interface has a structured configuration attribute named ip In this structure you can configure the IP related parameters for that interface The following table shows where you can find the ip structure for the different interfaces For the you can find the ip structure in LAN interface the lanInterface object telindus1421Router lanInterface ip YD Important remark If you set the configuration attribute telindus1421Router laninterface mode to bridging then the settings of the configuration attribute telindus1421Router laninterface ip are ignored As a result if you want to manage the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router via IP you have to configure an IP address in the bridgeGroup object instead telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup ip WAN interface each WAN encapsulation object frameRelay You can find the ip structure on two levels e in the frameRelay object telindus1421Router wanInterface frameRe lay ip e in the dliciTable attribute the ip element in telindus1421Router waninterface frameRelay diciTable Section 6 3 2 Configuring IP addresses on the Frame Relay WAN on page 76 explains why You can find the ip structure in the ppp object telindus1421Router wanlInterface ppp ip You can find the ip structure in the pvcTable attribute the ip ele ment in telindus1421Router wanInterface atm pvcTable tunnels the 2tpTunnels attribute the ip element in telindus1421Router router tunnels
41. I2tp Tunnels bridge the bridgeGroup object telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup ip Refer to 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure on page 52 for a detailed description of the ip structure 1 The interface can be a physical interface such as the LAN interface but can also be a DLCI a PVC a tunnel etc 52 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Basic configuration 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure Because the ip structure occurs in several objects it is described here once and referenced where nec essary Refer to 5 2 2 Where to find the IP related parameters on page 51 for the location of the ip struc ture A This section lists all the elements that can be present in the ip structure However depending on the inter face it is possible that not all of these elements are present The ip structure contains the following elements C 0 address Use this element to assign an IP address to the inter Defauit 0 0 0 0 face The address should belong to the subnet the Range up to 255 255 255 255 interface is connected to netMask Use this element to assign an IP subnet mask to the Default 255 255 255 0 interface The subnet mask defines the number of IP Range up to 255 255 255 255 devices that may be present on the corresponding IP segment secondarylp Use this element to create additional virtual networks Default lt empty gt on the same Ethernet interface Ra
42. Identifiers VPIs e virtual channels which are identified by the combination of a VPI and a Virtual Channel Identifier VCI A virtual path is a bundle of virtual channels all of which are switched transparently across the ATM net work based on the common VPI All VPIs and VCls however have only local significance across a par ticular link and are remapped as appropriate at each switch How does ATM switching work The basic operation of an ATM switch is straightforward The cell is received across a link on a known VCI or VPI value The switch looks up the connection value in a local translation table to determine the outgoing port or ports of the connection and the new VPI VCI value of the connection on that link The switch then retransmits the cell on that outgoing link with the appropriate connection identifiers Because all VCls and VPIs have only local significance across a particular link these values are remapped as necessary at each switch 84 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 6 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols What are the ATM layers The ATM reference model is composed of the following ATM layers physical layer Analogous to the physical layer of the OSI reference model the ATM physical layer manages the medium dependent transmission ATM layer Combined with the ATM adaptation layer the ATM layer is roughly analogous to the data link layer of the OSI reference model The ATM l
43. MAC IP address pair is retrieved from an ARP request or reply message static The MAC IP address pair is configured There is only one static entry i e the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router its own IP and MAC address timeOut This is the time the entry will remain in the ARP cache For the static entry this value is 0 Example The following figure shows part of an ARP cache table as an example arpCache b1 00 20 4F BD 4 9B 194 7 48 84 dynamic O0000d 01h 12m 17s b2 00 00 0C 40 29 81 194 7 48 37 dynamic OO0000d 01h 59m 55s b3 00 50 8B 2E 3B 94 194 7 48 163 dynamic O0000d 01h 59m 56s gt 4 00 10 48 B1 34 1C 10 0 8 128 dynamic O0000d 01h 58m 19s b5 00 50 04 40 88 C2 194 7 48 148 dynamic O0000d 01h 59m 56s b 6 00 08 C7 09 40 10 194 7 48 10 dynamic O0000d 01h 59m 02s gt 7 00 10 54 4D 32 56 194 7 48 185 dynamic O0000d 01h 58m 11s b8 00 10 54 FB BA 8E 10 0 8 154 dynamic 00000d 01h 55m 06s b9 00 20 4F F1 EE 34 10 0 8 180 dynamic O0000d 01h 56m 48s gt 10 00 10 83 27 17 97 194 7 48 60 dynamic 00000d 01h 59m 31s 254 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes kal telindus1421Router laninterface bridging This attribute displays the bridging status of the interface The bridging structure contains the following elements es rr This displays the current state of the port Possible values are disabled The port is not in use because of a management action
44. OOOO OS network Use this element to specify the IP address of the des pefauit 0 0 0 0 tination network Range up to 255 255 255 255 mask Use this element to specify the network mask of the Defauit 255 255 255 0 destination network Range up to 255 255 255 255 gateway Use this element to specify the IP address of the next Defauit 0 0 0 0 router on the path to the destination network Range up to 255 255 255 255 Whether you can omit the gateway element or not is linked to the following condi tions If the interface element specifies the LAN interface you can not omit the gateway element the WAN interface you can omit the gateway element only when using PPP encapsulation a DLCI PVC or tunnel you can omit the gateway element interface Use this element to specify the interface through Default lt empty gt which the destination network can be reached Range 0 24 characters Do this by typing the name of the interface as you assigned it using the configura tion attribute name e g telindus1421Router laninterface name on page 176 Note that the interface can also be a DLCI PVC tunnel etc If you do not specify a value for the interface element then it is deduced by checking all interfaces including DLCls PVCs and tunnels and finding an interface for which the gateway lies in the subnet defined by the IP address and net mask of that interface
45. Router sub system picture is displayed Qa a Zoomin ZoomOut Options PWR INKI LNK2 Ac ACT L a L 5 ttt TD ocx LINE CTRL LAN 342 Reference manual Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 14 TMA sub system picture The following table gives an overview of the sub system picture elements and what they indicate Description These reflect the actual status of the device The LED indication on the sub system picture corresponds with the LED indication on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router itself Refer to 2 7 The front panel LED indi cators on page 19 for more information on the interpretation of the LEDs This reflects the status of the LAN interface The possible indications are There is no alarm active in the corresponding lanInterface object An alarm is active in the corresponding lanInterface object The colour of the LAN interface only changes if the alarms related to the lanInterface object are set to enabled in the alarmMask This reflects the status of the WAN interface and of the line pair s The possible indications are green outside There is no alarm active in the correspond ing wanInterface object red outside An alarm is active in the corresponding wanlnterface object green inside There is no alarm active in the correspond left ing linePair 1 object red inside left An alarm is active in the corresponding linePair 1 object green inside There is no al
46. SHDSL Router on page 17 e 2 6 3 Connecting the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router an example on page 18 16 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2 6 1 Rear view of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router The following is a rear view of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 1P 1 pair The following is a rear view of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2P 2 pair Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 17 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2 6 2 Connecting the different parts of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router The following table gives an overview of the parts located at the back of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router and reveals their function Part Label Function This is the power input Insert the plug of the external power supply in this socket Important remark In case ofa e Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 1 pair version the input voltage is 7 5 Vdc e Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2 pair version the input voltage is 9 Vdc This RJ45 Twisted Pair Interface TPI is the connection towards the IP LAN Connect one side of an RJ45 to RJ45 cable not included to the LAN connector of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router and the other side to a network outlet If you want to connect the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router to e a regular Ethernet network outlet then use a crossed RJ45 cable an Ethernet hub then use a straight RJ45 cable Ref
47. Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 16 Reference manual Downloading software 16 5 Downloading application or loader software in loader mode When a loader or application software download failed or when a flash memory error occurs it may be possible that the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router becomes inaccessible or even inoperative In that case new software can still be downloaded by forcing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router in loader mode Do this by means of the joader mode DIP switch Refer to 3 2 DIP switches of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router on page 25 To download loader or application software to a Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router in loader mode proceed as follows Disconnect the power supply and open the housing as described in 3 3 Opening and closing the housing on page 26 Set DIP switch bank DS1 position 1 to off Refer to 3 1 The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router motherboard on page 24 to locate this DIP switch bank Replace the cover without fastening the screws and reconnect the power supply The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router reboots in loader mode Now proceed as explained in the previous section 16 4 Downloading application or loader software using TML on page 359 When the software download is finished again disconnect the power supply and open the housing Reset DIP switch bank DS1 position 1 to on Properly replace the cover as described in 3 3 Opening and closing the housing on page 26 and reconnect
48. The h24Performance table contains the same elements as the telindus1421Router lanInterface h2Performance table Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 12 307 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 3 WAN interface performance attributes This section discusses the performance attributes of the WAN interface First it describes the general performance attributes of the WAN interface Then it explains the performance attributes of the encap sulation protocols that can be used on the WAN interface The following gives an overview of this section e 12 3 1 General WAN interface performance attributes on page 308 e 12 3 2 Frame Relay performance attributes on page 309 e 12 3 3 ATM performance attributes on page 312 308 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 12 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 3 1 General WAN interface performance attributes Most performance attributes of the WAN interface are the same as on the LAN interface Therefore they are not explained here again Refer to 12 2 LAN interface performance attributes on page 304 fora complete description of these attributes However the attribute ifOutPQLen is only present on the WAN interface and therefore explained below ra telindus1421Router waninterface ifOutPQLen In case an overload condition occurs and priority queuing is activated then this attribute displays how many packets the different queues contain This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter Telindus
49. The sysLocation attribute is an SNMP MIB2 parameter telindus1421Router bootFromFlash Default auto Range enumerated see below Part of the flash memory of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is organised as a file system In this file system you can store two complete application software versions You can use the bootFromFlash attribute to switch between these softwares When you store two application software versions in the file system they are automatically renamed as CONTROL1 and CONTROL4Z respectively You can check this with the status attribute telindus1421Router fileSystem fileList The bootFromFlash attribute has the following values When the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router boots the application software CONTROL1 is active the application software CONTROL2 is active the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router automatically chooses the most recent applica tion software It does this by comparing the application software version numbers Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Reference manual Chapter 10 173 Configuration attributes kal telindus1421Router security Use this attribute to create a list of passwords with associated access levels Default lt empty gt Range table see below in order to avoid unauthorised access to the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router and the network The security table contains the following elements eM password Use this element to set the password You ca
50. Use this element to activate up or deactivate down the DLCI Default up Range up down Use this element to determine whether for the corre sponding DLCI the packets are treated by the routing process the bridging process or both mode The mode element has the following values Default routing Range enumerated see below bridging All packets received on the DLCI are bridged routing All packets received on the DLCI are routed routingAndBridging The SNAP header is checked to determine whether the packets have to be bridged or routed Use this element to configure the IP related parame ters of the corresponding DLCI Refer to Default Range structure see below e 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure on page 52 for a detailed description of the ip structure 6 3 2 Configuring IP addresses on the Frame Relay WAN on page 76 for more specific information on configuring IP addresses in Frame Relay bridging Use this element to configure the bridging related parameters of the DLCI Refer to Default Range structure see below e 8 Configuring the bridge on page 137 for more information on bridging 8 9 6 Explaining the bridging structure on page 150 for a detailed description of the bridging structure frameRelay Use this element to configure the specific DLCI parameters Default Range structure s
51. Z If you consider Router A then for this router e two DLCls are configured in the frameRelay diciTable being DLCI 16 and DLCI 17 an IP address is specifically configured per DLCI in the frameRelay diciTable ip attribute no global IP address is configured for the DLCls The characteristics of a set up with a specific IP address for each DLCI are e Each DLCI is an IP interface e Pinging 10 1 0 1 results in a reply when the DLCI is up e Routes learned over one DLCI are passed to other DLCls E g a route learned over DLCI 16 is passed to DLCI 17 This means that split horizon is not applicable Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 6 79 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 3 3 Configuring the DLCls Refer to 6 3 1 Introducing Frame Relay on page 74 for an introduction on DLCls Learning the DLCls If the Frame Relay network supports LMI then the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router can learn its active and inactive DLCls If the Frame Relay network also supports the RARP Reverse Address Resolution Pro tocol protocol the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router can learn the IP address of the corresponding router for each DLCI Configuring the DLCls If neither LMI nor RARP is supported by the Frame Relay network you can configure the DLCls yourself using the diciTable Refer to telindus1421Router wanInterface frameRelay diciTable on page 185 Example The follow 192 168 100 2 ing figure gives an example of a l
52. alarmMask and alarmLevel value is given in the following table The alarm is generated linkDown when an error situation is detected in the encapsulation protocol Frame Relay PPP or ATM For instance an error condition in the Frame Relay LMI a failed authentication in PPP Default value alarmMask enabled alarmLevel 338 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 13 Reference manual Alarm attributes 13 6 Line alarms Refer to 13 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 331 for general information on the alarm attributes ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface line alarminfo The alarm related to the line object together with its explanation and default alarmMask and alarmLevel value is given in the following table The alarm is generated Default value alarmMask alarmLevel linkDown when the line is down l e no data can be transmitted enabled 3 over the line ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface line linePair alarminfo The alarm related to the linePair object together with its explanation and default alarmMask and alarmLevel value is given in the following table The alarm is generated Default value alarmMask alarmLevel linkDown when the line pair is down l e no data can be transmit enabled 3 ted over the line pair Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Reference manual 13 7 Router alarms Chapter 13 339 Alarm attributes Refer
53. already been configured but you want to start from scratch then use this action to revert to the default configuration telindus1421Router Load Saved Configuration If you execute this action the non active configuration is overwritten by the active configuration currently used by the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router After executing this action click on the TMA button Retrieve all attributes from device 4 to see the new non active configuration B When use this action If you are in the progress of modifying the non active configuration but made some mistakes then use this action to revert to the active configuration Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 175 Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1421Router Cold Boot If you execute this action the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router reboots As a result the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router performs a self test e checks the software e reads the saved configuration and restarts program execution When use this action Use this action for instance to activate new application software 176 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router im Reference manual 10 3 LAN interface configuration attributes Chapter 10 Configuration attributes telindus1421Router lanInterface name Use this attribute to assign an administrative name to the LAN interface Default lan Range 1 24 characters telindus1421Router laninterface ip Use this attribute to c
54. and routing in a network i I I I I 28 91 ZL sseuppe dyAejayowes I Bunos pow vey ujue FOSI FZZ sseuppe dieoepajujue Zdu 090 01q6uno1 13 N01 BL oip Aejayewey Buipuq pow yo jojp eweu 94 lojp Aejayouwes Bunos pow yo lo p weu qe L 9p ej y wey alge Llojp Aejayouey 001 S9 Lee 1 sseuppeydi dnosyebpiiq 13 N0H FOS ILEZZE MO C OFILZLL dl 0 0S 91 2Z1 IN 9 AIS yams Aejay ewes bGO Leck MO OL S9 LEeZI dl 9LID 10 bGOLeeZk MO L9 S9 LE ZLL dl Bulynoy 66 S9 LE ZZ ssosppe di dnouyebpug 94 191p eja yawe Bunos SL 191p ejoy we BuiBpuq zdu 000 01 4Buljnos saynod O SOLE ZZL ION apow 901 19 p aweu Zz gadis apow go lojp sweu alge Llojp Aejayourey 89 ZL sseuppe di Aejayawedy 401n0Y UeM BOBLOIU E 001 891 Z6l femal a noyjinejap se nod L OS ILZZL MO a joonol souynalseines ESI lE Z 1 di unos apow soejJa UjUe umoys ase s nquye jenu ss sow y juO 0 G9 SS SG ae sysew jougns y SyewyY FS9 LE ZLL sseuppe dyeceyeyujue 49 n0Yy O S9 LECLL ION Vadis 001 891 261 dSl JOusa U KAI 164 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 User manual Configuration examples 9 7 Connecting two networks through a tunnel This is an example of two networks being connected by two Telindus 1421 SHDS
55. attribute 282 HDLC encapsulation 92 helperProtocols attribute 208 host routes to local interface IP address 279 ifOperStatus of the WAN in terface 259 IP address on the LAN inter face in case of bridging 51 176 233 maximumSpeedSearch ac tion 274 messages attribute 250 natAddresses attribute 121 passwords 173 power input 7 5 9 VDC 17 Index priority policy on the bridge 154 rerouting principle 102 resetNat action 320 rip2Authentication attribute 109 ripv2SecretTable attribute 206 routing traffic policy on the LAN interface 53 133 selecting a speed range on the 2 pair version 57 timingMode attribute 196 rerouting principle what is 102 RIP authentication basic config uration 111 basic configuration 103 configuring 105 explaining the RIP structure 106 how works 104 introduction 104 support 104 what is 104 RIP hold down timer what is 205 RIP structure explanation 106 router alarms 339 basic configuration 93 configuration attributes 200 general configuration at tributes 201 general performance at tributes 317 general status attributes 277 introduction 94 performance attributes 316 specifications 367 status attributes 276 router applications introducing 5 routing basic activities 94 determining the optimal path 94 static versus dynamic 95 transporting packets 94 versus bridging 94 what is 94 routing and bridging perform ance specificati
56. but are table mappings estab lished by the network administrator before the beginning of routing These map pings do not change unless the network administrator alters them Static routing algorithms work well in environments where network traffic is relatively predictable and where network design is relatively simple dynamic Because static routing systems cannot react to network changes they generally are considered unsuitable for today s large constantly changing networks Most of the dominant routing algorithms today are dynamic routing algorithms which adjust to changing network circumstances by analysing incoming routing update messages If the message indicates that a network change has occurred the rout ing software recalculates routes and sends out new routing update messages These messages permeate the network stimulating routers to rerun their algo rithms and change their routing tables accordingly Also refer to 7 3 1 Introducing RIP on page 104 static and Dynamic routing algorithms can be supplemented with static routes where appro dynamic priate A router of last resort a router to which all unroutable packets are sent for example can be designated to act as a repository for all unroutable packets ensuring that all messages are at least handled in some way 96 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 2 Configuring static routes This section introduces static routi
57. configuration has been changed disabled access when a management session is started on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router itself This alarm is not activated when the management session is established through a management concentrator Example The alarm is activated in case of e a TMA TMA CLI terminal CLI or ATWIN or Easy Connect session via the control connector of the Tel indus 1421 SHDSL Router a TMA TMA CLI TMA for HP OpenView Telnet CLI or ATWIN HTTP Web Interface or TFTP session using the LAN WAN IP address of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router The alarm is not activated in case of any management session TMA terminal Telnet HTTP etc established through a management con centrator on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router SNMP management disabled unknownState each time a new Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is added to the network and before the management concentrator has completed a first successful polling session disabled coldBoot each time the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router performs a cold boot disabled Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 13 335 Reference manual Alarm attributes The alarm is generated Default value alarmMask alarmLevel warmBoot each time the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router performs a disabled warm boot codeConsistency when the software consistency imposed by the manage disabled Fail ment concentrator on the Telindus 1421 SHD
58. connection possibilities eee eeeeee cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaeeees 8 2 Installing and connecting the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Routet 08 9 Zl TOATSLY INSUFUGCHONS as cries fared is tes T le ahs eve aes ead E 10 2 2 Unpacking sessar insirrita ke doste una vs ari chee ean eeedgeuet a eand anaes tease needs 11 2 3 Selecting a Steira Geeta nice aaa Garda a aad Ea a ea Ghia Saale ee 12 2 4 Installation and connection precautions ccceecceeceeeeceeceeeeeeeeeaeeeaeecaeeaeeeaeeeaeeees 13 2 5 Line Speed precautions etare er a a E E E e 14 2 6 Connecting the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router eesseeeeeeeeeeeeerrrrireessrrrrrreessreeee 15 2 7 The front panel LED indicators ccc ceeseesseeceeeeeeeeaeeeaeecaeeeaaeeaaeeaeeaaeeaaeeaeeeaeeeaeeees 19 3 DIP switches of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router ccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 23 3 1 The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router motherboard cccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 24 3 2 DIP switches of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router ccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 25 3 3 Opening and closing the NOUSING ce cc eceeeeeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteneeseeneneeneeeeeee 26 4 Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router c cscs eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 27 4 1 Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router with TMA ccccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 28 4 2 Introducing the management terminology cccecceece
59. containment tree It then explains why and how to refer to this object The following gives an overview of this section e 4 4 1 Why add an object to the containment tree on page 40 e 4 4 2 How to add an object to the containment tree on page 41 e 4 4 3 Referring to an added object on page 43 40 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 4 User manual Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 4 4 1 Why add an object to the containment tree Why can you add an object to the containment tree Some objects are not present in the containment tree by default but you can add them yourself because e inthis way the containment tree remains clear and surveyable e you possibly do not need the functions associated with such an object e you possibly need several of these objects so you can add as many objects as you like When do you have to add an object to the containment tree If you want to use the features associated with such an object then you have to add the object first Which objects can be added to the containment tree Section 4 3 The objects in the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router containment tree on page 38 gives you an overview of all the objects in the containment tree It also tells you which objects have to be added before you can use them Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 4 41 User manual Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 4 4 2 How to add an object to the containment tree The section shows you for each managem
60. d7Line This attribute displays the 7 days performance information summary of the line The d7Line table contains the same elements as the telindus1421Router wanInterface line h2Line table telindus1421Router wanInterfacelline line This attribute displays the performance information summary of the line since the last cold boot Except for the sysUpTime the line structure contains the same elements as the telindus1421Router waninterface line h2Line table telindus1421Router waninterface line retrain Use this action to force a retrain on the line 314 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 12 Reference manual Performance attributes Line pair performance attributes ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface line linePair 1 h2LineParameters This attribute displays the 2 hours line parameter summary The h2LineParameters table contains the following elements Element For the corresponding period this element displays sysUpTime the elapsed time since the last cold boot lineAttenuationMin the minimum line attenuation that was measured lineAttenuationAvrg the average line attenuation that was calculated lineAttenuationMax the maximum line attenuation that was measured signalNoiseMin the minimum signal to noise ratio that was measured signalNoiseAvrg the average signal to noise ratio that was calculated signalNoiseMax the maximum signal to noise ratio that was measured ra telindu
61. enumerated see below Use this attribute to determine whether the packets are treated by the rout ing process the bridging process or both The mode attribute has the following values bridging All packets are bridged The settings of the IP configuration attributes of the LAN are ignored If you want to manage the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router via IP you have to configure an IP address in the bridgeGroup object Refer to telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup ip on page 233 routing The IP packets are routed All other protocols are discarded routingAndBridging IP packets are routed Non IP packets are bridged telindus1421Router laninterface bridging Default Range structure see below Use this attribute to configure the bridging related parameters of the LAN interface Refer to e 8 Configuring the bridge on page 137 for more information on bridging e 8 9 6 Explaining the bridging structure on page 150 for a detailed description of the bridging structure telindus1421 Router lanInterface adapter Default autoDetect Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to set the Ethernet mode of the LAN interface The adapter attribute has the following values autoDetect 10Mb halfDuplex 10Mb fullDuplex 100Mb halfDuplex telindus1421Router lanInterface alarmMask telindus1421Router lanInterface alarmLevel Refer to e 13 2 Introducing the alarm att
62. file name in a struc ture Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 299 Reference manual Status attributes 11 10 Operating system status attributes kal telindus1421Router operatingSystem taskInfo This attribute displays status information about the operating system The taskInfo table contains the following elements omnt PET e l taskName This is the name of the task taskStatus This is the current status of the task Possible values are awake This task is actually running asleep This task is waiting on an event inactive This task slot is not active i e no task has been assigned to this slot load30s This is the load on the processor in percent during the last 30 seconds load5m This is the load on the processor in percent during the last 5 minutes runningInMedium Each task can be running with a low medium or high priority This element gives the percentage of time this task has been running with medium priority during the last 30 seconds runningInHigh Each task can be running with a low medium or high priority This element gives the percentage of time this task has been running with high priority during the last 30 seconds The percentage of time this task has been running with low priority can be calcu lated using the following formula running in low priority 100 runninglnMedium runningInHigh programCounter This is the current valu
63. filter that you have to define in the Alarm Manager of TMA for HP OpenView In the Alarm Manager it is possible to specify a minimum alarm level that is needed before alarms are logged in HP OpenView This can be specified for each filter number Loop back configuration attributes telindus1421Router management loopback ipAddress Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 Use this attribute to assign an IP address to the loop back interface The loop back interface is a software interface which can be used for management purposes This inter face is always up regardless of the state of the physical interfaces This means the router will always respond to ICMP echo requests sent to this address In every other respect the loop back address behaves the same as an IP address of a physical interface If the loop back address is used and RIP is active then a host route to the loop back address is included in the RIP updates 244 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 245 Reference manual Status attributes 11 Status attributes This chapter discusses the status attributes of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router The following gives an overview of this chapter e 11 1 Status attribute overview on page 246 e 11 2 General status attributes on page 248 e 11 3 LAN interface status attributes on page 251 e 11 4 WAN interface status attr
64. for these requests on the public network However the DMZ host is not able to initiate a session back into the private network It can only forward packets that have already been requested Users of the public network outside the company can access only the DMZ host The DMZ may typically also have the company s Web pages so these could be served to the outside world However the DMZ provides access to no other company data In the event that an outside user penetrated the DMZ host s security the Web pages might be corrupted but no other company information would be exposed 218 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 6 3 L2TP tunnel configuration attributes ra telindus1421Router router tunnels l2tpTunnels Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to configure the Layer 2 Tunnelling Protocol tunnels you want to set up The l2tpTunnels table contains the following elements mon pee o Use this element to assign an administrative name to Default lt empty gt the tunnel Range 0 24 characters adminStatus Use this element to activate up or deactivate the tun Default down nel down Range up down mode Use this element to determine whether for the corre Defauit routing sponding tunnel IP packets are treated by the routing Range enumerated see below process the bridging process or both The mode elem
65. information TMA CLI TMA CLI TMA Command Line Interface enables you to use its commands in scripts in order to automate management actions This is particularly useful in large networks TMA CLI is a complementary product to TMA and TMA for HP OpenView Refer to the TMA CLI manual for more information ATWIN ATWIN is a menu driven user interface You can read and change all attributes as with TMA but in a more basic textual representation using a VT100 terminal Refer to the Maintenance Tools manual for more information CLI CLI is also a Command Line Interface although not so extensive as TMA CLI Experienced users who are familiar with the syntax can access the Telindus devices more quickly than with TMA or ATWIN Refer to the Maintenance Tools manual for more information Web Interface The Web Interface is an ATWIN alike menu driven user interface You can read and change all attributes as with TMA but in a more basic representation using a web browser Refer to the Maintenance Tools manual for more information EasyConnect terminal Connecting the Telindus EasyConnect hand held terminal through the control con nector to the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router allows you to manage the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router in a basic way using the LCD display and keyboard This is called keyboard management Refer to the EasyConnect manual for more information Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 1 U
66. interface Use this element to specify on which interface the Default all secret is used Range 0 24 characters Entering the string all default means the secret is used on all the interfaces D Remarks e If authentication is enabled either text or md5 then only updates using that authentication are proc essed All other updates on that interface are discarded e If you use md5 and if for a certain interface multiple secrets are present in the ripv2SecretTable then the first entry in the ripv2SecretTable is used to transmit RIP updates Authentication of the received RIP updates is done by looking for the first secret with a matching key e Ifyou use text and if for a certain interface multiple secrets are present in the ripv2SecretTable then only the first entry in the ripv2SecretTable is used to transmit and receive RIP updates Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Reference manual Chapter 10 207 Configuration attributes telindus1421Router router sysSecret Use this attribute for the CHAP authentication process The CHAP authen ticator uses the sysSecret attribute in order to verify the peer its response Default lt empty gt Range 0 64 characters Refer to 6 2 4 Configuring PPP authentication on page 72 for more information on CHAP authentica tion kal telindus1421Router router pppSecretTable Use this attribute for the CHAP authentication process Enter the CHAP name and
67. its own bridging table p802 1D The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router uses the self learning principle in conjunction with the Spanning Tree protocol Because Spanning Tree bridging is somewhat more complicated than self learning bridging an introduction is given in 8 2 The self learning and Transparent Span ning Tree bridge on page 139 When using Frame Relay or ATM encapsulation on the WAN interface together with the Spanning Tree protocol every DLCI or PVC link is considered as a sepa rate bridge port Each link is than considered as a special kind of LAN with only both end points connected bridgePriority Use this element to set the priority of the bridge Default 32768 The bridge its MAC address together with the Range 0 65535 bridgePriority element form a unique bridge identifier This identifier is used to deter mine which bridge becomes the root bridge The bridge with the lowest bridgePriority value becomes the root bridge If two bridges have the same bridgePriority value then the bridge with the lowest MAC address becomes the root bridge bridgeMaxAge Use this element to set the time the bridge retains Default 00000d 00h 00m 20s bridging information before discarding it Range 00000d 00h 00m 06s 00000d 00h 00m 40s bridgeHelloTime Use this element to set the interval by which the root Default 00000d 00h 00m 02s bridge sends Configuration BPDUs also called Hello Range 00000d 00h 00
68. loader software using TML eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeee 359 16 5 Downloading application or loader software in loader Mod cccccceeeeeeeees 360 17 Technical specifications 2x siccecetcessccsiisiaecs cect cecean stenssceacececessaaadsanenteeseecetaseeasand 361 17 1 Line specifications ee cc ceeeeeeeeeeeeecseeeeeeeaaeeaeeaaecaaeeaecececeaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeees 362 17 2 LAN interface specifications ccccceeceseeceeccaeecaeeeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeess 364 17 3 Control connector specifications cecceeeeseeeeeeeceeceeeeaeeaaeeaaeaaaeeaeeeaeeaaeeaeeeaeeees 365 17 4 ATM encapsulation Specifications cccccscccecccsecceccceeceecceeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 366 17 5 Frame Relay encapsulation Specifications cccccecccecccsecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 366 17 6 PPP encapsulation Specifications c cccccecceeeessececeeeeeeaeeeaaeeaaeeaeeeaeeaaeeaeeeaeeaes 366 17 7 IP routing specifications ascii dersecudieiaiag Neceheetiatas dh iudts hodedauniayaetoiadaiek Maw ehiendesiabeaayyess 367 17 8 Bridging specifications nAn ane Ae as oe Re eee 367 17 9 Routing and bridging performance Specifications cccccceeeeeeeeeennteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 367 17 10 Power requirements 0 cccceeeeecseecceeceeeeaaeaaeecaeeaaecaeceaecececeeeeceeeeeeeeseceaeseeeeeeeeeess 368 TE eTABIMOEMSIONS EEE E sseviiaa tates deh etn tinct tants E ET
69. of devices on local Use NAT of PAT Refer to addresses network more than 1 Use PAT 7 4 3 Configuring PAT on page 115 k gt 1 more than k Use NAT in combination 7 4 9 Combining PAT with PAT and NAT on page 123 at least k k 2 1 1 No translation 1 Skip this section needed 2 7 4 7 Configuring Ifyou wanttranslation NAT on page 121 use NAT Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 115 User manual Configuring the router 7 4 3 Configuring PAT Use the following to configure PAT e Use the patAddress attribute to enter official IP address that has to be used for Port Address Transla tion Refer to telindus1421Router router defaultNat patAddress on page 215 e Use the gateway attribute to define the gateway addresses from routes on which NAT or PAT should be applied Refer to telindus1421Router router defaultNat gateway on page 216 Example of a network topology for Internet connection Consider the following network topology A Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is installed at your site The Internet Service Provider has an IP router with a high speed Frame Relay interface or one or more G 704 framed E1 interfaces running PPP You received only one single official IP address from you ISP being 195 7 12 22 IP address WAN interface IP address WAN interface 195 7 12 22 195 7 12 254 Frame Relay or PDH SDH network ISP PN Internet New Router modem IP subn
70. or retrieved automat ically netMask This is the IP subnet mask of the PPP link It is either configured or retrieved auto matically remote This is the IP address of the remote end of the PPP link It is either configured or retrieved automatically ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface ppp lcpState This attribute reflects the status of the LCP Link Control Protocol protocol Possible values are Initial LCP handshake has not started yet Starting Closed These values correspond with the transient states in the LCP state diagram Stopped Closing Stopping Req Sent The local side of the PPP link has sent an LCP request The remote side did not answer yet Ack Revd The local side of the PPP link has received an LCP acknowledge from the remote side This is a transient state Ack Sent The local side of the PPP link has acknowledged the LCP request from the remote side Opened The LCP handshake succeeded ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface ppp ipcpState This attribute reflects the status of the IPCP Internet Protocol Control Protocol protocol The possible values are the same as those of telindus1421Router wanlnterface ppp lcpState ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface ppp bcpState This attribute reflects the status of the BCP Bridging Control Protocol protocol The possible values are the same as those of telindus1421Router wanlnterface ppp lcpState Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter
71. packet is forwarded towards the Internet Each ICMP packet is considered as a new session If there is no traffic for 5 to 10 minutes the session is closed The fact that it is possible to open a total of 2048 simultaneous sessions and that each ICMP packet is considered as a new session implies that for instance a continuous series of ping requests at a rate of one per second will allocate between 300 and 600 sessions 118 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router Incoming traffic from the Internet Suppose the WAN IP network depicted in 7 4 3 Configuring PAT on page 115 works in numbered mode The incoming traffic from the Internet may be destined either for the local network or for the Tel indus 1421 SHDSL Router itself The router treats incoming traffic on the PAT address as follows The route replies on this request Transport protocol Echo request Search corresponding request and send to TCP UDP originator Send to originator that caused the error Router error message Destination IP address PAT address AND The router forwards the port number previously packet after IP address port allocated port number for number replacement on the outgoing traffic local network Does the PAT address match the IP address of the WAN interface and is this port number known by the router its protocol stack TMA Telnet SNMP TFTP
72. port number When other devices using the same application hence the same port number try to send traffic to the same Internet destination address PAT discards this traffic It is also possible to define port ranges that PAT should always discard The port translation range PAT uses goes from 60928 up to 65535 The portTranslations table contains the following elements Fe A ic protocol Use this element to select the protocol tcp or udp Default tcp Range tcp udp startPort Use this element to set the lowest value of the TCP or UDP port range Default 0 Range 0 65535 endPort Use this element to set the highest value of the TCP or UDP port range Default lt opt gt Range 0 65535 If no endPort value is defined lt opt gt then the port range is limited to the startPort value only action Use this element to set the action in case a packet is received with a source port number that falls within the specified port range The action element has the following values Default noTranslation Range enumerated see below noTranslation The port numbers that fall within the specified port range are not translated deny Packets with port numbers that fall within the specified port range are discarded 216 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes kal telindus1421Router router defaultNat serv
73. ppp bridging traf ficPolicy You can find the trafficPolicy element in the bridging structure within the pvcTable attribute under the atm object telindus1421Router wanInterface atm pvcTable bridging trafficPolicy This means that you can specify a traffic policy per PVC tunnels in the bridging structure within the 2tpTunnels attribute under the tunnels object telindus1421Router router tunnels I2tp Tunnels bridging trafficPolicy 1 The interface can be a physical interface such as the LAN interface but can also be a DLCI a PVC a tunnel etc 156 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 User manual Configuring the bridge Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 157 User manual Configuration examples 9 Configuration examples This chapter shows some configuration examples for the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router The following gives an overview of this chapter 9 1 LAN extension over a PDH SDH network on page 158 9 2 LAN extension over a Frame Relay network on page 159 9 3 LAN extension over an ATM network on page 160 9 4 Connecting a LAN to the Internet using NAT and PAT on page 161 9 5 Using PAT over PPP with a minimum of official IP addresses on page 162 9 6 Combining bridging and routing in a network on page 163 9 7 Connecting two networks through a tunnel on page 164 9 8 Connecting VLAN enabled switches over a WAN on page 166 158 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router User manual Chapter 9
74. protocol number For ease of use some common protocols can be selected from a drop down box any 0 ICMP 1 IGMP 2 IPinIP 4 TCP 6 EGP 8 IGP 9 UDP 17 RSVP 46 IGRP 88 OSPFIGP 89 TCPestablished 255 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 225 Reference manual Configuration attributes Fa O a a a a sourcePortStart Use these elements to set the source port as specified Default any start optional end in the UDP TCP headers Range 0 65535 sourcePortEnd Packets that fall within the specified range are forwarded and queued if applicable You can specify the port by typing the protocol number For ease of use some common port numbers can be selected from a drop down box any or optional 0 echo 7 discard 9 ftp data 20 ftp 21 telnet 23 smtp 25 domain 53 www http 80 pop3 110 nntp 119 snmp 161 snmptrap 162 239 50 210 syslog 514 router 520 socks 1080 I2tp 1701 telindus 1728 destinationPortStart Use these elements to set the destination port as Default any start optional end specified in the UDP TCP headers Range 0 65535 destinationPortEnd Packets that fall within the specified range are forwarded and queued if applicable You can specify the port by typing the protocol number For ease of use some common port numbers can be selected from a drop down box see above newTosValue Use this ele
75. range Refer to 5 3 2 Selecting a line speed range on page 57 for more information on the speed range Refer to 10 5 Line configuration attributes on page 196 for a complete overview of the line configuration attributes Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 57 User manual Basic configuration 5 3 2 Selecting a line speed range Selecting a speed range The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router features auto speed negotiation according to ITU T G 994 1 During this negotiation the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router selects a speed within the range from the minimum speed up to the maximum speed as set with the minSpeed 2P and maxSpeed 2P attributes Important remark In case of a Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2 pair version define a speed range either on the central or on the remote Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router but not on both Else the 2 line pairs could train at a differ ent speed which is not allowed Selecting a fixed speed If you set the minSpeed 2P and maxSpeed 2P attribute to the same value then the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router operates at a fixed speed Fall back speed When you define a speed range the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router will always try to operate at the max imum speed If the remote does not allow that speed or the signal quality deteriorates then the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router tries to select the second speed down the range If also this speed fails the Telin dus 1421 SHDSL Router again lowers its speed It doe
76. structure on page 52 for a detailed description of the ip structure Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 6 77 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols Example DLCI global IP Suppose you have the following set up Network Y Network X Router A 10 0 0 1 ote Router C Network Z If you consider Router A then for this router e two DLCls are configured in the frameRelay diciTable being DLCI 16 and DLCI 17 no IP addresses are specifically configured for these DLCls e inthe frameRelay ip attribute a global IP address is configured for the DLCls being 10 0 0 3 The characteristics of a set up with a global IP address for the DLCls are Broadcasts are copied and sent over all DLCls that use the global IP address E g pinging 10 0 0 255 results in a reply from 10 0 0 1 10 0 0 2 and 10 0 0 3 e Pinging 10 0 0 3 results in a reply when LMI is up e Routes learned over one DLCI are not passed to other DLCls E g a route learned over DLCI 16 is not passed to DLCI 17 This means that split horizon is applicable RIP only functions if the network is fully meshed l e if every router is directly connected to its neigh bour with a DLCI as in the example above 78 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 6 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols Example DLCI specific IP Suppose you have the following set up Network Y Network X 10 1 0 1 10 2 0 1 Router C Network
77. telindus1421Router waninterface frameRelay Imi auto is set to noLmi then the value of the status element telindus1421Router wanlnterface frameRelay Imi status Status is always up However the other conditions as stated in the table above remain In case of PPP if the configuration element telindus1421Router wanlnterface ppp linkMonitoring operation is set to disabled then it is possible that the wanlnterface ifOperStatus value does not go down even if the link quality is too bad for a proper data link This because the link monitoring mechanism is the only PPP mechanism that will start a renegotiation of the LCP layer In case of ATM if the configuration element telindus1421Router wanlnterface atm pvcTable atm oamF5Loopback is set to disabled then the ifOperStatus of the PVC becomes up when the ATM is syn chronised globally However this does not guarantee that the PVC is configured correctly on the remote side However the other conditions as stated in the table above remain Chapter 11 259 260 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes 11 4 2 PPP status attributes ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface ppp ip This attribute displays the IP information of the PPP link The ip structure contains the following elements eon peen O status This is the current operational status of the IP layer layer 3 of the PPP link address This is the IP address of the PPP link It is either configured
78. the alarmlnfo alarm attribute of an object regardless of the masking of the alarm l e even if an alarm is set to disabled in the alarmMask of an object if the alarm condition is fulfilled then the alarm will be set to on in the alarminfo of that object However because this alarm is disabled it will not be sent to the central management system e g HP OpenView Only the most important alarms are unmasked i e enabled by default All other alarms are masked i e disabled telindus1421Router alarmLevel Use this attribute to assign a priority level to each alarm of the corresponding object The alarm level range goes from 0 to 254 where 0 is the lowest and 254 is the highest priority level The alarmLevel of an unmasked active alarm is sent to the totalAlarmLevel alarm attribute of the top object telindus1421Router Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 13 333 Reference manual Alarm attributes 13 2 2 General alarm attributes ra telindus1421Router totalAlarmLevel This attribute is only present in the top object of the containment tree of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router being telindus1421Router It displays the priority level of an unmasked active alarm When several alarms are generated at the same time the highest priority level is shown If the alarm levels are set in a structured manner one look at the totalAlarmLevel attribute enables the operator to make a quick estimation of the problem The value of the tota
79. the multicast address interface This is the interface name of the client s In case of multiple interface names they are separated from each other by a comma What is IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is defined in RFC1112 as the standard for IP multicasting in the Internet It is used to establish host memberships in particular multicast groups on a single network The mecha nisms of the protocol allow a host to inform its local router using Host Membership Reports that it wants to receive messages addressed to a specific multicast group All hosts conforming to level 2 of the IP multicasting specification require IGMP IGMP topology Consider the following multicasting topology LAN 1 Client 1 or Server 2 igmp Aa SS igmp Router 2 Router 1 Switch In this topology e Client 1 and Client 2 are multicast clients e Router 1 2 and 3 are multicast enabled routers e Server 1 is a multicast server e Switch is a Frame Relay or ATM switch Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 281 Reference manual Status attributes The following are some characteristics of an IGMP topology An IGMP router queries an IGMP proxy Only 1 IGMP proxy can be defined per device The TTL of an IGMP frame is always 1 IGMP messages are never forwarded An IGMP frame contains an IP router alert option IGMPv1 routers may be present in the network The multicasting IGMP protocol can b
80. the power supply Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 17 361 Reference manual Technical specifications 17 Technical specifications This chapter gives the technical specifications of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router The following gives an overview of this chapter e 17 1 Line specifications on page 362 e 17 2 LAN interface specifications on page 364 e 17 3 Control connector specifications on page 365 e 17 4 ATM encapsulation specifications on page 366 e 17 5 Frame Relay encapsulation specifications on page 366 e 17 6 PPP encapsulation specifications on page 366 e 17 7 IP routing specifications on page 367 e 17 8 Bridging specifications on page 367 e 17 9 Routing and bridging performance specifications on page 367 e 17 10 Power requirements on page 368 e 17 11 Dimensions on page 368 e 17 12 Safety compliance on page 368 e 17 13 Over voltage and over current protection compliance on page 368 e 17 14 EMC compliance on page 368 e 17 15 Environmental compliance on page 369 362 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 17 Reference manual Technical specifications 17 1 Line specifications e Applicable standards ITU T G 991 2 G 994 Single pair or two pair line access e Connector RJ12 e Impedance 135 ohm e Coding TC PAM compliant to ITU T G 991 2 G SHDSL e Line speeds Single pair N x 64 kbps N 1 36 Two pair N x 128 kbps N 1 36 e Handshaking compliant G 994 1 autom
81. the router object and by configuring the attributes in this object Example If you created a trafficPolicy object with index name my_traffic_policy tralficPolicy i e trafficPolicy my_traffic_policy and you want to apply this traffic policy here then enter the index name as value for the trafficPolicy N element Refer to e 7 6 Configuring traffic and priority policy on the router on page 127 for more information on policies 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 39 for more information on adding objects On the LAN interface you can not apply a traffic policy with the purpose of queue ing On this interface the traffic policy is intended to serve as extended access list Refer to 7 7 Configuring an extended access list on page 135 Use this element to enable forward or disable dis Defayit enabled card directed broadcasts Range enabled disabled What is a directed broadcast A directed broadcast is an IP packet destined for a complete sub network For example a packet destined for all devices on subnetwork 192 168 48 0 with sub net mask 255 255 255 0 has destination address 192 168 48 255 l e all ones in the subnet area of the IP address icmpRedirects Use this element to enable or disable the transmission Defayltenabled of ICMP messages Range enabled disabled What is an ICMP redirect If iompRedirects is enabled and if the Telindus 1421 SHD
82. to 13 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 331 for general information on the alarm attributes telindus1421Router router alarmInfo The alarm related to the router object together with its explanation and default alarmMask and alarmLevel value is given in the following table The alarm is generated pingActive in case of a pending ping for example an indefinite ping This notification is necessary because you can only transmit one ping at a time Furthermore there is no pro tection when a new ping is started before the previous is stopped Default value alarmMask enabled alarmLevel 340 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 13 Reference manual Alarm attributes Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 14 341 Reference manual TMA sub system picture 14 TMA sub system picture The sub system picture is a TMA tool that visualises the status information of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router This chapter explains how to display the sub system picture and how to interpret the visual indi cations How to display the sub system picture To display the sub system picture of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router click on the sub system picture button located in the TMA toolbar Bl Structure of the sub system picture This paragraph displays and labels the different elements of the sub system picture It also explains how the visual indications should be interpreted Below the Telindus 1421 SHDSL
83. to a remote network over a leased line Refer to 1 2 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router applications on page 5 for some typical applications In this set up e the CTRL connector is connected to the COM port of a computer using a straight male female DB9 cable In this way you can for example manage the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router locally using TMA CLI CLI ATWIN etc e the LAN connector is connected to an Ethernet hub using a straight RJ45 RJ45 cable In this way the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is connected to your local network LAN e the external power supply is connected to the power input Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 19 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2 7 The front panel LED indicators This section gives an overview of the front panel LEDs and what they indicate The following gives an overview of this section e 2 7 1 Introducing the front panel LEDs on page 20 2 7 2 The power LED PWR on page 21 e 2 7 3 The line link LED LINE LNK1 LNK2 on page 21 e 2 7 4 The line data LED LINE ACT on page 21 e 2 7 5 The LAN LED LAN ACT on page 21 20 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2 7 1 Introducing the front panel LEDs When all the connections are made and the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is powered the LEDs on the front panel reflect the actual status of the device The following
84. to electrostatic discharges ESD and should be handled with care It is advisable to ensure an optimal electrical contact between yourself the working area and a safety ground before touching any circuit board Take special care not to touch any component or connector on the circuit board EMC WARNING EMC compliant installation The Telindus access products are fully EMC compliant To ensure compliance with EMC directive 89 336 EEC shielded cables or ferrite beads have to be used ANMERKUNG Das Ger t kann gespeist wurden durch ein IT power System 14 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2 5 Line speed precautions WARNING In order to respect the interface specifications of your telecom lines please consult your dealer and your telecom provider for advice before using line speeds above 1152kbps A WARNING UK users only In order to respect the UK Telecom Approval granted to this equipment it is forbidden to use a line speed of 128 kbps by any means Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 15 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2 6 Connecting the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router This section explains how to connect the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router The following gives an overview of this section e 2 6 1 Rear view of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router on page 16 e 2 6 2 Connecting the different parts of the Telindus 1421
85. tributes 180 general performance at tributes 308 general status attributes 258 performance attributes 307 status attributes 257 warning EMC 13 ESD 13 important safety instruc tions 10 line speed precautions 14 safety 10 selecting a site 12
86. type Circuit type LAN connector SHDSL line connector control connector e SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage local connection e g PC to Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router or leased line inside the building e TNV 1 Telecom Network Voltage leased line outside the building e TNV 2 PSTN from PABX inside the building e TNV 3 PSTN from operator PABX outside the building NZ ZN Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Copyright safety and statements iii User and reference manual Statements C http www telindusproducts com Products gt Choose a product gt Download certificates Hereby Telindus declares that this Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router complies with the essential require ments and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Hierbij verklaart Telindus dat deze Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router overeenstemt met de essenti le vere isten en andere relevante bepalingen van Richtlijn 1999 5 EC Par la pr sente Telindus d clare que ce Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router est en conformit avec les exi gences essentielles et autres articles applicables de la Directive 1999 5 EC Hiermit Telindus erkl rt da dieser Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router in Fugsamkeit ist mit den wesentli chen Anforderungen und anderen relevanten Bereitstellungen von Direktive 1999 5 EC Mediante la presente Telindus declara que el Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router cumple con los requisitos esenciales y las demas prescripciones relevantes d
87. version e External power adapters available for 48Vdc and 230 Vac 17 11 Dimensions e Height 45 mm e Width 220 mm Depth 235 mm e Weight 700 g 17 12 Safety compliance EN60950 e Class 1 equipment for Table Tops with 115 230 Vac internal power supply e Class 3 equipment for Table Tops with 115 230 Vac external power supply adapter Table Tops with 48 Vdc internal power supply Card Versions 17 13 Over voltage and over current protection compliance The over voltage and over current protection complies with ITU T K 44 and ETSI ETS 300 386 2 recom mendations 17 14 EMC compliance e EN55022 B Emissions e EN55024 Immunity e EN61000 3 2 Harmonics e EN61000 3 3 Voltage fluctuations and flicker e EN61000 4 2 ESD e EN61000 4 3 Radiated immunity e EN61000 4 4 EFT burst e EN61000 4 5 Surge e EN61000 4 6 Conducted immunity e N61000 4 8 Power magnetic field immunity e EN61000 4 11 Voltage dips amp drops e ENV50204 Radiated immunity against digital radio telephone Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 17 369 Reference manual Technical specifications 17 15 Environmental compliance e Storage conditions ETSI ETS 300 019 1 1 Class 1 1 In addition the storage temperature has to be between 25 to 70 C Transport conditions ETSI ETS 300 019 1 2 Class 2 3 e Stationary use conditions ETSI ETS 300 019 1 3 Class 3 2 In addition the requirements below apply relative humidity 5 to 95 non cond
88. wanInterface atm pvcTa ble atm on page 191 e Set the multiProtocolMech to vcMultiplexing for the relevant PVC refer to telindus1421Router wanInterface atm pvcTable atm on page 191 q Note that Reverse ARP is always in use Therefore there is no dedicated attribute to enable or disable RARP Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 6 91 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 5 Configuring HDLC encapsulation This section introduces the HDLC encapsulation protocol and gives a short description of the attributes you can use to configure this encapsulation protocol The following gives an overview of this section e 6 5 1 Introducing HDLC on page 92 e 6 5 2 Configuring HDLC on page 92 92 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 6 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 5 1 Introducing HDLC High level Data Link Control HDLC encapsulation means that the Ethernet frames are put in an HDLC frame without any additional encapsulation such as Frame Relay or PPP This means that there is no protocol which monitors the status of the link but it also means that there is no encapsulation overhead Because the Ethernet frames are directly encapsulated only bridging is possible Important remark The HDLC encapsulation on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is compatible with the HDLC encapsula tion on the Crocus Bridge interface It is however not compatible with the Cisco HDLC encapsulation 6 5 2 Co
89. 0 Configuration attributes ra telindus1421Router router dhcpDynamic Use this attribute to specify the IP address range from which an IP address Default lt empty gt Range table see below may be dynamically assigned to a client its MAC address The dhcpDynamic table contains the following elements mn essen O ipStartAddress Use this element to define the start address of the IP Default 0 0 0 0 address range It is from this range that an IP address Range up to 255 255 255 255 will be dynamically assigned to a client If no IP start address is specified all other attributes on the same line in the table are ignored ipEndAddress Use this element to define the end address of the IP Default 0 0 0 0 address range It is from this range that an IP address will be dynamically assigned to a client Range up to 255 255 255 255 The IP address range will only contain the ipStartAddress in case e no ipEndAddress is specified e the specified ipEndAddress is the same as the ipStartAddress e the specified ipEndAddress is smaller than the ipStartAddress e the specified ipEndAddress belongs to another subnet than the ipStartAddress mask Use this element to set the client its subnet mask for Defaylt 255 255 255 0 the specified IP address range Range up to 255 255 255 255 gateway Use this element to set the default
90. 2 Example tml fsourcefile destinationfile pwd Enter the password after the destination file name Separate password and file name by a Example put sourcefile destinationfile pwd P P 62 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Basic configuration 5 5 Configuring the major features of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router The following list shows you where you can find an introduction to and a basic configuration of the most important features of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 6 1 Selecting a WAN encapsulation protocol on page 68 6 3 Configuring Frame Relay encapsulation on page 73 6 2 Configuring PPP encapsulation on page 69 6 4 Configuring ATM encapsulation on page 82 7 2 Configuring static routes on page 96 7 3 Configuring the Routing Information Protocol on page 103 7 4 Configuring address translation on page 112 7 5 Configuring L2TP tunnelling on page 124 7 6 Configuring traffic and priority policy on the router on page 127 7 7 Configuring an extended access list on page 135 8 9 Configuring bridging on page 147 8 10 Configuring traffic and priority policy on the bridge on page 152 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 63 User manual Basic configuration 5 6 Executing configuration actions This section shows you how to execute actions on the configuration The following gives an overview of this section e 5 6 1 What are the different configuration types on p
91. 21 SHDSL Router through the control connector and then configuring an IP address and a default gateway Refer to the 5 2 Configuring IP addresses on page 49 Click on the Next gt button The second Connect window is displayed Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 4 User manual Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 33 In the Connect select a device window pro ceed as follows to connect to the Address z local Tel ind us 1421 S H DS L Route r Se lect On Choose whether to connect on the network device itself de vi e oa device erect if so specify its address On device remote Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router select C After device After device enter 1 in the NMS address field Hd atl and select Relative If previously a password has been configured in the remote Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router then also fill in the password field You can only connect to a remote Telindus 1421 Security SHDSL Router if the data link is up You might specify a password to connect to the device If not the network password will be used if any Password Cancel Click on the Finish button After a couple of seconds the attributes of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router appear in the TMA window 34 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 4 User manual Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 4 2 Introducing the management terminology This section briefly introduces the terminology concerning th
92. 21Router router alarmMask kal telindus1421Router router alarmLevel Refer to e 13 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 331 for more information on the configuration attributes alarmMask and alarmLevel and on the alarms in general e 13 7 Router alarms on page 339 for more information on the alarms of the router object Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Reference manual 10 6 2 Default NAT configuration attributes Chapter 10 215 Configuration attributes ra telindus1421Router router defaultNat patAddress Use this attribute to enter the official IP address that has to be used for the Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 Port Address Translation Entering an address different from the default value 0 0 0 0 automatically ena bles PAT Refer to 7 4 Configuring address translation on page 112 for more information on PAT kal telindus1421Router router defaultNat portTranslations Use this attribute to define specific port number ranges that should not be translated Default lt empty gt Range table see below Some TCP or UDP applications do not allow port translations these applications require a dedicated source port number In the portTranslations table you can define UDP and TCP port ranges that should not be translated If a packet with a source port number in such a range is received PAT replaces only the source IP address provided it is the first device using this
93. 255 0 The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router uses this received IP address as its LAN IP address It is stored in the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router its volatile memory This means that after a cold boot the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router has to request the LAN IP address again 346 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 15 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 15 3 Getting the configuration with TFTP Once the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router has obtained an IP address it is reachable over its LAN inter face Now you can start a TMA or a Telnet session on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router and configure it Alternatively the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router can retrieve its complete configuration without any user intervention As long as the previously obtained IP addresses are not stored in non volatile memory the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router tries to get a complete configuration file from a TFTP server The configuration file and TFTP The Trivial File Transfer Protocol is typically used in combination with BootP to obtain the configuration of a device from a TFTP server The configuration file on this TFTP can be ina binary or an ASCII format How to build such files is explained in 15 4 Creating configuration files on page 349 Getting the configuration file with TFTP The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router asks for its configuration file as follows SN O O O The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router sends a DNS request on the interface for which it
94. 28 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 201 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 6 1 General router configuration attributes telindus1421Router router defaultRoute Default Use this attribute to set the default route also called gateway address Range structure see below Refer to 7 2 Configuring static routes on page 96 for more information on static routes The defaultRoute structure contains the following elements a a gateway Use this element to specify the IP address of the next Default 0 0 0 0 router that will route all packets for which no specific Range up to 255 255 255 255 static or dynamic route exists in the routing table Whether you can omit the gateway element or not is linked to the following condi tions If the interface element specifies the LAN interface you can not omit the gateway element the WAN interface you can omit the gateway element only when using PPP encapsulation a DLCI PVC or tunnel you can omit the gateway element interface Use this element to specify the interface through Default lt empty gt which the gateway can be reached Range 0 24 characters Do this by typing the name of the interface as you assigned it using the configura tion attribute name e g telindus1421Router laninterface name Note that this interface can also be a DLCI PVC tunnel etc If you do not specify a value
95. 368 TRAZS ALCL COM PUAN CSc a2c1 a tacsta cdetandastatoriacgv eieasnea dua Ta Aaaa Aaa E na Ng ei 368 17 13 Over voltage and over current protection compliance ccceeceeeeeseeeteeeeeeeeeees 368 TFA EMG COMPIANCE a a a r a a Ra aea Aaa aaa A e aa Aa An Ea pr aAa as 368 17 15Environmental compliance cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeaaeeaaeeaaeeaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeaeeeaeeaas 369 ANNEX sesoscoacacs emer e a o aaa a E A EREET 371 Annex A common TCP and UDP numbers cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneennees 373 Annex B product information s sssssssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn ennn n nennen nenna 375 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 1 User manual User manual 2 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router User manual Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 1 3 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 1 Introducing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router This chapter gives an introduction to the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router The following gives an overview of this chapter e 1 1 What is the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router on page 4 e 1 2 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router applications on page 5 1 3 Management tools on page 6 e 1 4 Management tools connection possibilities on page 8 4 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 1 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 1 1 What is the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is a professional state of the art base band modem wit
96. 4 Queued lowDelayQueue 228 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 6 6 Priority policy configuration attributes The priorityPolicy object is not present in the containment tree by default If you want to use priority policy then add this object first Refer to 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 39 kal telindus1421Router router priorityPolicy algorithm Default fifo Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to determine how and which queues are emptied The algorithm attribute has the following values fifo This is a First In First Out queue The data that enters the queue first also leaves the queue first This is the fastest but most superficial queuing mechanism roundRobin This is a priority queuing mechanism In this case all user configurable queues containing data have an equal weight In other words if all the user configurable queues contain data they are addressed in turns However the low delay queue and system queue still have priority over the user configurable queues ew po ooo 1 5 user config These queues are addressed in turns urable queue low delay queue This queue is addressed between every user config urable queue 7 system queue This queue has priority over all other queues As soon as it contains data it is emptied Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuratio
97. 421 SHDSL Router can be managed Default 1 Range 1 4094 userPriority Use this element to set the priority used in the 802 1p part of the 802 1Q header and this for all frames sent by the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Default 0 Range 0 7 l c If dotQTagging is enabled then the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router does not interpret spanning tree frames but just forwards them In that case the spanning tree protocol should be disabled on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 235 236 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 7 2 Bridge access list configuration attributes The accessList object is not present in the containment tree by default If you want to use a bridge access list then add this object first Refer to 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 39 telindus1421Router bridge accessList macAddress Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to filter bridged frames based on the source MAC address The access list is applied on the transmitted outgoing data of the interface Packets coming from MAC addresses that are specified in the access list are not sent out on the interface on which the access list is applied Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 237 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 7 3 Bridge traffic policy configuration attributes telindus1421Router bridge trafficPolic
98. 421 SHDSL Router is stored on the PC in binary format The file contains the complete configuration including the Activate Config uration command As a result the configuration is immediately activated when down loaded with TFTP Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 15 351 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 15 6 Creating an ASCII configuration file To create a configuration file in ASCII format you can use the CLI syntax as explained in the Mainte nance Tools manual However for the first time user it is easier to retrieve the configuration in the CLI format from the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router There are two possible ways to create a configuration file in ASCII cli format e 15 6 1 Creating an ASCII file using the TFTP get command on page 352 e 15 6 2 Creating an ASCII file using the CLI get command on page 353 q Do not use the TMA export utility for creating an ASCII type configuration file not even when saving it as a TXT file The resulting format is not compatible with the CLI format 352 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 15 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 15 6 1 Creating an ASCII file using the TFTP get command To create a configuration file in ASCII cli format using the TFTP get command proceed as follows w poo oO S Start a TFTP session on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router For example by typing tftp 10 0 11 1 atthe command prompt of your U
99. 421Router laninterface ip on page 252 for a detailed description of the ip structure ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface frameRelay dlciTable This attribute gives the complete status information of all known DLCIs The diciTable table contains the following elements ES pee O O O OS This is the name of the DLCI as you configured it If you did not configure a name then this element displays lt WAN interface name gt dici lt dlci number gt E g wan dici 16 ifOperStatus This is the current operational status of the DLCI ifLastChange This is the system up time on the moment the DLCI entered its current operational state l e the moment the value of the ifOperStatus element changes from up to down or vice versa the system up time value is written into the ifLastChange element bridging This displays the IP information of the DLCI Refer to telindus1421Router wanInterface frameRelay diciTable ip on page 266 for a detailed description of the ip structure This displays the bridging information of the DLCI Refer to telindus1421Router laninterface bridging on page 254 for a detailed description of the bridging structure frameRelay This displays the specific Frame Relay related status information of the DLCI Refer to telindus1421Router waninterface frameRelay diciTable frameRelay on page 266 for a detailed description of the frameRelay structure Chapter 11 265 266 Telindus 1421 SHD
100. 5 1 remote 192 168 5 2 rip filter tunnelFilter 12tp localIpAddress 207 46 197 101 remoteIpAddress 198 182 196 56 type outgoingLeasedLine SELECT routingFilter tunnelFilter LIST fa liter ss action Activate Configuration 166 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 User manual Configuration examples 9 8 Connecting VLAN enabled switches over a WAN This is an example of 2 VLAN enabled switches that connect multiple VLANs over a WAN link In this example VLAN 10 is used to manage the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router and the remote third party router whereas VLAN 1 and 2 are used for user data Note that when dotQTagging is enabled the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router does not interpret spanning tree frames This allows the switches to run the spanning tree protocol themselves as if they were connected directly via Ethernet IP 10 1 0 1 mask 255 255 255 0 VLAN enabled switch trap collection e g HP OpenView IP 10 10 0 1 mask 255 255 255 0 CS M IP 10 2 0 1 mask 255 255 255 0 IP bridgeGroup mask 255 255 255 0 0 2 mask 255 255 255 0 IP 10 1 0 2 mask 255 255 255 0 mi VLAN 1 2 10 Tagged port PVC IP 10 10 0 3 IP 10 2 0 2 mask 255 255 255 0 The configuration of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router in CLI format is as follows action Load Default Configuration SET SELECT wanInterface LIST
101. 90 296 ifSpeed 251 258 272 275 ifType 251 258 272 290 296 igmpTable 280 ip 252 260 265 290 ipAddress 296 ipAdEntBcastAddr 256 ipAdEntReasmMaxSize 256 ipcpHisOptions 262 ipcoMyOptions 262 Index ipcpState 260 I2tpTunnels 284 IcpHisOptions 261 IcpoMyOptions 261 IcpState 260 lineAttenuation 275 Imi 267 loaderVersion 249 macAddress 252 maxSpeedResult 273 maxSpeedSearch 273 messages 250 myAuthenstate 264 pvcTable 269 region 273 routingTable 277 signalNoise 275 spanningTree 293 status 275 297 sysDescr 248 sysObjectID 248 sysServices 248 sysUpTime 248 taskInfo 299 timeSinceLastRetrain 275 auto install 343 basic configuration 45 address translation 112 ATM 82 bridge 137 CIR 81 Classical IP 90 DLCI 79 extended access list 135 Frame Relay 73 HDLC 91 92 IP addresses 49 on the ATM WAN 85 on the Frame Relay WAN 76 on the PPP WAN 71 L2TP tunnel 124 line 55 link monitoring 71 LMI 80 major features of the device 62 multi protocol over ATM 90 passwords 59 PCR 87 PPP 69 PPP authentication 72 PVC 86 RIP 103 router 93 static routes 96 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Annex traffic and priority policy on routed and bridged data 129 on the bridge 152 on the router 127 WAN encapsulation 67 BCP what is 70 boot software what is 356 BootP relay agent 344 what is 344 BootP and DHCP what are 344 BootP request DHCP server reaction on a 213 BootP versus DHCP releasing IP ad
102. DSL Router Chapter 12 Reference manual Performance attributes ra telindus1421Router lanInterface h2Performance This attribute displays the 2 hours performance summary of the LAN interface The h2Performance table contains the following elements Element For the corresponding period this element displays sysUpTime the elapsed time since the last cold boot ifUpTime the time during which the interface was up ifStatusChanges the number of times the ifOperStatus value of the interface changed from up to down or vice versa iflnOctets the number of octets bytes received on this interface iflnPackets the number of packets received on this interface iflnErrors the number of packets received on this interface that could not be delivered to a higher layer protocol because they contained errors ifOutOctets the number of octets bytes transmitted by the interface including framing char acters ifOutPackets the number of packets transmitted by the interface ifOutDiscards the number of outgoing packets that were discarded to prevent they were trans mitted by the interface This could be due to for instance the presence of an access list ifOutErrors the number of packets that could not be transmitted by the interface because they contained errors ra telindus1421Router lanInterface h24Performance This attribute displays the 24 hours performance summary of the LAN interface
103. ENCE MANUAL TELINDUS 1421 SHDSL ROUTER User and Reference manual for the Telindus 1421 router 171302 PWR PLUG EURO VERSION 230VAC gt 7 5VDC Wallplug power module European type 230Vac gt 7 5Vdc for Desktop units delivered without power adapter 173720 PWR PLUG UK VERSION 230VAC gt 7 5VDC Wallplug power module UK type 230Vac gt 7 5Vdc for Desktop units delivered without power adapter 175590 PWR PLUG EUR VERSION 230VAC gt 9VDC Wallplug power module European type 230Vac gt 9Vdc for Desktop units delivered without power adapter 175592 PWR PLUG UK VERSION 230VAC gt 9VDC Wallplug power module UK type 230Vac gt 9Vdc for Desktop units delivered without power adapter 171304 PWR PLUG 48VDC gt 7 5 9VDC Wallplug power module 48Vdc gt 7 5 9Vdc for Desktop units delivered without power adapter 376 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Annex B Annex product information Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Annex Index A absolute and relative address ing 240 action what is 37 activating the configuration 65 adding an object to the contain ment tree 39 how 41 in TMA CLI 41 in ATWIN 41 in the Web Interface 42 in TMA 41 referring to the added object 43 when 40 which objects 40 why 40 address translation basic configuration 112 addressing relative and abso lute 240 alarm attributes 329 configuration 332 general 333 introduction 331 overvie
104. If on 10 consecutive echo requests no reply is given then the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router declares the WAN link down and the PPP handshake is started again Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 183 Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1421Router waninterface ppp authentication Default disabled Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to enable or disable CHAP authentication on the PPP link Refer to 6 2 4 Configuring PPP authentication on page 72 for more information on authentication The authentication attribute has the following values disabled Authentication is disabled chap This side of the link requests a CHAP authentication from the remote router kal telindus1421Router wanInterface ppp authenPeriod Default 00000d 00h 10m 00s Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s Use this attribute to set the PPP authentication interval iid 24855d 03h 14m 07s Refer to 6 2 4 Configuring PPP authentication on page 72 for more infor mation on authentication Normally on an authenticated PPP link authentication is not only performed at link set up but also at regular intervals during the data transfer You can set this interval using the authenPeriod attribute If you set the authenPeriod attribute to 00000d 00h 00m 00s then authentication is only performed at link set up and not during the data transfer 184 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration a
105. Internet Service Provider At your site a Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is installed You only received 1 official IP address from the ISP To reduce the number of official IP addresses the ISP also uses private IP addresses on the PPP link The central router its routing table has a host route to its PAT address per customer IP address LAN interface 192 168 47 254 your site IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 IP address WAN interface 192 168 100 1 PAT address 195 7 12 22 serial intf IP address WAN interface 192 168 100 254 Frame Relay or PDH SDH network ANA D i ISP The configuration of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router in CLI format is as follows action Load Default Configuration SET SELECT lanInterface LIST ip address 192 168 47 254 mode routing SELECT wanInterface LIST encapsulation ppp SELECT ppp LIST ip address 192 168 100 1 nat default SELECT router LIST defaultRoute gateway 192 168 100 254 SELECT defaultNat LIST patAddress 195 7 12 22 servicesAvailable a protocol tcp startPort 80 serverAddress 192 168 47 250 p p action Activate Configuration Chapter 9 163 Configuration examples Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router User manual twork ing inane d rout ining bridging an Comb 9 6 The following example shows a combination of bridging
106. L Router This will allow you to access the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router over an IP connection with for example TMA and to establish a connection over the line with the remote device First this chapter explains how DIP switch configuration tables and TMA attribute strings should be interpreted The following gives an overview of this chapter e 5 1 Reading DIP switch tables and TMA attribute strings on page 46 e 5 2 Configuring IP addresses on page 49 e 5 3 Configuring the line on page 55 e 5 4 Configuring passwords on page 59 e 5 5 Configuring the major features of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router on page 62 e 5 6 Executing configuration actions on page 63 l q Refer to the Reference manual on page 167 for a complete overview of the attributes of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 46 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Basic configuration 5 1 Reading DIP switch tables and TMA attribute strings As this chapter explains the basic configuration of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router it contains some DIP switch tables and a lot of TMA attribute strings To enable you to read this information in a correct manner this section explains the structure of such tables and strings The following gives an overview of this section e 5 1 1 Reading a DIP switch table on page 47 e 5 1 2 Reading a TMA attribute string on page 48 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 47 User manual Basic configuration 5 1 1 Reading a DI
107. L Routers through a tunnel over the Internet First a route between the WAN interface of Router A and B has to exist Then the tunnel can be set up Router A and B learn the routes of each others network through RIP However they must not learn the WAN and tunnel IP addresses Therefore a filter is created WAN interface WAN interface 207 46 197 101 a 198 182 196 56 ISP LAN interface 207 46 197 254 LAN interface 10 0 28 99 10 1 1 1 SP ei e Router B 4 modem L2TP tunnel local tunnel S local tunnel 192 168 5 2 sm Internet Router A modem IP subnet 10 0 24 0 mask 255 255 248 0 IP subnet 10 1 1 0 mask 255 255 255 0 192 168 5 1 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router User manual Chapter 9 165 Configuration examples The configuration of Router A in CLI format is as follows action Load Default Configuration SET SELECT lanInterface LIST ip address 10 0 28 99 netMask 255 255 248 0 rip mode disabled mode routing SELECT wanInterface LIST encapsulation ppp SELECT ppp LIST ip address 207 46 197 101 remote 207 46 197 254 rip mode disabled SELECT router List defaultRoute gateway 207 46 197 254 routingProtocol rip2 SELECT tunnels LIST 12tpTunnels a name tunnell ip address 192 168
108. NAT In that case the router first assigns NAT addresses until they are all used Then it uses PAT addresses for further translations 124 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 5 Configuring L2TP tunnelling This section introduces the Layer 2 Tunnelling Protocol L2TP and gives a short description of the attributes you can use to configure L2TP The following gives an overview of this section e 7 5 1 Introducing L2TP on page 125 7 5 2 How does L2TP work on page 126 e 7 5 3 Configuring L2TP on page 126 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 125 User manual Configuring the router 7 5 1 Introducing L2TP What is L2TP The Layer 2 Tunnelling Protocol L2TP is a protocol used for connecting VPNs Virtual Private Net works over public lines More specific it allows you to set up virtual PPP connections In other words an L2TP tunnel simulates an additional PPP interface which directly connects two routers with each other Concrete using the Layer 2 Tunnelling Protocol you can connect several private and physically dis persed local networks with each other over public lines such as the Internet in order to create one big virtual local network This without the need for address translation Example In the following example network A is virtually connected to network B through a tunnel in the public network network A network B uses private uses private addresses add
109. NIX station where 10 0 11 1 is the LAN IP address of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Get the configuration file of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Example tftp gt get CONFIG CLI dest _file cli Where get is the TFTP command to retrieve a file CONFIG CLI is the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router configuration file e dest _file cli is the destination file When the file transfer is finished close the TFTP session Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 15 353 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 15 6 2 Creating an ASCII file using the CLI get command To create a configuration file in ASCII cli format using the CLI get command and Telnet logging pro ceed as follows Action Start a Telnet session on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router You are automatically in CLI mode Redirect the CLI output or log it to a file Make sure you are in the top object telindus1421Router and in the Edit Configuration group Execute the get r command Stop output redirection or logging In the redirected or logged file you now obtained remove all input and output logging before the get r command Also remove the get r command itself Now modify the configuration file w po o Change the string GET now located at the beginning of the file into SET Type the string Load Default Configuration at the beginning of the file Type the string Activate Configuration at
110. P switch table A DIP switch configuration table has the following layout 1 on off The following table explains the DIP switch configuration table layout BZA This position displays the DIP switch icon 1 the DIP switch name the DIP switch position on the DIP switch bank The abbreviations mean the following DS1 no 1 DIP switch bank number 1 switch position number 1 the possible settings of the DIP switch on and off The default setting is printed in bold the function associated with the corresponding DIP switch setting 48 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Basic configuration 5 1 2 Reading a TMA attribute string A TMA attribute string has the following ae r O top Object Nametobject NamevattributeName default defaultValue 1 2 3 The following table explains the TMA attribute string layout al This position displays the TMA attribute icon It indicates that the string which follows is a TMA attribute string Refer to Graphical conventions on page vi for more information the attribute name and its position in the containment tree the default value of a configuration attribute Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 49 User manual Basic configuration 5 2 Configuring IP addresses The first thing you have to configure are the IP addresses of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router First this section lists which mechanisms there are to obtain an IP add
111. PathCost value equals 0 Else the rootPathCost value equals the sum of e the path cost as it is up to the designated bridge for the LAN that is currently connected to this port this cost is transmitted in Configuration BPDUs by the designated bridge and the path cost as it is configured for the root port The rootPathCost element is used e to test the value of the root path cost parameter conveyed in received Config uration BPDUs as the value of the root path cost parameter in transmitted Configuration rootPort This is the port identifier of the port that offers the lowest cost path to the root If two or more ports offer equal least cost paths to the root bridge then the root port is selected to be that with the highest designatedPriority i e the lowest numerical value If two or more ports offer equal least cost paths to the root bridge and the same designatedPriority then the root port is selected to be that with the highest designatedPortPriority i e the lowest numerical value 294 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes Se bridgePriority Together these two attributes form the unique bridge identifier of this bridge bridgeMAC maxAge This is the time out value to be used by all bridges in the bridged LAN for discard ing bridging information The maxAge element displays the value as it is set by the root bridge This informa tion is conveyed
112. Pending this port after expiry of the hold timer This avoids that Configuration BPDUs are transmitted too often although ensuring that up to date information is transmitted 1 Only relevant when the bridge uses the Spanning Tree Protocol 256 i Vy Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes telindus1421Router laninterface adapter This attribute displays the Ethernet mode of the LAN interface as set using the telindus1421Router laninter face adapter attribute The adapter structure contains the following elements Fa This is the Ethernet speed Possible values are 10 and 100 This is the Ethernet duplex mode Possible values are halfDuplex and fullDuplex telindus1421Router laninterface ipAdEntBcastAddr This attribute displays the value of the least significant bit in the IP broadcast address This address is used for sending packets on the interface which is associated with the IP address of this entry The value applies to the general broadcast the subnet and network broadcasts This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter telindus1421Router laninterface ipAdEntReasmMaxSize This attribute displays the size of the largest IP packet which this entity can re assemble from incoming IP fragmented packets received on this interface This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter telindus1421Router laninterface clearArpCache If you execute this action the ARP cache table is cl
113. Permanent Virtual Circuits PVCs which are permanent connections The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router makes use of Permanent Virtual Circuits The Data Link Connection Identifier DLCI is a value assigned to each virtual circuit and DTE device connection point in the Frame Relay WAN Two different connections can be assigned the same value within the same Frame Relay WAN one on each side of the virtual connection What is LMI A set of Frame Relay enhancements exists called the Local Management Interface LMI The LMI enhancements offer a number of features referred to as extensions for managing complex networks including e global addressing e virtual circuit status messages e multicasting What is CIR The Committed Information Rate CIR is the specified amount of guaranteed bandwidth measured in bits per second on a Frame Relay service Typically when purchasing a Frame Relay service the cus tomer can specify the CIR level he wishes The Frame Relay network provider guarantees that traffic not exceeding this level will be delivered What is EIR The Excess Information Rate EIR is the specified amount of unguaranteed bandwidth measured in bits per second on a Frame Relay service It is the traffic in excess of the CIR This traffic may also be delivered but this is not guaranteed Obviously the maximum possible EIR is the physical speed of the customer s access circuit into the Frame Relay service provider Telindus
114. S or LAC authentication Refer to L2TP status authentication states on page 289 for more information 286 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes L2TP status control states The states associated with the LNS or LAC for control connection establishment are No control connection is present Both initiator and recipient start from this state An initiator transmits a Start Control Connection Request while a recipient remains in the idle state until receiving a Start Control Connection Request waitCtlReply This is the state where a Start Control Connection Reply is awaited waitCtIConn This is the state where a Start Control Connection Connected is awaited Upon receipt the challenge response is checked The tunnel either is established or is torn down if an authorisation failure is detected established The control connection is established An established connection may be terminated by either a local condition or the receipt of a Stop Control Connection Notification The session then returns to the idle state Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 287 Reference manual Status attributes L2TP status call states The states associated with the LNS or LAC incoming or outgoing calls are idle No data is exchanged over the tunnel waitTunnel This is the state in which is waited either for the control connection to be opened e or for verification that t
115. S1 position 2 to on Properly replace the cover as described in 3 3 Opening and closing the housing on page 26 and reconnect the power supply Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 61 User manual Basic configuration 5 4 3 Entering passwords in the different management tools Now that you created a list of password s in the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router you have to enter these passwords every time you want to access the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router with one of the management tools The following table explains how to enter passwords in the different management tools Management tool How to enter the password TMA Enter the password in the Connect window TMA CLI and TMA for Use the application TmaUserConf exe to create a TMA user and assign a HP OpenView password to this user The password should correspond with a password configured in the device Refer to the manual of TMA CLI or TMA for HP OpenView for more informa tion CLI You are prompted to enter the password when the session starts ATWIN You are prompted to enter the password when the CLI session starts Then you can start an ATWIN session Web Interface You are prompted to enter the password when the session starts SNMP Define the password as community string If no passwords are defined then you can use any string as community string TML Enter the password after the destination file name Separate password and file name by a
116. SL Router fails For example because of a loss of contact Check the status attribute 01003 nmsgroup softConsisten cyStatus to determine the problem configConsistency when the configuration consistency imposed by the disabled Fail management concentrator on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router fails For example because of a loss of contact Check the status attributes 01003 nmsgroup objectTable con figState and configDiag to determine the problem 336 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 13 Reference manual Alarm attributes 13 4 LAN interface alarms Refer to 13 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 331 for general information on the alarm attributes ra telindus1421Router laninterface alarminfo The alarm related to the laninterface object together with its explanation and default alarmMask and alarmLevel value is given in the following table The alarm is generated Default value alarmMask alarmLevel linkDown when no valid LAN data is detected l e when the con enabled 3 nection between the interface and the LAN is down Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Reference manual 13 5 WAN interface alarms Chapter 13 337 Alarm attributes Refer to 13 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 331 for general information on the alarm attributes ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface alarminfo The alarm related to the wanlnterface object together with its explanation and default
117. SL Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes telindus1421Router waninterface frameRelay dlciTable ip The ip structure in the diciTable displays the IP information of the DLCI The ip structure contains the following elements a ee address This is the IP address of the DLCI It is either configured or retrieved automatically netMask This is the IP subnet mask of the DLCI It is either configured or retrieved automat ically remote This is the IP address of the remote end of the DLCI It is either configured or retrieved automatically telindus1421Router wanInterface frameRelay diciTable frameRelay The frameRelay structure in the dlciTable displays the specific Frame Relay related status information of the DLCI The frameRelay structure contains the following elements C Pere dici This is the DLCI identification number active This indicates whether the corresponding DLCI is active on or not off new This is set to on if the DLCI has just been created else it is off deleted This is set to on if the DLCI has been deleted else it is off rr This element is only relevant for LMI revision 1 It is the flow control flag If it is on then no traffic can be sent on this DLCI Else it is off bandwidth This is the available bandwidth on this DLCI as it is communicated by the Frame Relay network cllmLastCongestion CLLM Consolidated Link Layer Management is a Frame R
118. SL Router receives an IP packet on the interface for which e the next hop gateway is on the same interface e the next hop address is in the same subnet as the source then it sends an ICMP message to the originator of the packet to inform him that a better shorter route exists 54 User manual Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 Basic configuration e E Use this element to configure the multicasting IGMP Default disabled protocol Range enumerated see below The igmp element has the following values disabled Multicasts are not forwarded on this interface proxy This is an upstream interface It always serves as a cli ent for the upstream router Multicasts are always forwarded on this interface router This is a downstream interface It serves as an IGMP querier or non querier depending on the IP address Multicasts are forwarded on this interface if they are present in the upstream interface multicast member list Refer to What is IGMP and IGMP topology on page 280 for more information on IGMP helperAddresses Use this element to enable broadcast forwarding Default lt empty gt Limited IP broadcasts address 255 255 255 255 __ Range table see below and sub network broadcasts for a directly connected network are normally not forwarded by the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router However client server applica tions often use these broadcasts during start up to discove
119. TEL NDUS Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router User and reference manual Version 1 4 181354 Telindus Technical Publications Geldenaaksebaan 335 B 3001 Leuven Belgium Tel 32 16 382011 ii Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Copyright safety and statements User and reference manual Document properties Subject Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Manual type User and reference manual Version 1 4 Code 181354 Modification date 22 October 2002 Telindus Copyright notice The information and descriptions contained in this publication are the property of Telindus Such infor mation and descriptions must not be copied or reproduced by any means or disseminated or distributed without the express prior written permission of Telindus This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors for which Telindus never can or shall be held liable Changes are made periodically to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in new editions of this publication Telindus may make improvements and or changes in the product s described in this publication at any time without prior notice Safety requirements Carefully read the safety instructions at the beginning of 2 Installing and connecting the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router on page 9 The connectors of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router should only be connected to the following circuit types Connector label Connector
120. TST algorithm Using the TST algorithm bridges know of each others existence By communi cating with each other they establish one single path for reaching any particu lar network segment If necessary they may decide to disable some bridges in the network in order to establish this single path This is a continuous process So if a bridge fails the remaining bridges will reconfigure their bridging tables keeping each LAN segment reachable 140 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 3 The Spanning Tree root bridge What is the root bridge Spanning Tree defines a tree with a root bridge and a loop free path from the root to all bridges in the extended network The root bridge is the logical centre of the Spanning Tree topology Redundant data paths are forced into a stand by blocked state If a network segment in the spanning tree fails and a redundant path exists the spanning tree algorithm recalculates the spanning tree topol ogy and activates the stand by path How is a root bridge selected All bridges in the network participating in Spanning Tree gather information about other bridges in the network They do this through an exchange of data messages called Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs This exchange of messages results in the following phases Cc e a The selection of a root bridge The bridge with the highest bridge priority i e the lowest numerical priority value
121. Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router and the network you can cre ate a list of passwords with associated access levels in the security table Do this using the security attribute Refer to telindus1421Router security on page 173 5 4 2 Correcting the security table If you forgot your password or you forgot to create one with write and security access then you can set the Load Default Configuration DIP switch As a result the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router reboots in its default configuration You can then retrieve the erroneous configuration and correct it To correct the security table proceed as follows Disconnect the power supply and open the housing as described in 3 3 Opening and closing the housing on page 26 Set DIP switch bank DS1 position 2 to off Refer to 3 1 The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router motherboard on page 24 to locate this DIP switch bank Replace the cover without fastening the screws and reconnect the power supply gt The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router reboots and loads the default configuration Retrieve the erroneous configuration Open a TMA session on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Refer to 4 1 Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router with TMA on page 28 Execute the Load Saved Configuration action Change the password and or access rights in the security table Execute the Activate Configuration action Again disconnect the power supply and open the housing Reset DIP switch bank D
122. V rT Ve Ve ee Refer to 4 2 2 Containment tree terminology on page 36 for an explanation of the terms associated with the containment tree 36 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 4 User manual Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 4 2 2 Containment tree terminology Refer to 4 2 1 Graphical representation of the containment tree on page 35 for a figure of a containment tree The following table explains the terminology associated with the containment tree containment tree The containment tree represents the hierarchical structure of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router It is composed of a number of objects that are ordered in a tree This tree resembles a Windows directory structure e itis also a levelled structure with nodes which can be expanded or reduced e the containment tree objects can be compared with file folders e the objects contain attributes like file folders contain files object An object represents a physical interface an application or a combination of both Each object has its own set of attributes parent and child Some objects are not present in the containment tree by default If you want to use object the features associated with such an object then you have to add the object first You always add an object under another object The object you add is called the child object The object under which you add this child object is called the parent object index name Of some objects more than on
123. a hang up state These applications will need to restart Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 12 321 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 5 3 L2TP tunnel performance attributes ra telindus1421Router router tunnels I2tpTunnels This attribute gives you performance information on the L2TP tunnels The 2tpTunnels table contains the following elements ES pee oo name This is the name of the tunnel as you configured it mibCounters This displays the SNMP MIB2 parameters of the tunnel These are the same as the SNMP MIB2 parameters on the LAN interface Refer to 12 2 LAN interface performance attributes on page 304 322 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 12 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 6 Bridge performance attributes This section discusses the performance attributes concerned with bridging First it describes the general bridging performance attributes Then it explains the performance attributes of the extra features as there are access listing etc The following gives an overview of this section e 12 6 1 Bridge group performance attributes on page 323 e 12 6 2 Bridge access list performance attributes on page 324 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 12 323 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 6 1 Bridge group performance attributes ra telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup bridgeCache When a port of the bridge enters the learning state it stores the MAC addresses of th
124. ace line maximumSpeedSearch Use this action to determine the highest possible line speed that can be achieved between the central and remote Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Double click on the maximumSpeedSearch string to execute the action When you execute this test the following happens SN ooo SS The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router interrupts the normal data transfer Both local and remote Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router go to auto speed mode in order to determine the highest possible line speed Meanwhile the status of the test can be mon itored with the maxSpeedSearch attribute When the test ends the result is displayed by the maxSpeedResult attribute The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router resumes normal data transfer at the speed that was selected before the test e The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router has to be in data state i e after a successful training sequence and when the data connection is up before you can execute the maximumSpeedSearch action e While the maximumSpeedSearch action is running no data transmission is possible e Incase of a Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2 pair version you can not execute the maximumSpeedSearch action because you can not define a speed range on both the central and remote Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router mm mm ma m mm mm Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 275 Reference manual Status attributes Line pair status attributes telindus1421Router wanlnterface line linePair
125. actualBitRate This attribute displays the actual bit rate on the line pair in bits per second bps 276 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes 11 6 Router status attributes This section discusses the status attributes concerned with routing First it describes the general routing status attributes Then it explains the status attributes of the extra features as there are default NAT L2TP tunnelling etc The following gives an overview of this section e 11 6 1 General router status attributes on page 277 e 11 6 2 Default NAT status attributes on page 283 e 11 6 3 L2TP tunnel status attributes on page 284 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 277 Reference manual Status attributes 11 6 1 General router status attributes telindus1421Router router routingTable This attribute lists all known routes with their operating status The routingTable contains the following elements ES peen network This is the IP address of the destination network mask This is the network mask of the destination network gateway This is the IP address of the next router on the path to the destination network interface This is the interface through which the destination network can be reached Pos sible values are internal The own protocol stack is used lt name gt The destination network can be reached through this particular interface The lt name gt of the interface
126. address does not correspond with a MAC address in the dhcpStatic table then the DHCP server returns no response on that frame Releasing IP addresses DHCP versus BootP On DHCP level it is regularly checked whether the device that has an IP address in lease is still con nected to the network If it is not the IP address is returned to the pool of free IP addresses On BootP level however such a check or refresh does not exist What is more a statistic IP address lease is for an infinite time Consequently if the device that requested the IP address is no longer con nected to the network this is not detected by the server In that case the statistical information will still indicate that the IP address is leased although it is not 214 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes ra telindus1421Router router dhcpCheckAddress Default disabled Range enabled disabled Use this attribute to allow that the assigned IP address is probed with an ICMP Echo Request This checks and prevents the double use of IP addresses The dhcpCheckAddress attribute has the following values enabled No ICMP Echo Request is sent when an IP address is leased by a client disabled An ICMP Echo Request is sent when an IP address is leased by a client If an ICMP Echo Reply is received it means the IP address is already in use Therefore another IP address is assigned kal telindus14
127. age 64 e 5 6 2 Activating the configuration on page 65 e 5 6 3 Loading the saved configuration on page 65 e 5 6 4 Loading the default configuration using the action on page 65 5 6 5 Loading the default configuration using the DIP switch on page 66 64 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router User manual Chapter 5 Basic configuration 5 6 1 What are the different configuration types This section explains the different configuration types that are present in the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Which are the configuration types Three types of configuration are present in the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router e the non active configuration e the active configuration e the default configuration Explaining the configuration types When you configure the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router the following happens Phase Action Result Connect the computer running the man agement tool to the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router The non active configuration is displayed on the screen Modify the non active configuration The modifications have no immediate influ ence on the active configuration currently used by the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Complete the modifications on the non active configuration The non active configuration has to be acti vated Execute the Activate Configuration action The non active configuration becomes the active configuration What are the configuration actions You can execute the
128. al station The amount of local stations that can have simulta neous Internet access equals the amount of NAT addresses you defined If all sessions between a local station and the Internet have been closed by the application in case of TCP or because of time outs then the previously assigned official IP address is freed for another local station Optionally the NAT address entry may contain a corresponding private IP address This allows to per manently assign an official IP address to a local station This is useful for stations or servers that should have Internet access at all times Another example of permanently assigned official IP addresses is a network where only a limited number of users has Internet access NAT only converts IP addresses and thus allows traffic in both directions However incoming traffic on one of the official IP addresses can only be forwarded to the local network if a corresponding private IP address has been configured Example of a NAT address table In this example the first address is continuously assigned to a server with IP address 192 168 47 250 The others are natAddresses assigned dynamically TA officialAddress b 1 195 7 12 21 192 168 47 250 b 2 1957 12 22 lt Opt gt gt 3 195 7 12 23 lt Opt gt b 4 1957 12 24 lt Opt gt Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 123 User manual Configuring the router 7 4 9 Combining PAT and NAT It is possible to use a combination of PAT and
129. alue is incremented by one RIP routes may disappear from the routing table and re appear afterwards The attribute value is reset when a RIP route disappears from the routing table 318 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 12 Reference manual Performance attributes kal telindus1421Router router pingResults Use this action to send a ping to an IP address only one ping at a time You can start and stop pinging with the ping actions startPing and stopPing The pingResults attribute lists the results of the transmitted ping The routingTable contains the following elements om pe O ipAddress This is the IP address being pinged numOfTxPackets This is the number of transmitted pings numOfRxPackets This is the number of correct received answers on the transmitted pings minReplyTime This is the lowest reply time of all correct received answers maxReplyTime This is the highest reply time of all correct received answers avrgReplyTime This is the average reply time of all correct received answers WS telindus1421Router router startPing Execute this actions to start transmitting pings to an IP address Several arguments can be set ipAddress This is the IP address you want to ping Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 iterations This is the number of pings Defaults Range 0 If you enter 0 the IP address will be pinged an indefi nite number of times The only way to s
130. an ppp down 10 static 1 00000d 00h 00m 00s The lines in the routing table depicted above represent the following e Line 1 represents the default gateway which is not defined e Lines 2 and 5 represent the subnets on the LAN and WAN interface respectively e Lines 3 and 6 represent the interface its IP addresses e Line 7 represents the static route to the remote LAN e Finally line 4 represents the multicast address for RIP version 2 Remark If the LAN is not connected to the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router itis still possible to contact the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router with e g TMA or Telnet over the WAN link by using the IP address of the LAN inter face This means that the status attribute telindus1421Router laninterface ip status still indicates up although in the routingTable the corresponding route to the network is down This seemingly unlogic implementation is necessary to insure correct operation with HP OpenView IP address LAN interface 192 168 47 254 r vV ae i modem tus TMA Telnet TFTP SNMP 192 168 47 254 OK IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 280 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes ra telindus1421Router router igmpTable This attribute shows the multicast address reported by one or more clients The igmpTable is always updated even if no proxy is configured The igmpTable contains the following elements Ce multicast This is
131. arm active in the correspond right ing linePair 2 object red inside An alarm is active in the corresponding right linePair 2 object The colours of the WAN interface line pair s only change if the alarms related to the wanInterface linePair objects are set to enabled in the alarmMask Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 15 343 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 15 Auto installing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Auto install includes a number of features that allow you to partially or completely configure the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router without on site intervention The following gives an overview of this chapter 15 1 What is BootP and DHCP on page 344 15 2 Getting the LAN IP address on page 345 15 3 Getting the configuration with TFTP on page 346 15 4 Creating configuration files on page 349 15 5 Creating a binary configuration file on page 350 15 6 Creating an ASCII configuration file on page 351 344 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 15 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 15 1 Whatis BootP and DHCP BootP and DHCP are very similar protocols IP devices without IP address use them to obtain an IP address Compliance e BootP complies with RFC951 e DHCP complies with RFC2131 and RFC2132 In both protocols the client IP device sends a limited broadcast request on its interfaces requesting an IP address The request contains the
132. at is 356 loading the default configura tion using the action 65 using the DIP switch 66 loading the saved configuration 65 loop back configuration attributes 243 status attributes 296 Index 381 major features of the device basic configuration of the 62 management configuration attributes 240 performance attributes 325 status attributes 296 management terminology in troducing 34 management tools connection possibilities 8 introducing 6 managing the device 27 with TMA 28 motherboard position of the DIP switches 24 multi protocol over ATM basic configuration 90 what is 84 N NAT basic configuration 121 introduction 113 what is 113 when use 114 why use 113 NAT address table how works the 122 NAT and PAT combining 123 NAT on the LAN interface a re mark 121 O OAM F5 loop back cells what are 193 object what is 36 operating system performance attributes 327 status attributes 299 organisation of this manual iv overview alarm attributes 330 configuration attributes 170 performance attributes 302 status attributes 246 over voltage and over current protection compliance 368 382 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Annex P parent object what is 36 parts of the device 17 passwords basic configuration 59 correcting the security table 60 creating in the security table 60 entering in the different management tools 61 remarks on 173 PAT introduction 113 lim
133. atic speed negotiation or fixed speed e Performance monitoring compliant G 826 errored seconds severely errored seconds unavailability seconds The line connector lay out The following table shows the connector layout of the RJ12 line connector not used line 21 line 1 MI 1 6 line 1 line 21 not used 1 For a Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2 pair version only Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 17 363 Reference manual Technical specifications Maximum covered distance The following table gives the maximum covered distance over a single pair 0 4 mm 26AWG noise free line Line speed Maximum covered distance Line speed Maximum covered distance kbps m kbps m 64000 1216000 128000 1280000 192000 1344000 256000 1408000 320000 1472000 384000 1536000 448000 1600000 512000 1664000 576000 1728000 640000 1792000 704000 1856000 768000 1920000 832000 1984000 896000 2048000 960000 2112000 1024000 2176000 1088000 2240000 1152000 2304000 364 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 17 Reference manual Technical specifications 17 2 LAN interface specifications Applicable standards IEEE 802 3 10Mbps Ethernet IEEE 802 3u 100Mbps Ethernet e 10 100Mbps auto sense e Connector RJ45 Unshielded Twisted Pair UTP The following table shows the connector layout of the RJ45 Ethernet LAN interface connector transm
134. ault NAT configuration attributes 215 performance attributes 319 status attributes 283 default route an example 99 DHCP relay agent 344 what is 344 DHCP server reaction on a BootP request 213 DHCP versus BootP releasing IP addresses 213 dimensions of the device 368 DIP switch table reading a 47 DIP switches 23 opening and closing the housing 26 overview 25 position on the motherboard 24 directed broadcast what is 53 Discard Eligible bit what is 75 DLCI basic configuration 79 what is 74 document application software version described in this iv conventions graphical vi typographical v copyright notice ii intended audience iv organisation iv properties ii statements iii your feedback iv downloading application soft ware in loader mode 360 using TFTP 358 using TMA 357 using TML 359 downloading loader software in loader mode 360 using TML 359 downloading software 355 E EIR what is 74 element what is 37 EMC compliance 368 environmental compliance 369 examples 157 combining bridging and routing in a network 163 connecting a LAN to the In ternet using NAT and PAT 161 connecting two networks through a tunnel 164 connecting VLAN enabled switches over a WAN 166 LAN extension over a Frame Relay network 159 LAN extension over a PDH SDH network 158 LAN extension over an ATM network 160 using PAT over PPP with a minimum of official IP addresses 162 executing c
135. aultNat allocFails If no sockets are available anymore but an attempt to set up a new connection is being made then the natAllocFails attribute value is incremented by 1 Because the sockets are distributed using a hashing function it is possible that natAllocFails increases even though natSocketsFree still indicates free sockets ICMP requires a new socket for each transmitted packet This implies that for instance a permanent ping or trace route command may eventually use all free sockets telindus1421Router router defaultNat discards This attribute indicates how many times a packet has been discarded for reasons other than a lack of free sockets This could be for instance because an attempt was made to connect from the Internet to a service that was not present in the servicesAvailable table telindus1421Router router defaultNat addressesAvailable This attribute displays the number of NAT addresses that are currently free telindus1421Router router defaultNat tcpSocketsUsed This attribute displays the number of sockets currently in use by PAT and NAT for TCP applications telindus1421Router router defaultNat udpSocketsUsed This attribute displays the number of sockets currently in use by PAT and NAT for UDP applications telindus1421Router router defaultNat icmpSocketsUsed This attribute displays the number of sockets currently in use by PAT and NAT for ICMP applications 320 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router C
136. ave to be passed before reaching the network When several routes to a single network exist and they all have the same preference then the route with the smallest metric parameter is chosen However using the metric element you can increment the metric parameter by more than 1 up to a maximum of 15 You could do this for instance to indicate that a certain interface is less desirable to route through As a result the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router adds this value to the metric parameter of every route learnt through that interface The metric parameter is also used to represent the directly connected subnets on the LAN and WAN interfaces Use this element to set the transmission and or recep Default active tion of RIP updates on the interface By default the Range enumerated see below Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router transmits and receives RIP updates on all interfaces The mode element has the following values active RIP updates are transmitted and received on this inter face passive RIP updates are not transmitted on this interface but received updates are parsed disabled RIP updates are nor transmitted nor received on this interface Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 107 CON E S txVersion Use this element to set the version of the RIP updates Default rip2 that are transmitted on the interface Range enumerated see below The txVersio
137. ave to refer to this object How to refer to an added object Some attributes allow you to enter the instance value i e the index name you assigned to the object of an added object By doing so the function associated with this object is applied there Example Suppose you create a routingFilter object with the instance value my_filter The containment tree then looks as follows naps tunnels defaultNat routingFilter my_filter Now you want to use this filter on the LAN interface In that case in the ip rip structure in the laninterface object enter the instance value of the routingFilter object under the element filter This looks as follows ip rip metric splitHorizon authentication filter b 1 active poisonedReverse disabled my_filted 44 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 4 User manual Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 4 5 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router attribute overview The reference part of this manual explains all the attributes of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router One chapter describes one group of attributes e chapter 10 Configuration attributes on page 169 e chapter 11 Status attributes on page 245 e chapter 12 Performance attributes on page 301 e chapter 13 Alarm attributes on page 329 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 45 User manual Basic configuration 5 Basic configuration This chapter shows you how to configure the very basics of the Telindus 1421 SHDS
138. aximum length drop level 1 In case you set the attribute telindus1421Router router traf ficPolicy method to Default 100 Range 1 3000 e trafficShaping or tosMapped then only this drop level is relevant tosDiffServ then this drop level corresponds with the drop level bits value 00 and 01 maxLength2 This is the maximum length drop level 2 In case you set the attribute telindus1421Router router traf ficPolicy method to Default 100 Range 1 3000 e trafficShaping or tosMapped then this drop level is not relevant tosDiffServ then this drop level corresponds with the drop level bits value 10 maxLength3 This is the maximum length drop level 3 In case you set the attribute telindus1421Router router traf ficPolicy method to Default 100 Range 1 3000 e trafficShaping or tosMapped then this drop level is not relevant e ftosDiffServ then this drop level corresponds with the drop level bits value 11 Examples Suppose e telindus1421Router router trafficPolicy method is set to trafficShaping or tosMapped e for queue 1 you set maxLength1 1000 for queue 2 to 500 for queue 3 to 3000 for queue 4 to 1000 and for queue 5 to 200 In this case packets are dropped when the amount of packets in the queue exceeds the amount as specified with the maxLength1 element Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 227
139. ayer is responsible for the simultaneous sharing of virtual circuits over a physical link cell multiplexing and passing cells through the ATM network cell relay To do this it uses the VPI and VCI information in the header of each ATM cell ATM Adaptation Combined with the ATM layer the AAL is roughly analogous to the data link layer Layer AAL of the OSI model The AAL is responsible for isolating higher layer protocols from the details of the ATM processes The adaptation layer prepares user data for con version into cells and segments the data into 48 byte cell payloads higher layers Finally the higher layers residing above the AAL accept user data arrange it into packets and hand it to the AAL What is multi protocol over ATM As its name implies multi protocol encapsulation over ATM provides mechanisms for carrying traffic other than just IP There are two ways to do this Logical Link Control In this method multiple protocol types can be carried across a single con LLC encapsulation nection with the type of encapsulated packet identified by a standard LLC SNAP header Virtual connection mul In this method only a single protocol is carried across an ATM connection tiplexing with the type of protocol implicitly identified at connection setup LLC encapsulation is provided to support routed and bridged protocols In this encapsulation format PDUs from multiple protocols can be carried over the sam
140. be sent to a management system To enable this configure in the trapDestinations table the IP addresses to which the traps have to be sent If the trapDestinations table is empty then no traps are sent The trapDestinations table contains the following elements mew pe address Use this element to set the IP address of the manage Default 0 0 0 0 ment station to which the SNMP trap messages have Range up to 255 255 255 255 to be sent community Use this element to set the community string which is Default public included in the SNMP traps that are sent to the man Range 0 20 characters agement station It is used as a password in the SNMP communication Give it the same value as on your SNMP management sta tion Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 239 Reference manual Configuration attributes ra telindus1421Router snmp mib2Traps Default off Range on off Use this attribute to enable on or disable off the sending of SNMP traps as MIB2 traps If you want to send the SNMP traps as MIB2 traps proceed as follows Select the trapDestinations attribute Add an entry to this table for each network manage ment station that should receive SNMP traps In the trapDestinations table define the IP address of the management stations that should receive the SNMP traps In the trapDestinations table configure the community element associated with each trap des tination
141. by the root bridge to ensure that each bridge in the bridged LAN has a consistent value against which to test the age of stored configuration infor mation helloTime This is the interval between the generation of Configuration BPDUs by the root bridge The helloTime element displays the value as it is set by the root bridge This attribute is not directly used by the Spanning Tree algorithm but it is conveyed by the root bridge to facilitate the monitoring of protocol performance by the management sys tem forwardDelay This is the time out value to be used by all bridges in the bridged LAN for abridge port applies to move from listening state to learning state or from learn ing state to forwarding state time out or ageing for purging MAC addresses from the bridge cache in case a topology change is detected The forwardDelay element displays the value as it is set by the root bridge This infor mation is conveyed by the root bridge to ensure that each bridge in the bridged LAN has a consistent value for the forward delay timer topologyChange This is a Boolean value 0 or 1 to report e fora bridge that is not a root bridge whether or not the most recently accepted Configuration BPDU indicates a change in the active topology e for the root bridge whether or not a change in topology has been detected within the preceding topologyChangeTime period The topologyChange element is used to propagate the topolog
142. cation on page 111 104 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 3 1 Introducing RIP What is RIP The Routing Information Protocol RIP is a protocol that routers use to exchange dynamic routing infor mation How does RIP work When RIP is enabled the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router advertises every 30 seconds its routing infor mation to adjacent routers It also receives the routing information from the adjacent routers With this information it adapts its routing table dynamically If after 180 seconds no information about a certain route has been received then this route is declared down If after an additional 120 seconds i e 300 seconds in total still no information about the route has been received then this route is deleted from the routing table RIP support The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router supports RIP protocol version 1 1 compatible and 2 RIP version 1 is a very common routing protocol Version 2 includes extra features like variable subnet masks and authentication Check which RIP version is used by the other routers in the network Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 105 User manual Configuring the router 7 3 2 Configuring RIP Refer to e 7 1 Introducing routing on page 94 for an introduction on routing e 7 3 1 Introducing RIP on page 104 for an introduction on RIP Use the following to configure RIP e First use the routingProtocol attribute to activate the gen
143. ce information of the PVC The atm structure contains the following elements om pe O This displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI of the PVC This displays the Virtual Channel Identifier VCI of the PVC The VPI in conjunction with the VCI identifies the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on the way to its destination telindus1421Router wanInterface atm unknownCells This attribute displays the number of received cells that are not treated by the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router For example data cells for PVCs that are not configured in the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router etc Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 12 313 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 4 Line performance attributes telindus1421Router waninterface line h2Line This attribute displays the 2 hours performance information summary of the line The h2Line table contains the following elements Element For the corresponding period this element displays sysUpTime the elapsed time since the last cold boot linkDownCount the number of times the link went down linkDownTime the total amount of time the link was down telindus1421Router wanInterface line h24Line This attribute displays the 24 hours performance information summary of the line The h24Line table con tains the same elements as the telindus1421Router wanInterface line h2Line table telindus1421Router waninterface line
144. client its MAC address which is a unique identifier refer to What is the ARP cache on page 177 for more information BootP A workstation with a BootP server interprets incoming BootP requests You can configure a file on the server with MAC address and IP address subnet mask pairs for all devices in the network you want to service If the MAC address in the BootP request matches a MAC address in this file the BootP server replies with the corresponding IP address and subnet mask Assigning an IP address in this way is done through a simple request response handshake A workstation with a DHCP server works in a similar way as with a BootP server The difference with BootP is that you can additionally configure a list of IP addresses on the server These IP addresses are dynamically assigned to the IP devices requesting an IP address independently of their MAC address Those address assignments are limited in time Assigning an IP address in this way is done through a 4 way handshake and with regular renewals The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router as relay agent Being broadcast packets BootP and DHCP requests can cross a router using IP helper addresses The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is a BootP and DHCP relay agent This means it adds additional informa tion to the request packets allowing servers on distant networks to send back the answer This feature is not used in the auto install procedure Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 15 345 R
145. d This attribute displays the interface speed in bits per second bps This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter telindus1421Router waninterface ifMtu This attribute displays the interface its Maximum Transfer Unit i e the maximum number of bytes that one packet can contain on this interface This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Reference manual Status attributes ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface ifOperStatus This attribute displays the current operational status of the interface This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter Possible values are Description The WAN interface is up data transfer is possible The following table shows you in which case the value of the ifOperStatus attribute is up Protocol The ifOperStatus attribute is up i e the alarm wanInterface alarmlnfo linkDown off in case Frame Relay LMI is up the line is in data state the bit pump is synchronised LCP is open the line is in data state the bit pump is synchronised the PVC is truly up the line is in data state the bit pump is synchronised The WAN interface is down data transfer is not possible Important remarks Whether the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is configured in bridging or routing has no effect on the value of the attributes telindus1421Router wanlnterface ifOperStatus Status and telindus1421Router wanlnterface alarminfo linkDown Alarms In case of Frame Relay if the configuration element
146. d global IP addresses It has also defined 3 ranges of IP addresses for private use This means that you can use these addresses without regis tration on your internal network as long as you are not connected to the Internet 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 1 class A network 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 16 class B networks 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 256 class C networks You can define sub networks in these ranges for your private IP addresses 114 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 4 2 When use NAT and or PAT You can use NAT PAT or a combination of both NAT allows the use of private IP addresses on the local Ethernet while still having access via the WAN interface to the Internet official IP addresses Each Ethernet IP address that needs Internet access is translated into an official IP address before sending traffic on the WAN interface The number of simultaneous users with Internet access is limited to the number of official IP addresses This is a dynamic process PAT uses only one single official IP address on the WAN network The Tel indus 1421 SHDSL Router translates all private IP addresses on the local Ethernet to the single official IP address Only outgoing TCP sessions are supported NAT and PAT You can combine both translation methods and tune them to specific needs Check in the next table whether you need NAT and or PAT No of official IP No
147. d writing its configuration to the flash memory Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 251 Reference manual Status attributes 11 3 LAN interface status attributes Ta telindus1421Router lanInterface ifDescr This attribute displays the interface description This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter kal telindus1421Router laninterfacel iffype This attribute displays the interface type This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter Ta telindus1421Router laninterface ifOperStatus This attribute displays the current operational status of the interface This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra telindus1421Router laninterface ifLastChange This attribute shows the system up time on the moment the interface entered its current operational state l e the moment the value of the ifOperStatus status attribute changes from up to down or vice versa the system up time value is written into the ifLastChange status attribute This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra telindus1421Router laninterface ifSpeed This attribute displays the interface speed in bits per second bps This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter kal telindus1421Router laninterface ifMtu This attribute displays the interface its Maximum Transfer Unit i e the maximum number of bytes that one packet can contain on this interface This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter 252 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes ra telindus1421Router laninterface ip
148. ddress 195 7 12 22 As you can see the gateway attribute is not configured since the Internet traffic uses the default route Limitations As seen from the previous Port Address Translation has some limitations e Only outgoing sessions are supported This implies that you can not access servers on your local net work over the Internet e Some TCP or UDP applications do not support port translation e Limited ICMP support 120 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 4 6 PAT limitations workaround Use the following to partly overcome the PAT limitations Use the portTranslations attribute to define specific port number ranges that should not be translated Refer to telindus1421Router router defaultNat portTranslations on page 215 e Use the servicesAvailable attribute to define specific port number ranges for incoming Internet traffic that should not be translated Instead it is sent to the corresponding private IP address Refer to telindus1421Router router defaultNat servicesAvailable on page 216 Example of a portTranslations table TMA is an example of an application that does not support port translation If you want to make TMA connections from your local network to protocol startPort endPort action the outside world you have to list TMA port gt 1 udp 1728 lt Opt gt no translation number 1728 in this table However keep in b 2 udp 2000 3000 deny mind that even the
149. depends on the interface Location of the bridging attribute LAN telindus1421Router laninterface bridging WAN Frame Relay telindus1421Router wanInterface frameRelay diciTable bridging WAN PPP telindus1421Router wanInterface ppp bridging WAN ATM telindus1421Router wanInterface atm pvcTable bridging tunnel telindus1421Router router tunnels I2tp Tunnels bridging Refer to 8 9 6 Explaining the bridging structure on page 150 for a detailed explanation of the bridging structure 150 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 9 6 Explaining the bridging structure Because the bridging structure occurs in several objects it is described here once and referenced where necessary Refer to 8 9 5 Configuring the bridging parameters on the interfaces on page 149 for the location of the bridging structure l A This section lists all the elements that can be present in the bridging structure However depending on the interface it is possible that not all of these elements are present The bridging structure contains the following elements E e accessList Use this element set up an access list on the inter Default lt empty gt face Range 0 24 characters Do this by entering the index name of the access list you want to use You can cre ate the access list itself by adding an accessList object under the bridge object and by configuring the attributes in this obj
150. dgeAccessList This attribute shows information on the use of the bridge access list The bridgeAccessList table contains the following elements mon peen macAddress This is the MAC address as configured in the configuration attribute telindus1421Router bridge accessList bridgeAccessList This indicates the number of times a packet has been discarded for the corre sponding MAC address Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 12 325 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 7 Management performance attributes telindus1421Router management cms2SessionCount This attribute displays the number of CMS2 sessions that are currently active on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router There are always minimum two fixed sessions active Connecting with TMA TMA CLI Telnet etc opens additional sessions This is explained in the following table Session count Purpose 1 fixed session A fixed session for SNMP 1 fixed session A fixed session for 010 2 sessions When connecting with TMA 1 session When connecting with TMA for HP OpenView or the Alarm Manager 1 session When connecting with TMA CLI 2 sessions When downloading a config cli or config cms file 1 session When connecting with Telnet 1 session When downloading software 1 session When connecting with the Web Interface telindus1421Router managementitftpSessionCount This attribute displays the number of TFTP ses
151. dresses 213 bridge basic configuration 137 configuration attributes 231 general configuration at tributes 232 introduction 138 performance attributes 322 specifications 367 status attributes 290 bridge access list configuration attributes 236 performance attributes 324 bridge cache time out 232 what is 232 bridge group configuration attributes 232 performance attributes 323 bridge port state transition diagram 142 states 142 bridge traffic policy applying on an interface 155 configuration attributes 237 bridging configuring 147 configuring an IP address 148 configuring the bridging pa rameters on the interfac es 149 enabling on the interfaces 148 explaining the bridging structure 150 selecting the bridging proto col 148 setting the bridge priority 148 versus routing 94 what is 138 bridging structure explanation 150 Cc CHAP authentication in both direc tions 72 authentication in one direc tion 72 what is 70 child object what is 36 CIR basic configuration 81 what is 74 Classical IP basic configura tion 90 combining bridging and routing in a network a configuration example 163 common TCP and UDP num bers 373 configuration activating the 65 loading the default using the action 65 using the DIP switch 66 loading the saved 65 configuration action executing 63 what is 64 configuration alarm attributes 332 configuration attributes 169 ATM 189 bridg
152. ducing PPP on page 70 for an introduction on link monitoring The PPP protocol features link monitoring You can use this to verify whether the WAN link is up or down If link monitoring is enabled then the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router sends an echo request packet over the line at regular intervals If on consecutive requests no reply is given then the PPP link is declared down Data traffic is stopped until the PPP handshake succeeds again You can enable or disable link monitoring and fine tune it using the linkMonitoring attribute Refer to telindus1421Router wanInterface ppp linkMonitoring on page 182 72 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router User manual Chapter 6 Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 2 4 Configuring PPP authentication Refer to 6 2 1 Introducing PPP on page 70 for an introduction on CHAP CHAP authentication in one direc tion The figure shows CHAP authentica tion in one direction Router A is called the authenticator and the router B is called the peer Router A is configured for CHAP authentication and the router B is not Router A authenticates after building its LCP layer and prior to building the IPCP layer If the authentication suc ceeds then the PPP link is built fur ther until data can be sent Else PPP starts its handshake again During data transfer it also authenticates at regular intervals CHAP authentication in both directions If CHAP authentication is enabled s
153. e Maximum length of the file name is 24 characters All char acters are allowed including spaces The file name is case sensitive This is the length of the file in bytes ra telindus1421Router fileSystem freeSpace This attribute displays the number of free bytes on the file system ra telindus1421Router fileSystem status This attribute displays the status of the file system Possible values are ready Normal situation formatting The file system is being formatted This can be triggered when the file system is found to be corrupt at boot corrupt The file system is in a state were no guarantee can be given about the correct operation of the file system The file system will be formatted at the following boot corruptBlocks A certain block can not be erased ra telindus1421Router fileSystem corruptBlocks The file system of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router consists of several blocks When a block can not be erased the corruptBlocks count is incremented This block can no longer be used to store data 298 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes WS telindus1421Router fileSystem Delete File Use this action to remove obsolete files from the file system You have to enter the file name you want to delete as argument value WS telindus1421Router fileSystem Rename File Use this action to rename a file on the file system You have to enter the old and new
154. e 231 bridge access list 236 bridge group 232 bridge traffic policy 237 default NAT 215 Frame Relay 184 general 172 HDLC 195 L2TP tunnel 218 LAN interface 176 line 196 loop back 243 management 240 overview 170 Index 379 PPP 181 priority policy 228 router 200 router general 201 SNMP 238 traffic policy 223 WAN interface 179 WAN interface general 180 configuration examples 157 configuration file creating a 349 creating a binary 350 creating an ASCII 351 using CLI get 353 using TFTP get 352 getting with TFTP 346 configuration type active 64 default 64 explaining the 64 non active 64 what is 64 configuring a priority policy 132 configuring a traffic policy on the bridge 154 on the router 131 connecting a LAN to the Inter net using NAT and PAT a configuration example 161 connecting the device 15 an example 18 connecting the different parts of the device 17 connecting two networks through a tunnel a configu ration example 164 connecting VLAN enabled switches over a WAN a configuration example 166 connecting with TMA over an IP network 32 through the control connec tor 30 containment tree adding an object 39 of the device 38 terminology 36 what is 36 control connector specifica tions 365 conventions in this manual graphical vi typographical v 380 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Annex copyright notice ii creating passwords in the se curity table 60 D def
155. e 315 discards 319 diciTable 309 freeBlockCount 327 freeDataBuffers 327 freeMemory 328 h24Line 313 h24LineParameters 315 h24Performance 306 315 h2Line 313 h2LineParameters 314 h2Performance 306 314 icmpAllocs 320 icmpSocketsUsed 319 ifInDiscards 304 iflnErrors 304 iflnNUcastPkts 304 iflnOctets 304 iflnUcastPkts 304 iflnUnknownProtos 304 ifOutDiscards 305 ifOutErrors 305 ifOutNUcastPkts 305 ifOutOctets 304 ifOutPQLen 308 ifOutQLen 305 ifOutUcastPkts 304 I2tpTunnels 321 largestFreeBlockSize 327 line 313 lineParameters 315 Imi 311 performance 315 pingResults 318 pvcTable 312 routingTable 317 socketsFree 319 taskInfo 328 tcpAllocs 320 tcpSessionCount 326 tcpSocketsUsed 319 tftpSessionCount 325 totalDataBuffers 327 totalMemory 328 udpAllocs 320 udpSocketsUsed 319 unknownCells 312 usedProcPower 327 attribute status activeFlash 249 actualBitRate 275 adapter 256 addresses 283 arpCache 253 291 atmSync 269 bcpHisOptions 263 bcpMyOptions 263 bcpState 260 bootVersion 249 bridgeCache 292 bridging 254 264 271 293 cllmLastCongestionCause 268 cms2Address 296 configurationSaving 250 corruptBlocks 297 deviceld 250 dhcpBinding 282 dhcpStatistics 282 diciTable 265 fileList 297 flash1Version 249 flash2Version 249 flashVersions 249 freeSpace 297 hisAuthenstate 264 ifDescr 251 258 272 290 296 ifLastChange 251 258 ifMtu 251 258 290 296 ifOperStatus 251 259 272 275 2
156. e WAN interface The encapsulation attribute has the following values frameRelay ppp atm and hdlc telindus1421Router wanInterface priorityPolicy Default lt empty gt Range 0 24 characters Use this attribute to apply a priority policy on the interface Do this by entering the index name of the priority policy you want to use You can create the priority policy itself by adding a priorityPolicy object under the router object and by configuring the attributes in this object Example If you created a priorityPolicy object with index name my_priority_policy i e gt priorityPolicy imy_priorty_policyl priorityPolicy my_priority_policy and you want to apply this priority policy here then enter the index name as value for the priorityPolicy attribute Refer to e 7 6 5 Configuring a priority policy on page 132 for more information on priority policies e 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 39 for more information on adding objects telindus1421Router wanlnterface maxFifoQLen Default lt empty gt Range 0 24 characters Use this attribute to set the maximum length number of packets of the First In First Out queue Refer to telindus1421Router router priorityPolicy J algorithm on page 228 for more information on this queue telindus1421Router wanInterface alarmMask telindus1421Router waninterface alarmLevel Refer to e 13 2 Introducing the alarm at
157. e configured on every IP interface Refer to the igmp element in 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure on page 52 A client can leave or join a multicast group by erasing or adding a multicast address from a table defined in the client application A list of multicast group addresses is maintained in the routers The reported multicast addresses can be seen in the igmpTable Refer to telindus1421Router router igmpTable on page 280 Multicast frames are always forwarded on the proxy interface Therefore in the IGMP topology example it is also possible to add a multicast server Server 2 on LAN 1 Client 2 can join a multicast group of Server S2 Since IGMP is send in UDP join leave can be lost the clients proxies are polled every 125 seconds A general query is send to 224 0 0 1 poll all systems A leave group message is send to 224 0 0 2 all routers 282 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes ra telindus1421Router router dhcpBinding This attribute contains a list of dynamically assigned i e leased IP addresses The dhcpBinding table contains the following elements Ce ipAddress This is the IP address that is dynamically assigned to a client macAddress This is the MAC address of the client leaseTime This is the remaining lease time ra telindus1421Router router dhcpStatistics This attribute contains the statistics of all IP address ranges that have been specifi
158. e gateway lies within the configured network route For example network 10 0 0 0 mask 255 255 255 0 gateway 10 0 0 1 e areroute occurs when no local gateway is specified The following table summarises the above Interface name Gateway Result correct none 0 0 0 0 e PTP route added e MP route not added correct local route added always correct not local e PTP route added e MP rerouted incorrect route not added no name local for an interface routed added no name not local for an interface rerouted to gateway Exception e GW none 0 0 0 0 route not added e GW lies in configured net route not added work route 1 In the routingTable status the configured gateway will appear but for the routing itself the gate way is ignored Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 99 User manual Configuring the router 7 2 3 Configuring static routes examples This section presents the following examples Example of a default route on page 99 e Example 1 Static IP route with an IP address on the WAN interface on page 100 e Example 2 Static IP route without an IP address on the WAN interface on page 101 Example of a default route office isp f gt a a Internet w IP address WAN interface 192 168 100 3 In this example an office is connected via a modem link over a network of an operator to an Internet Service Provider ISP The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Route
159. e la Directiva 1999 5 CE Col presente Telindus dichiara che questo Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router in acquiescenza coi requisiti essenziali e stipulazioni attinenti ed altre di Direttivo 1999 5 EC ME To Tapov n Telindus n ver OTL vto TO Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router eivat OVULOPHODHEVO ue TLC Baotket ATaITHOELG kor ue TLC VTOAOUTES OXETIKES StaTAEELT tng onya 1999 5 EC iv Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Preface User and reference manual Organisation of this manual This manual contains the following main parts This part User manual shows you how to install and connect the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router It also gives a basic configuration of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Reference manual gives more detailed information on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router It con tains a complete description of all the configuration status performance and alarm parameters for look up purposes gives additional information Refer to the Table of contents on page vii for a detailed overview of this manual Application software version This manual describes the features containment tree and attributes of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router application software version T2852 00700 Audience This manual is intended for computer literate people who have a working knowledge of computing and networking principles Your feedback Your satisfaction about this purchase is an extremely important priority to all of us at Telindus Accord in
160. e management of a Telindus device It explains terms such as containment tree group object attribute value and action The following gives an overview of this section e 4 2 1 Graphical representation of the containment tree on page 35 e 4 2 2 Containment tree terminology on page 36 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 4 35 User manual Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 4 2 1 Graphical representation of the containment tree The most comprehensible graphical representation of the containment tree is given in TMA The follow ing figure depicts the TMA window displaying a containment tree TMA com 1 olx Connect Edit View Tools Help Alel 515 ool ia xl Containment tree crocusShdslTt Configuration Status E Perfomance G Alarms groups line containment tree lineP air 1 linePair 2 B 9703 sysLocation security forwardT maT oCtrlPort forwardT maT oLine objects attributes alarmMask r alarmLevel Struct gt MqoteAlarmMask ONQOOOO0ND Action Zefivate Lontiguration Load Saved Configuration Load Default Configuration ik la ste aks te te ak actions Y alamMask Han E BitN falarmS yncLoss enabled contigChanged disabled access disabled remoteAlarm disabled unknownState disabled coldBoot disabled warmBoot disabled codeConsistencyFail disabled sufigConsistencyFail disabled structured value V
161. e object is present in the containment tree The dif ferent objects are distinguished from one another by adding an index E g linePair 1 and linePair 2 where 1 and 2 are the indexes Also child objects are given an index by the user when adding the object An index name is also often referred to as index instance value or instance name attribute An attribute is a parameter related to a certain object It has a certain value value An attribute has a certain value which is e changeable in case of a configuration attribute provided you have write access e read only in case of a status performance and alarm attribute structured value Some attribute values contain underlying values a structured value These values are displayed in the structured value window If an attribute contains structured val ues then a bit string lt Table gt or lt Struct gt is displayed after the attribute A structured value is also often referred to as just structure Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 4 User manual Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 37 element An element is an attribute within a structured value In other words they could be considered as sub attributes group Groups assemble a set of attributes related by functionality There are four groups in TMA which correspond with the four tabs in the attribute window e configuration e status performance alarms action A grou
162. e of the program counter The program counter is the mem ory address for the current instruction of this task 300 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 12 301 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 Performance attributes This chapter discusses the performance attributes of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router The following gives an overview of this chapter 12 1 Performance attributes overview on page 302 12 2 LAN interface performance attributes on page 304 12 3 WAN interface performance attributes on page 307 12 4 Line performance attributes on page 313 12 5 Router performance attributes on page 316 12 6 Bridge performance attributes on page 322 12 7 Management performance attributes on page 325 12 8 Operating system performance attributes on page 327 302 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 12 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 1 Performance attributes overview gt telindus1421Router gt gt gt line h2Line gt gt lanInterface h24Line ifnOctets d7Line ifnUcastPkts line iflnNUcastPkts Action retrain iflnDiscards ifInErrors gt gt gt gt linePair 1 iflnUnknownProtos h2LineParameters ifOutOctets h2Performance ifOutUcastPkts h24LineParameters ifOutNUcastPkts h24Performance ifOutDiscards d7LineParameters ifOutErrors d7Performance ifOutQLen lineParameters h2Performance performance h24Performa
163. e office is connected to a central office over an ATM network A modem link connects the remote office to the ATM network At the local office a Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is installed The central router is a third party router WAN interface IP 192 168 100 1 mask 255 255 255 252 LAN interface IP 192 168 47 254 Router modem IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 modem VPI 100 VCI 100 WAN interface IP 192 168 100 2 mask 255 255 255 252 LAN interface IP 192 168 48 254 network IP subnet 192 168 48 0 mask 255 255 255 0 The configuration of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router in CLI format is as follows action Load Default Configuration SET SELECT lanInterface LIST ip address 192 168 47 254 mode routing SELECT wanInterface LIST encapsulation atm SELECT atm LIST pvcTable a name pvcl ip address 192 168 100 1 netMask 255 255 255 252 remote 192 168 100 2 atm vpi 100 vei 100 An router l LIST routingTable a network 192 168 48 0 gateway 192 168 100 2 action Activate Configuration Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router User manual Chapter 9 161 Configuration examples 9 4 Connecting a LAN to the Internet using NAT and PAT This is an example of a local network that only uses private addresses A PPP link connects your site to the Internet Service Provid
164. e physical connection towards the ATM network What is more the total amount of data that the PVCs try to send also exceeds the total amount of available bandwidth As a result the total available bandwidth 2 Mbps is divided proportionally over the PVCs 2048 kbps is the total available bandwidth and 512 kbps is the lowest speed So PVC 1 gets 4 8th 1024 kbps of the total available bandwidth PVC 2 gets 2 8th 512 kbps PVC 3 and 4 each get 1 8th 256 kbps Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router User manual Scenario Configured PCR 1024 kbps Chapter 6 Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols Amount of data sent 2048 kbps Assigned bandwidth 1024 kbps 512 kbps 2048 kbps 512 kbps 448 kbps 2048 kbps 448 kbps 64 kbps 2048 kbps 64 kbps Because the sum of the PCRs equals the total available bandwidth 2 Mbps all the PVCs get the bandwidth that is specified in their PCRs Scenario Configured PCR 2048 kbps Amount of data sent 2048 kbps Assigned bandwidth 896 kbps 2048 kbps 2048 kbps 896 kbps 512 kbps 2048 kbps 192 kbps 1024 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps n this case the PCRs of the PVCs are over dimensioned i e the sum of the PCRs exceeds the bandwidth of the physical connection towards the ATM network What is more the total amount of data that the PVCs try to send also exceeds the total amount of available bandwidth However
165. e stations situated on the network that is connected to this port The MAC addresses are stored ina MAC address database or bridge cache The bridgeCache attribute visualises this address database Refer to What is the bridge cache on page 232 for more information The bridgeCache table contains the following elements SR interface This is the interface through which the station can be reached macAddress This is the MAC address of the station situated on the network connected to the interface rxCount This is the number of frames received from the corresponding MAC address txCount This is the number of frames forwarded to the corresponding MAC address ra telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup bridgeDiscards This attribute displays the number of times a frame was discarded because e it was received on the same interface as the one through which the destination address can be reached e it was received on an interface that is not in the forwarding state ra telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup bridgeFloods This attribute displays the number of times a frame was flooded on all interfaces because it was a broadcast multicast e the position of the station with the destination MAC address was not known yet 324 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 12 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 6 2 Bridge access list performance attributes ra telindus1421Router bridge accessList bri
166. e sum of the CIRs of the DLCls exceed the bandwidth of the physical connection When you do exceed the total bandwidth of the physical connection then the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router first buffers the data However when the buffers of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router are com pletely filled up it has to discard the excess data Examples Suppose you have a 2 e Mbps physical connection Jal mA f towards the Frame Relay Es DLCI 16 service provider and you LAN 2 Mbps connection rect define 2 DLCls 4 e Suppose you assign to Fe CAS both DLCls a CIR of 1 Mbps and an EIR of 0 gt In that case you have per DLCI a guaranteed bandwidth of 1 Mbps and no bursts are allowed Suppose you assign to both DLCls a CIR of 512 kbps and an EIR of 512 kbps gt In that case you have per DLCI a guaranteed bandwidth of 512 kbps and you allow bursts up to 1 Mbps This means that if on both DLCls a burst up to 1 Mbps occurs at the same time the speed of the physical connection 2 Mbps is still not exceeded so no data is discarded If however somewhere else on the network a congestion occurs it is possible that some of the excess data is discarded refer to What is the Discard Eligible bit on page 75 Suppose you assign to both DLCls a CIR of 1 Mbps and an EIR of 1 Mbps gt In that case you have per DLCI a guaranteed bandwidth of 1 Mbps and you a
167. e virtual connection The type of protocol is indicated in the packet s SNAP header By contrast the virtual connection multiplexing method allows for transport of just one protocol per virtual connection Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 6 85 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 4 2 Configuring IP addresses on the ATM WAN When you use ATM encapsulation on the WAN interface you can configure the IP related parameters per PVC using the ip attribute in the pvcTable Refer to 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure on page 52 for a detailed description of the ip structure 86 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 6 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 4 3 Configuring the PVCs Refer to 6 4 1 Introducing ATM on page 83 for an introduction on PVC VPI and VCI Somewhat similar to the DLCls in a Frame Relay network refer to 6 3 3 Configuring the DLCls on page 79 you can set up PVCs in the ATM network A PVC allows direct connectivity between sites In this way a PVC is similar to a leased line A PVC guarantees availability of a connection and does not require call setup procedures between switches Use the pvcTable to set up a PVC s Refer to telindus1421Router wanInterface atm pvcTable on page 189 Example The following figure gives an example of a local Ethernet segment connected to three different networks through three different PVCs 192 168 100 2 VPI 102 VCI 102 eT r
168. each PVC is recalculated at regular intervals This means that depending on the traffic on the PVCs the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router can proportionally divide the bandwidth over the different PVCs As a result over dimensioning the PCR on ATM is not as fatal as over dimensioning the CIR on Frame Relay The following examples will clarify this To configure the PCR use the peakCellRate element in the atm structure within the pvcTable Refer to telindus1421Router wanInterface atm pvcTable atm on page 191 Important remarks e Per definition the PCR is the specified amount of unguaranteed bandwidth However if you want to set a guaranteed bandwidth then donot over dimension the PCR i e do not let the sum of the PCRs of the PVCs exceed the band width of the physical connection donot set the PCR to auto e When you do exceed the total bandwidth of the physical connection then the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router first buffers the data However when the buffers of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router are com pletely filled up it has to discard the excess data Examples se PVC 1 lt Suppose you have a 2 D SA a i P S PVC 2 Mbps physical connection E amm vitae the ATM service AN IA provider and you define 4 f A PVCs z Ga The following tables show some possible scenarios Scenario Configured PCR Amount of data sent Assigned bandwidth Chapter
169. eared Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 257 Reference manual Status attributes 11 4 WAN interface status attributes This section discusses the status attributes of the WAN interface First it describes the general status attributes of the WAN interface Then it explains the status attributes of the encapsulation protocols that can be used on the WAN interface The following gives an overview of this section 11 4 1 General WAN interface status attributes on page 258 11 4 2 PPP status attributes on page 260 11 4 3 Frame Relay status attributes on page 265 11 4 4 ATM status attributes on page 269 11 4 5 HDLC status attributes on page 271 258 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes 11 4 1 General WAN interface status attributes telindus1421Router waninterface ifDescr This attribute displays the interface description This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter telindus1421Router waninterface iffype This attribute displays the interface type This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter telindus1421Router waninterface ifLastChange This attribute shows the system up time on the moment the interface entered its current operational state l e the moment the value of the ifOperStatus status attribute changes from up to down or vice versa the system up time value is written into the ifLastChange status attribute This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter telindus1421Router wanInterface ifSpee
170. ect Example If you created a accessList object with index name my_access_list i e accessit accessList accessList my_access_list and you want to apply this access list my_access_lis here then enter the index name as value for the accessList ele N ment Refer to e 10 7 2 Bridge access list configuration attributes on page 236 for more infor mation on access lists 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 39 for more information on adding objects Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 User manual 151 Configuring the bridge Eenent oseepion trafficPolicy 1 Use this element to apply a traffic policy on the Default lt empty gt bridged data on the interface Range 0 24 characters Do this by entering the index name of the traffic policy you want to use You can create the traffic policy itself by adding a trafficPolicy object under the bridge object and by configuring the attributes in this object Example If you created a trafficPolicy object with index name my_traffic_policy tralficPolicy i e trafficPolicy my_traffic_policy and you want to apply this traffic wt policy here then enter the index name as value for the trafficPolicy N element Refer to e 8 10 Configuring traffic and priority policy on the bridge on page 152 for more information on policies e 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 39 for more information o
171. ed in the configuration attribute telindus1421Router router dhcpDynamic The dhcpStatistics table contains the following elements Emm eeen O startRange Displays the IP start address of an IP address range endRange Displays the IP end address of an IP address range free For the corresponding IP address range this displays the number of IP addresses that are still free lease For the corresponding IP address range this displays the number of IP addresses that are leased hold For the corresponding IP address range this displays the number of IP addresses that are on hold l q During power down of the DHCP server some leased IP addresses can still be active Because the duration of the power down can not be known all timer information about lease and hold time becomes meaningless Therefore the DHCP server incorporated in the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router sends a ping to all leased addresses after a warm boot When the client responds to this ping the DHCP server resets all timers to their default value and keeps the lease with this client Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 283 Reference manual Status attributes 11 6 2 Default NAT status attributes telindus1421Router router defaultNat addresses This attribute displays the status of each official IP address that is configured in the configuration attribute telindus1421Router router defaultNat addresses The addresses table contains the following elements
172. ed to a central office over a Frame Relay network A modem link connects the remote office to the Frame Relay network At the local office a Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is installed The central router is a third party router The Frame Relay network uses LMI according to the ANSI standard No Reverse ARP is supported by the network WAN interface IP 192 168 100 1 mask 255 255 255 252 LAN interface IP 192 168 47 254 Router modem oo IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 WAN interface IP 192 168 100 2 mask 255 255 255 252 LAN interface IP 192 168 48 254 network IP subnet 192 168 48 0 mask 255 255 255 0 The configuration of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router in CLI format is as follows action Load Default Configuration SET SELECT lanInterface LIST ip address 192 168 47 254 mode routing SELECT wanInterface LIST encapsulation frameRelay SELECT frameRelay LIST dliciTable an name dlcil ip address 192 168 100 1 netMask 255 255 255 252 remote 192 168 100 2 frameRelay dici 19 lmi type ansiT1 617 d SELECT router LIST routingTable a 192 168 48 0 192 168 100 2 network gateway action Activate Configuration 160 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router User manual Chapter 9 Configuration examples 9 3 LAN extension over an ATM network In this example a remot
173. ee below Refer to telindus1421Router wanInterface frameRelay diciTable frameRelay on page 186 for a detailed description of the frameRelay structure 186 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Reference manual Chapter 10 Configuration attributes telindus1421Router wanInterface frameRelay diciTable frameRelay Use the frameRelay structure in the diciTable to configure the Frame Relay related parameters of the corresponding DLCI Refer to Default Range structure see below e 6 3 3 Configuring the DLCls on page 79 for more information on DLCls e 6 3 5 Configuring CIR and EIR on page 81 for more information on CIR and EIR The frameRelay structure contains the following elements Fc Use this element to set the DLCI number to reach a remote network Default 16 Range 16 1022 The DLCI number may have any value between 16 and 1022 However if you set the configuration attribute Imi to q933 Annex A you should only use DLCls up to 1007 Use this element to set the Committed Information Rate for the DLCI Default 0 Range 0 2048000 The CIR is expressed in bps Any value between 0 and 2048000 bps can be con figured If the cir value is set to O default it means the complete bandwidth may be used no flow control Use this element to set the Excess Information Rate for the DLCI Default 0 Range 0 2048000 The EIR
174. eeeceeeeeeaeeaeeeaeeeaeeaeeeaeeeaeeees 34 4 3 The objects in the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router containment tree 4 38 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaaaes 39 4 5 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router attribute OVerView cccccccceccccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 44 5 Basic configuration ooo ecsccc oct as ease ecaneten ste teccatee te eec eet 45 5 1 Reading DIP switch tables and TMA attribute strings eee ceeeeeeeeeeeentneeeeeeeeeeeee 46 5 2 Configuring IP addresses ete ser Pea eased adele ote ec tuetea Sigs Sees aana oes on ee 49 53 Config ring the ING ertean iniaa eatea aa tat Ei aa aia atra 55 5 4 Configuring PaSSWOIS sce tees areal ener aaa aE eae See ay ac ee 59 5 5 Configuring the major features of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 62 5 6 Executing Configuration Acton wsecsscsnccenes cosiecacata caves vaesaecun deeds teed sencwen se casey duebecenaeee dey 63 Table of contents vii viii Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Table of contents User and reference manual 6 Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols ssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 67 6 1 Selecting a WAN encapsulation protocol cccccccececceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeeeeetes 68 6 2 Configuring PPP encapsulationisiuc cccceves cesatensins tute ic cnieec severe seds eeree caver teceadentane ave 69 6 3 Configuring Frame Relay encapsulation 0
175. eeeenenenes 302 12 2 LAN interface performance attribUtes cccceccescceecceeccceeceeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 304 12 3 WAN interface performance attributes cccccceccsececeeeeceeeaeecaeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 307 12 4 Line performance attriDUtes cece eeeeeceseeeeeeeceeeeeaeeeaeeaaeeaaeaaaeaaeeaaeeaaeeaeeeaeeaes 313 12 5 Router performance attributes cccccccsecsscccneceaeceeeeeeeececceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 316 12 6 Bridge performance attributes vs dcscdveasttueciuheuuleuietinateradensien Mis ieetiuavene aise 322 12 7 Management performance attributes 2 0 0 2 ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaae 325 12 8 Operating system performance attributes 20 eee cence eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaae 327 13 Alarm attrib te Sis casos ss sco ease cok wc deck pecan cca ca aiats dedci peajada gs da sadon itay 329 13 1 Alarm attributes overview jee occas tietealorunceatnaie tsGuet ote eee nietent NM aaulel enlonelneas ues Ge 330 13 2 Introducing the alarm attributes cece ceeecceeeee ee eeeseceeeceneeeeeeeseeseeeneeeeeeeenseenaees 331 13 3 General alarms 2 25 teenies Gia eee N a ee a a a ctie ngadadues 334 13 4 LAN interface alarms cecccesscecseecceecaeeeaeeeaecaaeeaeeeaeeeaeceeceesaeceeceaeceaeeeeeeeeeeeees 336 13 5 WAN interface alarms iisisccsesescvssendsag dened edad hans ebetece tt aeenis ead oeunae dan deorcbeeneaaeadse 337 13 62 LING AlARINSs ng
176. efer to 8 1 Introducing bridging on page 138 for an introduction on bridging Use the mode attribute to enable or disable bridging per interface The location of this attribute depends on the interface Location of the mode attribute LAN telindus1421Router laninterface mode on page 178 WAN Frame Relay telindus1421Router waninterface frameRelay diciTable mode on page 185 WAN PPP telindus1421Router wanInterface ppp mode on page 181 WAN ATM telindus1421Router wanInterface atm pvcTable mode on page 189 tunnel telindus1421Router router tunnels I2tpTunnels mode on page 218 8 9 3 Selecting the bridging protocol Refer to 8 2 The self learning and Transparent Spanning Tree bridge on page 139 for an introduction Use the protocol element in the spanningTree structure to select the bridging protocol Refer to telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup spanningTree on page 234 8 9 4 Setting the bridge priority Refer to 8 8 The Spanning Tree priority and cost on page 145 for more information on bridge priority Use the bridgePriority element in the spanningTree structure to set the bridge priority Refer to telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup spanningTree on page 234 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 149 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 9 5 Configuring the bridging parameters on the interfaces Use the bridging structure to configure the bridging parameters per interface The location of this structure
177. eference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 15 2 Getting the LAN IP address The following figure shows how the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router obtains its LAN IP address from a BootP server on its Ethernet interface Server file contains e g Pa 00 C0 89 00 94 6F and BootP server 192 168 47 254 255 255 255 0 Router IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 The IP address is obtained as follows me pe O In case on the LAN interface no IP address or subnet mask are configured default value AND the telindus1421Router laninterface mode attribute is set to routing OR no IP address or subnet mask are configured default value AND the telindus1421Router laninterface mode attribute is set to bridging default value AND no IP address or subnet mask are configured in the bridgeGroup default value then the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router starts sending BootP requests every 10 sec onds on its LAN interface These requests contain the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router its MAC address The BootP server looks in its MAC address IP address file If the MAC address in the BootP request matches a MAC address in this file the BootP server replies with the cor responding IP address and subnet mask Example In the example above the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router its MAC address is 00 C0 89 00 94 6F The server replies with IP address 192 168 47 254 and correspond ing subnet mask 255 255
178. eferred path path cost 10 path cost 10 root bridge Bridge C Bridge A Bridge B path cost 100 Bridge D By setting the path costs of Bridge A and B to a lower value than the path cost of Bridge D you can create a preferred path through Bridge A and B The path through Bridge D becomes the back up path Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 147 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 9 Configuring bridging This section lists the attributes you can use to configure bridging The following gives an overview of this section e 8 9 1 Configuring an IP address on page 148 8 9 2 Enabling bridging on the interfaces on page 148 e 8 9 3 Selecting the bridging protocol on page 148 e 8 9 4 Setting the bridge priority on page 148 e 8 9 5 Configuring the bridging parameters on the interfaces on page 149 e 8 9 6 Explaining the bridging structure on page 150 148 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 9 1 Configuring an IP address If you enable bridging on the LAN interface telindus1421Router laninterface mode bridging then the settings of the configuration attribute telindus1421Router lanInterface ip are ignored As a result if you want to manage the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router via IP you have to configure an IP address in the bridgeGroup object instead telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup ip 8 9 2 Enabling bridging on the interfaces R
179. elay protocol used for Cause traffic management The cllmLastCongestionCause element indicates the last reason which was received from the network for congestion on the corresponding DLCI Refer to telindus1421Router wanInterface frameRelay cllmLastCongestionCause on page 268 for the possible values of the cllmLastCongestionCause element Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 267 Reference manual Status attributes ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface frameRelay Imi This attribute gives a complete LMI status information overview The Imi structure contains the following elements Description This displays the Frame Relay mode Possible values are noLmi user network auto Refer to telindus1421Router wanInterface frameRelay Imi on page 187 for more informa tion on these values This displays the LMI variant Possible values are ImiRev1 ansiT1 617 d q933 Annex A frf1 2 Refer to telindus1421Router waninterface frameRelay Imi on page 187 for more informa tion on these values status This displays the current state of LMI Possible values are LMI messages can and are exchanged No LMI messages can be exchanged lastStatusChange This is the system up time when the LMI status entered its current state l e the moment the value of the status element changes from up to down or vice versa the system up time value is written into the lastStatusChange element lastError This displays t
180. elindus1421Router operatingSystem usedProcPower This attribute lists the used processing power for the 11 most recent 30 seconds intervals The process ing power is expressed as a percentage of the total processing power The usedProcPower table contains the following elements een E AA Sa sysUpTime This is the elapsed time since the last cold boot The next values are for the 30 seconds period before this relative time stamp This is the minimum percentage of processing power in use during the last 30 sec onds average This is the average percentage of processing power in use during the last 30 sec onds This is the maximum percentage of processing power in use during the last 30 sec onds telindus1421Router operatingSystem freeDataBuffers The processor uses buffers for storing the packets during processing and or queuing Each buffer has a 256 byte size headers included This attribute is the number of data buffers currently not in use and available for e g incoming data telindus1421Router operatingSystem totalDataBuffers This attribute displays the total number of available data buffers telindus1421Router operatingSystem largestFreeBlockSize The processor uses RAM memory for storing internal information and buffering The different tasks allo cate RAM memory on request Tasks may also free memory again In this way the total RAM memory becomes fragmented This attribute gives the size of the la
181. en make sure that you use the correct speed attributes to set the speed If the mode attribute is set to then configure the speed using the attributes singlePair minSpeed and maxSpeed dualPair minSpeed2P and maxSpeed2P telindus1421Router waninterface line alarmMask telindus1421Router waninterface line alarmLevel Refer to e 13 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 331 for more information on the configuration attributes alarmMask and alarmLevel and on the alarms in general e 13 6 Line alarms on page 338 for more information on the alarms of the line and the linePair object 200 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 6 Router configuration attributes This section discusses the configuration attributes concerned with routing First it describes the general routing configuration attributes Then it explains the configuration attributes of the extra features as there are default NAT L2TP tunnelling filtering traffic and priority policy etc The following gives an overview of this section 10 6 1 General router configuration attributes on page 201 10 6 2 Default NAT configuration attributes on page 215 10 6 3 L2TP tunnel configuration attributes on page 218 10 6 4 Routing filter configuration attributes on page 222 10 6 5 Traffic policy configuration attributes on page 223 10 6 6 Priority policy configuration attributes on page 2
182. encapsulation atm SELECT atm LIST pvcTable a name pvcl mode bridging atm vpi 100 vei 100 SELECT bridge SELECT bridgeGroup LIST ip address 10 1 0 2 vlan dotQTagging enabled vid 10 action Activate Configuration Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 167 Reference manual Reference manual 168 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Reference manual Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 169 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 Configuration attributes This chapter discusses the configuration attributes of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router The following gives an overview of this chapter 10 1 Configuration attribute overview on page 170 10 2 General configuration attributes on page 172 10 3 LAN interface configuration attributes on page 176 10 4 WAN interface configuration attributes on page 179 10 5 Line configuration attributes on page 196 10 6 Router configuration attributes on page 200 10 7 Bridge configuration attributes on page 231 10 8 SNMP configuration attributes on page 238 10 9 Management configuration attributes on page 240 170 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Reference manual 10 1 Configuration attribute overview Chapter 10 Configuration attributes gt telindus1421Router sysName sysContact sysLocation bootFromFlash security alarmMask alarmLevel Action Activate Configuration Action Load Saved Config
183. enese e e e ans teetieds sido ied aa todas tied aaeaveea agen 338 1327 ROUTER E NEEE E EAEE EAE TTE 339 x Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Table of contents User and reference manual 14 TMA sub system picture xn eco aca een seee seins nce eceacen tte shee eee eee 341 15 Auto installing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router ccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 343 15 1 What is BootP and DHCP cccctasecrce te acted catslareecurss dagdicce ct decantarue ts ianeeaceteadtenadeatees 344 15 2 Getting the LAN IP address scciise hada secedubehecesigh inal hnstweksh edede peedgedandh Meck geesbienayeces 345 15 3 Getting the configuration with TFTP i rsccteceerctsyuads ccetny evapcaredeetsaneassnenaegeebeathaveieen 346 15 4 Creating configuration files 2 scie cs lest coaches erect eats dete davek de gichle aes tacden ech Roca teal Seeloes 349 15 5 Creating a binary Configuration file ccccccseceeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneesoes 350 15 6 Creating an ASCII configuration file ceccceceeeeeeeeeeseeeeecneeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeentenenneee 351 16 Downloading software 22 oe ace oa ee ee 355 16 1 What is boot loader and application SoftWare ccecseecseeceeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeees 356 16 2 Downloading application software USING TMA eeeeeeeeeeeeee eter ee eeeennaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaee 357 16 3 Downloading application software using TFTP 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeenaaes 358 16 4 Downloading application or
184. ensing and ambient operational temperature 5 to 45 C or relative humidity 0 to 95 non condensing and ambient operational temperature 10 to 50 C e Maximum altitude 3000m e International protection IP class of protection against solid and liquids IP40 370 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 17 Reference manual Technical specifications Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 371 Annex Annex 372 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Annex Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Annex Annex A 373 common TCP and UDP numbers Annex A common TCP and UDP numbers The following table shows the port numbers for a number of common protocols using TCP and UDP as transport protocol As far as possible the same port numbers are used for TCP as for UDP A complete list can be found in the RFCs Requests For Comment ftp data UDP TCP TCP Description File Transfer Default Data ftp TCP File Transfer Control telnet TCP Telnet smtp TCP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol time UDP TCP Time Server nameserver UDP Host Name Server domain UDP TCP Domain Name Server tacacs ds UDP TCP TACACS Database Service bootps UDP Bootstrap Protocol Server bootpc UDP Bootstrap Protocol Client tftp UDP Trivial File Transfer www hittp TCP World Wide Web HTTP nntp TCP Network News Transfer Protocol netbios ns UDP NETBIOS Na
185. ent has the following values bridging All packets received on the tunnel are bridged routing All packets received on the tunnel are routed routingAndBridging The SNAP header is checked to determine whether the packets have to be bridged or routed Use this element to configure the IP related parame Default ters of the tunnel Range structure see below Refer to 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure on page 52 for a detailed description of the ip structure bridging Use this element to configure the bridging related Default parameters of the tunnel Range structure see below When bridging is enabled on a tunnel interface the tunnel acts exactly as a bridge port for a physical PPP connection Refer to e 8 Configuring the bridge on page 137 for more information on bridging e 8 9 6 Explaining the bridging structure on page 150 for a detailed description of the bridging structure Use this element to configure the L2TP related Default parameters of the tunnel Range structure see below Refer to telindus1421Router router tunnels I2tpTunnels I2tp on page 219 for a detailed description of the 2tp structure Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 219 Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1421Router router tunnels I2tpTunnels I2tp Default Use the I2tp structure in the I2tpTunnels table to configure the L2TP related Range
186. ent tool how to add an object to the containment tree The following section 4 4 3 Referring to an added object on page 43 shows you how you can refer to this added object somewhere else in the containment tree Adding an object in TMA Action agy Retrieve F5 Right click on the parent object e g router oC Feoad anr an A pop up menu appears o _ Ee Add module x In the pop up menu select Add Child and select the Os child object you want to add e g routingFilter X eee a ith name my_filter gt A pop up w indow a ppears The syntax description for the index can be found on the statusbar In the pop up window type the instance value i e the index name for the child object e g my_filter and click on OK OK Cancel aN The new child object is created e g routingFil ter my_filter Adding an object in TMA CLI Enter the parent object e g select router Type the following command set select childObjectName instanceValue where instanceValue is a string of your choice e g set select routingFilter my filter gt The new child object is created Adding an object in ATWIN w p OS Enter the parent object e g go to the router object and press the enter key The ATWIN window shows the sub objects and attributes of the parent object Go to the line displaying the string lt cREATE INSTANCE gt and the name of the object you want t
187. er At your site a Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is installed You only received 2 official IP addresses from the ISP one for all outgoing traffic using PAT 195 7 12 22 and one for accessing the local web server using NAT 195 7 12 21 with a ded icated private address IP address WAN interface PAT address 195 7 12 22 IP address LAN interface 192 168 47 254 your site Router modem IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 serial intf IP address WAN interface 195 7 12 254 Frame Relay or PDH SDH network A 6 bs ISP The configuration of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router in CLI format is as follows action Load Default Configuration SET SELECT lanInterface LIST ip address 192 168 47 254 mode routing SELECT wanInterface LIST encapsulation ppp SELECT ppp LIST ip address 195 7 12 22 nat default SELECT router LIST defaultRoute gateway 195 7 12 254 SELECT defaultNat LIST patAddress 195 7 12 22 addresses a officialAddress 195 7 12 21 privateAddress 192 168 47 250 action Activate Configuration 162 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 User manual Configuration examples 9 5 Using PAT over PPP with a minimum of official IP addresses This is another example of a local network that only uses private addresses A PPP link connects your site to the
188. er bridge trafficPolicy vlanPriorityMap on page 237 Important remark Whereas configuring a traffic policy for routed data is different than for bridged data configuring a priority policy is the same for both In other words the mechanism to fill the queues is different for routed data than it is for bridged data but the mechanism to empty the queues is the same for both routed and bridged data Refer to 7 6 5 Configuring a priority policy on page 132 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 155 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 10 3 Applying a bridging traffic policy on a certain interface This section shows you where to find the appropriate traffic policy elements in order to apply a traffic policy on a certain interface The following table shows you in which trafficPolicy element you have to enter the index name of the earlier created trafficPolicy object in order to apply a traffic policy on the bridged data of a certain interface For the you can find the trafficPolicy element in WAN interface each WAN encapsulation object frameRelay You can find the trafficPolicy element in the bridging structure within the dlciTable attribute under the frameRelay object telindus 142 1Router wanInterface frameRelay diciTable bridging trafficPol icy This means that you can specify a traffic policy per DLCI You can find the trafficPolicy element in the bridging structure under the ppp object telindus1421Router waninterface
189. er to 17 2 LAN interface specifications on page 364 for the specifications of this connector This female 9 pins subD connector is the control connector You can connect this connector to a COM port of your PC with a straight male female DB9 cable This enables you to manage the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router locally using TMA CLI ATWIN etc You can also connect this connector to a management concentrator also for management purposes Refer to 17 3 Control connector specifications on page 365 for more information on this connector This RJ12 connector is the connection towards the SHDSL line Connect one side of a RJ12 to RJ12 cable to the LINE connector of the Telin dus 1421 SHDSL Router and the other side to an SHDSL outlet Refer to 17 1 Line specifications on page 362 for the specifications of this con nector 1 Refer to the TAP catalogue for the layout and the sales codes of these cables 18 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2 6 3 Connecting the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router an example The following figure shows a typical Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router set up RJ12 RJ12 cable Ethernet hub computer running TMA e the LINE connector is connected to an SHDSL line outlet using an RJ12 RJ12 cable In this way the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is connected to the WAN You can for example connect the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router
190. eral RIP process on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Refer to telindus1421Router router routingProtocol on page 203 e Then use the rip structure within the ip structure to configure for each interface the RIP version the RIP behaviour and to fine tune the RIP operation Refer to 5 2 2 Where to find the IP related parameters on page 51 for the location of the ip structure The rip structure is located within the ip structure 7 3 3 Explaining the rip structure on page 106 for a detailed explanation of the rip structure 106 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 3 3 Explaining the rip structure Because the rip structure occurs in several objects it is described here once and referenced where nec essary The rip structure is located within the ip structure Refer to 5 2 2 Where to find the IP related parameters on page 51 for the location of the ip structure The rip structure contains the following elements a metric Use this element to determine with how much the Tel Default 1 indus 1421 SHDSL Router increments the metric Range 1 15 parameter of a route Routing information includes a metric parameter Every time a router is passed this parameter is incremented Also the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router increments the metric parameter default by 1 before it writes the route in the routing table Hence the metric parameter indicates for each route how many routers h
191. erface but can also be a DLC a PVC a tunnel etc Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 135 User manual Configuring the router 7 7 Configuring an extended access list In case you set the telindus1421Router router trafficPolicy method attribute to trafficShaping default value then you can use the telindus1421Router router trafficPolicy trafficShaping attribute to set up an extended access list The extended access list itself is activated by specifying the trafficPolicy object its index name ina trafficPolicy element of a certain interface Example Suppose you want to set up an extended access list on the LAN interface Then proceed as follows w pooo S Add a trafficPolicy object to the containment tree Refer airi to 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on Ga tunnel page 39 A trafficPolicy my_traffic_policy Suppose you name it my_traffic_policy Go to the ip attribute in the lanInterface object In the ip attribute enter the index name of the added trafficPolicy object lip as value of the trafficPolicy element In e neikiaske ip gt trafficPolicy this case my_traffic_policy b 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 lt Struct gt my_traffic_policy Set the configuration attribute telindus1421Router router trafficPolicy method to trafficShaping Configure the configuration attribute telindus1421Router router trafficPolicy trafficShaping to your needs 136 Telindus
192. es of management concentrators are the Orchid 1003 LAN and the Telindus 1030 Router series Refer to their corresponding manuals for more information on how to set these devices up as management proxy 2 A serial connection is a connection between the COM port of your PC and the control connec tor of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router using a male female DB9 cable 3 An IP connection is a connection between your PC and the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router over an IP network Using a VT100 terminal emulation program Using Telnet Using an SNMP browser Using a web browser NOOO Ff Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 9 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2 Installing and connecting the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router First this chapter gives some important safety instructions Then it explains how to install and connect the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router You are advised to read this chapter from the beginning to the end without skipping any part By doing so your Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router will be completely installed and ready for configuration when you reach the end of this chapter The following gives an overview of this chapter e 2 1 Safety instructions on page 10 e 2 2 Unpacking on page 11 e 2 3 Selecting a site on page 12 e 2 4 Installation and connection precautions on page 13 e 2 5 Line speed precautions on page 14 e 2 6 Connecting the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router on page 15
193. essential It also gives more information on how to select a line speed range Finally it explains the concept power back off e 5 3 1 Essential line attributes on page 56 5 3 2 Selecting a line speed range on page 57 5 3 3 Power back off on page 58 56 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router User manual 5 3 1 Essential line attributes Chapter 5 Basic configuration To establish a line connection successfully it is essential to set the following attributes correct Attribute telindus1421Router wanInterface line channel on page 196 Purpose of the attribute For synchronisation purposes one unit has to be defined as central and its remote counterpart as remote telindus1421Router wanIinterface line region on page 196 For correct operation select the correct SHDSL standard Normally the auto setting should suf fice telindus1421Router wanInterface line channel on page 196 For compatibility with other SHDSL devices select the correct timing mode In case of a Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 1pair version use e telindus1421Router wanInterface line minSpeed on page 198 telindus1421Router wanInterface line maxSpeed on page 198 In case of a Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2 pair version use e telindus1421Router waninterface line minSpeed2P on page 199 telindus1421Router wanInterface line maxSpeed2P on page 199 For a successful and qualitative line connection select an appropriate speed
194. et 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 Set IP address 195 7 12 22 to be the PAT address In this case it is the same address as on your WAN interface The gateway attribute should contain the gateway address 195 7 12 254 However if you already defined your defaultRoute to be 195 7 12 254 then you can leave the gateway attribute empty This because if the gateway attribute is empty then the defaultRoute is taken as only gateway addresses 116 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 4 4 How does PAT work Again consider the network topology as depicted in 7 4 3 Configuring PAT on page 115 The following two paragraphs explain how the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router treats the outgoing and incoming traffic when PAT is applied Outgoing traffic to the Internet The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router replaces the source address by its PAT address in all the traffic com ing from the Ethernet and destined for the Internet Depending on the IP transport protocol and the number of simultaneous users accessing the Internet the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router takes different actions TCP Description This is a connection oriented protocol two devices communicating with the TCP protocol build a session before exchanging user data When they have finished exchanging user data the session is closed Examples of such applications are Telnet HTTP and FTP The TCP header contains a port field indicating the highe
195. eueMapping on page 227 telindus1421Router router trafficPolicy dropLevels on page 226 only the maxLength1 element 132 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 6 5 Configuring a priority policy Refer to 7 6 1 Introducing traffic and priority policy on page 128 for an introduction This section shows you which configuration attributes you can use to configure a priority policy The priorityPolicy object is not present in the containment tree by default If you want to use priority pol icy then add this object first Refer to 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 39 e Whereas configuring a traffic policy for routed data is different than for bridged data configuring a priority policy is the same for both In other words the mechanism to fill the queues is different for routed data than it is for bridged data but the mechanism to empty the queues is the same for both routed and bridged data First you have to choose an algorithm you want to use to empty the queues Do this using the attribute telindus1421Router router priorityPolicy J algorithm on page 228 Then you can define the number of bytes packets that has to be dequeued from the user configurable queues when these queues are addressed Do this using the attribute telindus1421Router router priorityPolicy queueConfigurations on page 230 Also with this attribute you can set the relative importance of the u
196. every 30 seconds It is possible to change this interval However changing this interval will also change the lifetime of routes learnt through RIP If a RIP route is received for the last time it is declared down after 6 times the ripUpdatelnterval After the route is down it is deleted after 4 times the ripUpdatelnterval Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 205 Reference manual Configuration attributes Ca telindus1421Router router ripHoldDownTime Default 00000d 00h 03m 00s Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s Use this attribute to set the time the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router has to 9 00000d 00h 10m 00s hold a route down in case it receives a RIP update message declaring this route down What is the RIP hold down time Suppose you have a situation as depicted in the fig ure alongside j router s Now suppose the following happens oy CS a E router B 1 Route X goes down Router A sends a RIP update message to e53 router B declaring route X down sherk 2 Only a few moments later route X goes up fora while after which it goes down again This continues for a certain time In other words the route status toggles between up and down Every time the status of route X changes Router A sends a RIP update message to router B Also router B propagates these RIP update messages In other words the toggling of route X causes that a lot of RIP update messages are sent The ripHoldDownTime attribute
197. explanation 52 where to find 51 IPCP what is 70 L L2TP basic configuration 126 how works 126 introduction 125 terminology 125 what is 125 L2TP status authentication states 289 call states 287 control states 286 delivery states 288 L2TP tunnel basic configuration 124 configuration attributes 218 performance attributes 321 status attributes 284 LAN extension over a Frame Relay network a configura tion example 159 LAN extension over a PDH SDH network a configura tion example 158 LAN extension over an ATM network a configuration ex ample 160 LAN interface alarms 336 configuration attributes 176 performance attributes 304 specifications 364 status attributes 251 LCP what is 70 LED indicators 19 introduction 20 LAN LED 21 line data LED 21 line link LED 21 power LED 21 states 20 line alarms 338 auto speed 57 basic configuration 55 configuration attributes 196 essential attributes 56 fall back speed 57 performance attributes 313 power back off what is 58 retrain criteria 197 selecting a fixed speed 57 selecting a speed range 57 selecting a speed range 57 specifications 362 connector lay out 362 maximum covered dis tance 363 status attributes 272 line pair performance attributes 314 status attributes 275 line speed precautions 14 link monitoring basic configu ration 71 LMI basic configuration 80 what is 74 loader software downloading using TML 359 wh
198. figure shows the front panel LED indicators of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router T LINDUS 1421 SHDSL Router LINE LAH PWR LNK1 LNKe ACT ACT LED states One front panel LED can reflect different status modes by the way it lights up The front panel LEDs can light up as follows LED state LED duty cycle Description continuously off 0 The LED never lights up continuously on The LED lights up continuously blinking The LED is as much lit as it is out flashing The LED only lights up during 20 of the time mostly off The LED occasionally lights up without a fixed duty cycle mostly on The LED occasionally goes out without a fixed duty cycle monitoring The LED lights up irregularly For instance it lights up on detection of a certain signal l e it monitors this signal Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 21 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2 7 2 The power LED PWR The power LED indicates the following continuously off No DC input power is available blinking The self test performed during the boot sequence failed continuously on The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is powered and the boot sequence has been completed successfully 2 7 3 The line link LED LINE LNK1 LNK2 This LED reflects the status of the line continuously off No response on the handshake E g nothing is connected to the line blinking The ha
199. file system 297 Frame Relay 265 general 248 HDLC 271 L2TP tunnel 284 LAN interface 251 line 272 line pair 275 loop back 296 management 296 operating system 299 overview 246 PPP 260 router 276 router general 277 WAN interface 257 WAN interface general 258 structured value what is 36 T target margin what is 198 technical specifications 361 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router what is 4 Time To Live TTL what is 209 TMA connecting over an IP net work 32 connecting through the con trol connector 30 how to connect 29 Index 383 managing the device with 28 what is 29 TMA attribute string reading a 48 TMA sub system picture 341 how to display 341 structure 341 traffic and priority policy introduction 128 traffic and priority policy on routed and bridged data 129 traffic policy configuration attributes 223 configuring an extended ac cess list 135 configuring on the bridge 154 configuring on the router 131 how to configure on the bridge 153 how to configure on the router 130 what is 128 Transparent Spanning Tree bridge what is 139 U unpacking 11 using PAT over PPP with a minimum of official IP ad dresses a configuration ex ample 162 V value what is 36 VCI what is 83 VPI what is 83 384 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Index Annex WwW WAN encapsulation basic configuration 67 WAN interface alarms 337 configuration attributes 179 general configuration at
200. following actions on the configuration e activate configuration e load saved configuration e load default configuration Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 65 User manual Basic configuration 5 6 2 Activating the configuration telindus1421Router Activate Configuration If you execute this action the editable non active configuration becomes the active configuration This action corresponds with the TMA button Send all attributes to device py El When use this action Use this action after you made all the necessary configuration settings and you want to activate these settings 5 6 3 Loading the saved configuration telindus1421Router Load Saved Configuration If you execute this action the non active configuration is overwritten by the active configuration currently used by the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router After executing this action click on the TMA button Retrieve all attributes from device 4 to see the new non active configuration B When use this action If you are in the progress of modifying the non active configuration but made some mistakes then use this action to revert to the active configuration 5 6 4 Loading the default configuration using the action telindus1421Router Load Default Configuration If you execute this action the non active configuration is overwritten by the default configuration After executing this action click on the TMA button Retrieve all attributes from device
201. for the interface element then it is deduced by checking all interfaces including DLCls PVCs and tunnels and finding an interface for which the gateway lies in the subnet defined by the IP address and net mask of that interface Typing the string discard discards all packets for the corresponding destination preference Use this element to set the level of importance of the Default 10 default route with respect to routes learnt via RIP Range 1 200 RIP routes always have a preference of 60 Routes with a lower preference value are chosen over routes with higher preference value metric Use this element to set with how much the metric Default 1 parameter of a route has to be incremented Range 1 15 If two routes exist with the same preference then the route with the lowest metric value is chosen This element is only important when combining static routes and RIP routes Refer to 7 3 3 Explaining the rip structure on page 106 for more information on the metric parameter 202 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes ra telindus1421Router router routingTable Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to configure the static IP routes Refer to 7 2 Configuring static routes on page 96 for more information on static routes The routingTable table contains the following elements eon pee OOO OO
202. formation on bridging e 8 9 6 Explaining the bridging structure on page 150 for a detailed description of the bridging structure 182 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Reference manual Chapter 10 Configuration attributes ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface ppp linkMonitoring Use this attribute to enable or disable link monitoring and to fine tune it Default Range structure see below Refer to 6 2 3 Configuring link monitoring on page 71 for more information on link monitoring The linkMonitoring structure contains the following elements mon Bessie operation Use this element to enable or disable link monitoring Default disabled Range enabled disabled interval Use this element to set the time interval between two consecutive echo requests Default 00000d 00h 00m 10s Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s 24855d 03h 14m 07s replyTimeOut Use this element to set the time the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router waits for a reply on the echo request If no reply has been received within this time out then the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router considers this as a failed echo request Default 00000d 00h 00m 02s Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s 00000d 00h 04m 15s failsPermitted Use this element to set the number of failed echo requests after which the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router declares the WAN link down Example Default 4 Range 1 30 Suppose failsPermitted is set to 10
203. frameRelay diciTable ip on page 266 for a detailed description of the ip structure bridging This displays the bridging information of the PVC Refer to telindus1421Router laninterface bridging on page 254 for a detailed description of the bridging structure This displays the specific ATM related status information of the PVC Refer to telindus1421Router wanInterface atm pvcTable atm on page 270 for a detailed description of the atm structure 270 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes telindus1421Router wanInterface atm pvcTable atm The atm structure in the pvcTable displays the specific ATM related status information of the PVC The atm structure contains the following elements a ee This displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI of the PVC This displays the Virtual Channel Identifier VCI of the PVC The VPI in conjunction with the VCI identifies the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on the way to its destination This displays the PPP information of the PVC For a detailed description of the elements in the ppp structure refer to telindus1421Router wanInterface ppp IcpState on page 260 telindus1421Router wanInterface ppp ipcpState on page 260 telindus1421Router wanInterface ppp bcpState on page 260 telindus1421Router waninterface ppp myAuthenstate on page 264 telindus1421Router waninterface ppp hisAuthens
204. gateway for the cli Defauit 0 0 0 0 ent its subnet Range up to 255 255 255 255 If no gateway is specified then the gateway of the LAN channel is used nameServer Use this element to set the IP address of the name Default 0 0 0 0 server that is available to the client Range up to 255 255 255 255 tftpServer Use this element to set the IP address of the TFTP _ Default 0 0 0 0 server that is available to the client It is the next Range up to 255 255 255 255 server to use in boottrap leaseTime Use this element to set the maximum time a client can Default 00000d 00h 00m 00s lease an IP address from the specified IP address Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s range 24855d 03h 14m 07s If 00000d 00h 00m 00s default is specified then the lease time is infinite holdTime Use this element to set the time between two consec Default 00000d 00h 00m 00s utive leases of an IP address l e if a client has just let go of its dynamically assigned IP address then this Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s 24855d 03h 14m 07s same IP address can not be reassigned before the holdTime has elapsed Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes 213 cM a bootFile Use this element to set the location of the boot file Default lt empty gt Range max 128 characters hostName Use this element to set the name of the client Default lt empty gt Range max 20 characters Because the DHCP se
205. ge 154 Add a priorityPolicy object under the router object and give it a certain index name e g priorityPolicy my_priority_policy Refer to 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 39 Configure the priority policy related parameters Refer to 7 6 5 Configuring a priority pol icy on page 132 Apply the traffic policy to a certain interface Do this by typing the index name of the added trafficPolicy object in the appropriate element Refer to 8 10 3 Applying a bridging traffic policy on a certain interface on page 155 Apply the priority policy to a certain interface Do this by typing the index name of the added priorityPolicy object in the appropriate element Refer to 7 6 7 Applying a priority policy on a certain interface on page 134 154 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 10 2 Configuring a traffic policy on the bridge Refer to 7 6 1 Introducing traffic and priority policy on page 128 for an introduction This section shows you which configuration attributes you can use to configure a traffic policy on the bridge The trafficPolicy object is not present in the containment tree by default If you want to use traffic policy then add this object first Refer to 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 39 You have to specify how the queues are filled when a traffic overload condition occurs Do this using the attribute telindus1421Rout
206. generally consists of all or a portion of a routing table By analysing routing updates from all other routers a router can build a detailed picture of network topology Transporting packets In most cases a host determines that it must send a packet to another host Having acquired a router s address by some means the source host sends a packet addressed specifically to a router s physical i e Media Access Control or MAC address this time with the protocol i e network address of the des tination host As it examines the packet s destination protocol address the router determines that it either knows or does not know how to forward the packet to the next hop If the router does not know how to forward the packet it typically drops the packet If the router knows how to forward the packet however it changes the destination physical address to that of the next hop and transmits the packet The next hop may be the ultimate destination host If not the next hop is usually another router which executes the same switching decision process As the packet moves through the internetwork its phys ical address changes but its protocol address remains constant Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 95 User manual Configuring the router Static versus dynamic routing The following table states the differences between static and dynamic routing Routing algo Description rithm Static routing algorithms are hardly algorithms at all
207. gly all electronic functional and cosmetic aspects of this new unit have been carefully and thoroughly tested and inspected If any fault is found with this unit or should you have any other quality related com ment concerning this delivery please submit the Quality Comment Form on our web page at http www telindusproducts com quality Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Preface v User and reference manual Typographical conventions The following typographical conventions are used in this manual normal text new or emphasised words application windows buttons and fields E g In the File name field enter Computer text you have to enter at the DOS or CLI prompt computer output and code examples E g NOK 1 1 Invalid command Computer Bold text you have to enter at the DOS or CLI prompt when it is part of a mix of com puter input and output E g 01003 Edit Configuration gt get sysName sysName Orchid 1003 LAN 01003 Edit Configuration gt Narrow containment tree objects and attributes of a device when they are mentioned in the normal text l e when they are not a part of computer input or output E g Use the sysName attribute in order to references to other parts in the manual E g Refer to xx Title for more information Blue underline e a hyperlink to a web site E g http www telindus com a reference to another manual E g Refer to the TMA manual for
208. h TFTP on page 346 you have seen how you can get a configura tion file with TFTP The two possible configuration file formats used by TFTP are File type Extension How to create the configuration file Use the TMA export utility and choose the CMS file type This is the most compact format Refer to 15 5 Creating a binary configuration file on page 350 Use the CLI user interface Refer to 15 6 Creating an ASCII configuration file on page 351 When you download an ASCII cli configuration file to the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router make sure that each line in this file contains no more than 500 characters 350 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 15 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 15 5 Creating a binary configuration file To create a configuration file in binary cms format proceed as follows Start a TMA session on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Make changes to its configuration if necessary in order to obtain the desired configura tion You do not have to send these configuration changes to the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Click on the Export data to file button ri In the Export configuration parameters window select the following Choose a directory where to save the file Enter a name for the file Make sure the file type is CMS Make sure the Full configuration option is selected Click on the Save button The edited configuration of the Telindus 1
209. h integrated IP router and bridge offering symmetric full duplex transmission up to 2 3 Mbps over a single two wire unconditioned unshielded twisted pair cable The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router can be used as CPE in combination with ATM Frame Relay or PPP based DSLAMs Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexers and IMAPs Integrated Multi service Access Platforms or in a point to point set up While asymmetric ADSL connections are typically used for residential access the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is the ideal access device for connecting busi ness users offering managed symmetric transmission services at the highest speeds The line speed can be automatically adapted to optimise the throughput as a function of the character istics of the local loop To achieve even higher speeds up to 4 6Mbps or a longer reach a 2 line pairs version is also available The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router supports differentiated services based on VPNs Virtual Private Net works Therefore it integrates features like L2TP Layer 2 Tunnelling Protocol IPSEC 802 1Q VLAN tagging and QoS Quality of Service based on Diffserv A specific model supporting DES and 3DES encryption is also available The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is designed for integration into demanding network environments and can be controlled by a complete set of network maintenance and management tools It supports auto install features over the WAN network This makes it ideally suited fo
210. hapter 12 im Reference manual Performance attributes telindus1421Router router defaultNat tcpAllocs This attribute indicates how many TCP sockets have been allocated since cold boot Together with the performance attributes natUdpAllocs and natlcmpAllocs it gives an indication of the type of traffic that is being routed telindus1421Router router defaultNat udpAllocs This attribute indicates how many UDP sockets have been allocated since cold boot Together with the performance attributes natTcpAllocs and natlcmpAllocs it gives an indication of the type of traffic that is being routed telindus1421Router router defaultNat icmpAllocs This attribute indicates how many ICMP sockets have been allocated since cold boot Together with the performance attributes natTcpAllocs and natUdpAllocs it gives an indication of the type of traffic that is being routed telindus1421Router router defaultNat resetNat Use this action to release all sockets currently in use and return them to the free socket pool In other words executing this action resets all NAT PAT sessions that are currently established It also releases all official IP addresses that are dynamically assigned to a private IP address If any TCP ses sions are still active these sessions will be aborted Take care when using this action All TCP information is lost when the sockets are released with this action Any TCP sessions in use at the time of the reset will go into
211. he future Package contents The box should contain the following items e Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router e TMA CD ROM including this User and Reference manual in PDF format Optionally depending which sales item you ordered e external power supply with power cord 2 meter 12 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2 3 Selecting a site N WARNING gt Always place the unit on its feet without blocking the air vents Do not stack multiple units directly onto each other as stacking can cause heat build up that could dam age the equipment N ACHTUNG gt Stellen Sie das Ger t niemals seitlich sondern nur auf den F en auf und achten Sie darauf da die L ftungsschlitze an der Seitenverkleidung frei bleiben Stapeln Sie nicht mehrere Ger te direkt bereinander dies kann zu einem Hitzestau f hren Install the unit in an area free of extreme temperatures humidity shock and vibration Position it so that you can easily see and access the front panel and its control indicators Leave enough clearance at the back for cables and wires Position the unit within the correct distances for the different accesses and within 2m of a power outlet 9 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 13 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2 4 installation and connection precautions ESD WARNING The circuit boards are sensitive
212. he last error condition reported by LMI Possible values are none protocol error unknown information element sequence error unknown report timer expired invalid report type unsolicited status netTxSeqNum This is the sequence number of the last LMI response frame sent towards the net work netRxSeqNum This is the sequence number of the last LMI command frame received from the network netErrors This is the number of errors on LMI commands issued by the network during the last monitoredEvents period userTxSeqNum This is the sequence number of the last LMI command frame sent towards the router userRxSeqNum This is the sequence number of the last LMI response frame received from the router 268 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes Benet pe O userErrors This is the number of errors on LMI commands issued by the router during the last monitoredEvents period userWaitFullEnquiry This is the number of LMI frames still to be sent before a Full Status Enquiry will be requested userLastReport This displays the type of the most recent report that was sent Possible values are TypeSent full status The last report contained the full status link integrity The last report only contained the link integrity informa tion ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface frameRelay climLastCongestionCause This attribute indicates the last reason
213. he table automatically enables NAT The addresses table contains the following elements ee E officialAddress Use this element to set the official IP address These addresses are used in the reverse order as they appear in the list privateAddress Use this element to set the private IP address i e to permanently assign an official IP address to a private address Refer to 7 4 Configuring address translation on page 112 for more information on NAT ra telindus1421Router router defaultNat gateway Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 Use this attribute to define the gateway addresses from routes on which NAT or PAT should be applied Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 217 Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1421Router router defaultNat tcpSocketTimeOut Default 00001d 00h 00m 00s Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s Use this attribute to define the time out for TCP sessions that are not closed 9 24855d 03h 14m 07s by the application Such sessions whether PAT or NAT is in use remain active for one day by default Only decrease this attribute if some TCP applications do not close properly filling up the available translation sessions telindus1421Router router defaultNat udpSocketTimeOut Default 00000d 00h 03m 00s Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s Use this attribute to define the time out for UDP sessions that are not closed 24855d 03h 14m 07s by the applicati
214. he tunnel is already open Once an indication is received that the tunnel has was opened session control messages may be exchanged The first of these is the Incoming Call Request waitReply This is the state where an Incoming or Outgoing Call Reply message is awaited If an Incoming or Outgoing Call Reply message is received an incoming or Outgoing Call Connected message is sent and the session moves to the established state waitConnect This is the state where an Incoming or Outgoing Call Connected message is awaited If an Incoming or Outgoing Call Connected message is received the call was successful and the session moves to the established state established Data is exchanged over the tunnel The session is terminated when receiving or sending a Call Disconnect Notify mes sage The session then returns to the idle state 288 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes L2TP status delivery states The states associated with the packet delivery are operating The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router has sent a packet but has not received an acknowledgement on this packet yet idle All transmitted packets have been acknowledged Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 289 Reference manual Status attributes L2TP status authentication states The states associated with the LNS or LAC authentication are noAuthentication Authentication is not enabled This is also the start up
215. hows an example of bridging STEN PC1 aT PC2 network 1 network 2 Data coming from network 1 will only be let through by the bridge if this data has a destination outside network 1 or if it has a broadcast or multicast address This means the bridge filters the data and decreases the amount of data traffic on the separated LAN segments Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 139 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 2 The self learning and Transparent Spanning Tree bridge The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router features two bridging mechanisms e self learning bridging e self learning bridging in conjunction with the Transparent Spanning Tree TST algorithm or briefly Spanning Tree bridging self learning The bridge learns which data it has to forward to the other LAN segment and which data it has to block l e it builds its own bridging table In other words you do not have to configure a bridging table with MAC addresses of stations that are located on the separated LAN segments but that have to be able to communicate with each other self learning TST This is based on the self learning principle but a protocol is used to implement the TST algorithm Bridging loops The primary goal of this algorithm is to avoid that bridging loops arise A bridg ing loop occurs when two self learning bridges are placed in parallel This results in data that keeps circling around as each bridge forwards the same data The
216. ibutes on page 257 e 11 5 Line status attributes on page 272 e 11 6 Router status attributes on page 276 e 11 7 Bridge status attributes on page 290 e 11 8 Management status attributes on page 296 e 11 9 File system status attributes on page 297 e 11 10 Operating system status attributes on page 299 246 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Reference manual 11 1 Status attribute overview Chapter 11 Status attributes gt telindus1421Router sysDescr sysObjectID sysUpTime sysServices flash1Version flash2Version activeFlash flashVersions bootVersion loaderVersion messages deviceld configurationSaving gt gt gt ppp ip IcpState ipcpState bepState IcpMyOptions IcpHisOptions ipcpMyOptions ipcpHisOptions bcpMyOptions bcpHisOptions myAuthenState hisAuthenState bridging gt gt laninterface ifDescr ifType ifOperStatus ifLastChange ifSpeed ifMtu ip macAddress arpCache bridging adapter ipAdEntBcastAddr ipAdEntReasmMaxSize Action clearArpCache gt gt gt frameRelay ip diciTable Imi cllmLastCongestionCause gt gt gt atm atmSync pvcTable gt gt waninterface ifDescr ifType ifOperStatus ifLastChange ifSpeed ifMtu gt gt gt line ifDescr ifType ifOperStatus ifSpeed region maxSpeedSearch maxSpeedResult linePairsSwapped Action maximumSpeedSearch gt gt gt gt linePair ifSpeed ifOperStatus timeSinceLastRetrain status lineAttenuation signalN
217. ic one is taken in consideration l e the entry covering the smallest range If not one entry matches then the packet is dropped If the access list is empty then all packets are forwarded The accessList table contains the following elements Fe rr sourceAddress Use this element to set the IP source address of the packet The address may be a sub network address Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 mask Use this element to set the IP subnet mask for the sourceAddress By combining an IP address with a mask you can uniquely identify a range of addresses Default 255 255 255 255 Range up to 255 255 255 255 action Use this element to set the action when a packet arrives with a source IP address that falls within the specified address range The possible actions are Default deny Range enumerated see below The packet is dropped The packet is forwarded a If you specify one entry or multiple entries for which the action is set to deny then also specify at least one entry for which the action is set to allow Else all packets are dropped Example 1 accessList This example shows an access list that only allows traffic from subnet 192 168 48 0 except for packets sourceAddress mask action _ b 1 192 168 48 0 from station 192 168 48 10 rom station 19 b 2 192 168 48 10 Example 2 255 255 255 0 allow 255 255 255 255 deny accessList
218. icesAvailable Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to define specific port number ranges for incoming Internet i traffic that should not be translated Instead it is sent to the corresponding private IP address The servicesAvailable table makes it possible to have a server on the local network that can be accessed from the Internet although it has no official IP address The servicesAvailable table contains the following elements C protocol Use this element to select the protocol tcp or udp Default tcp Range tcp udp startPort Use this element to set the lowest value of the TCP or Defauit 0 UDP port range Range 0 65535 endPort Use this element to set the highest value of the TCP Default lt opt gt or UDP port range Range 0 65535 If no endPort value is defined lt opt gt then the port range is limited to the startPort value only serverAddress Use this element to set the private server address Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 If a packet is received with a source port number that falls within the specified port range then it is sent to the private server address ra telindus1421Router router defaultNat addresses Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to enter all the official IP addresses that have to be used for Network Address Translation Entering an address in t
219. ide eieedeimer en wetacdiecunead tes 238 10 9 Management configuration attributes 0 eee eee eee eeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaas 240 11 Stet SARE TOU OS coos oes oe a orc ee ee cee ee a ce 245 11 1 Status attribute overview oie ise ie lite ak cece eae eaeccen ata wht eased 246 11 2 General status attributes ace iccees aecthdnctiet civnset vate evedlceedgonan ant wedaadinccaennsanie 248 11 3 LAN interface status attributes lt j 2uc5 os ced teeters oe ahndee nee vee ented sadonadgueid cere iaaes 251 11 4 WAN interface status attributes eect cece eee eeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 257 11 5 LIMG Status SUD UL Sas occas ates erect eel aaa San ieee Bnei Noel eee has 272 T1 6 Router status attributes i a 3 o Cures Seca rig Gast Need avant eiei Me eget data seae 276 11 7 Bridge status attributes iisesadescecuseevepedieseceade taeda senecdsiatendieaede cds nonin dlsecdneesctea ads 290 11 8 Management status attributes iacciscritee sca rtietadacetie ewig tet Shad eae a eae Sed 296 11 9 File system status attributes cccceeeeeeeeeseeeeee cece eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeseseesneeeeeeeeeeeiees 297 11 10 Operating system status attributes cece eceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee e eee eeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeneneoes 299 12 Performance attributes iciecac5 osc ceccscec cesencs sdcaccceedeveredacacechsacacecce date cepecustcngvessieies 301 12 1 Performance attributes OVErViOW ccccccceesseeenceceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseseneneeeeee
220. ieve this erroneous configuration before executing the Activate Configuration com mand In that case you do not have to reconfigure the complete device again but you only have to correct the error in question Retrieve the erro neous configuration by executing the Load Saved Configuration command Again disconnect the power supply and open the housing Reset DIP switch bank DS1 position 2 to on Properly replace the cover as described in 3 3 Opening and closing the housing on page 26 and reconnect the power supply Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 6 67 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols This chapter introduces the WAN encapsulation protocols and lists the attributes you can use to config ure the encapsulation protocols The following gives an overview of this chapter e 6 1 Selecting a WAN encapsulation protocol on page 68 6 2 Configuring PPP encapsulation on page 69 e 6 3 Configuring Frame Relay encapsulation on page 73 e 6 4 Configuring ATM encapsulation on page 82 e 6 5 Configuring HDLC encapsulation on page 91 q Refer to the Reference manual on page 167 for a complete overview of the attributes of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 68 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 6 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 1 Selecting a WAN encapsulation protocol First select the encapsulation protocol you want to
221. ific one is taken in consideration l e the entry covering the smallest range The extended access list itself is activated by specifying the trafficPolicy object its index name ina trafficPolicy attribute of a certain interface For example in the ip structure of the _lanlinterface object pvcTable etcetera The trafficShaping table contains the following elements Fa E N sourcelpStart Use these elements to set the IP source address as Address specified in the IP header Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 sourcelpEnd Packets that fall within the specified range are forwarded and queued if applicable Address destinationlpStart Use these elements to set the IP destination address Address as specified in the IP header Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 destinationlpEnd Packets that fall within the specified range are forwarded and queued if applicable Address tosStartValue Use these elements to set the Type Of Service field value tosEndtValue Packets that fall within the specified range are forwarded and queued if applicable Default any start optional end Range 0 256 ipProtocol Use this element to set the protocol field from the IP header Default any Range 0 255 Packets that have the specified protocol field are forwarded and queued if applica ble You can specify the protocol by typing the
222. ig Bridge B ure l An alternate path has been estab Ee Ibridge B lished by connecting Bridge B in par Bridge C l allel with Bridges A and C This also i creates a potential bridge loop How segment 3 ever by using the Spanning Tree Algorithm Bridge B breaks the loop and blocks its path to segment 3 segment 2 Bridge failure Bridges connected in a LAN must segment 1 also detect bridge failure They must then establish an alternative path Should the root bridge fail also a new root bridge must be selected Padar A dropout eS A bridge failure is illustrated in the fol rn segment 2 Bridge B lowing figure Bridge C activated by If Bridge A fails the Spanning Tree bridge B Algorithm must be capable of activat ing an alternative path such as Bridge B segment 3 Network extension Bridges connected in a LAN must segment 1 also detect topology changes They must adapt to these changes A topology change is illustrated in the Bridge A following figure lt dropout segment 2 Bridge B l l blocked by I bridge B l If the network is extended by adding Bridge D the Spanning Tree Algo rithm must be capable of adapting automatically to the new topology This means that Bridge B stops loop ing by blocking the path to segment 3 segment 3 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 145 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 8 The Spanning Tree priority and cost Con
223. ing three components A method for encapsulating datagrams over serial links e An extensible Link Control Protocol LCP which provides a method of establishing configuring maintaining and terminating the point to point connection e A family of Network Control Protocols NCPs for establishing and configuring different network layer protocols such as the IP Control Protocol IPCP or the Bridge Control Protocol BCP What is CHAP The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router also features the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP This is a standardised authentication protocol in compliance with RFC1994 over PPP links The password is hashed before sending it over the link The used hashing algorithm is MD5 CHAP authentication over a link can be performed in one direction or in both directions The PPP handshake PPP makes a handshake in two phases a The Link Control Protocol LCP builds the link layer The IP Control Protocol IPCP prepares the exchange of IP packets Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 6 71 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 2 2 Configuring an IP address on the PPP WAN When you use PPP encapsulation on the WAN interface you can configure the IP related parameters using the ip structure in the ppp object Refer to 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure on page 52 for a detailed description of the ip structure 6 2 3 Configuring link monitoring Refer to 6 2 1 Intro
224. ion unreachable Port unreachable message to the originator of the packet With the sendPortUnreachable attribute you can define whether you want the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router to send such an ICMP message or not The sendPortUnreachable attribute has the following values enabled The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router sends ICMP port unreachable messages disabled The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router does not send ICMP port unreachable mes sages This also implies that the router is not recognised by the UNIX or Windows trace route feature kal telindus1421Router router sendAdminUnreachable Default enabled Range enabled disabled Use this attribute to enable or disable the sending of ICMP Destination unreachable Communication with destination is administratively prohibited messages The ICMP message communication prohibited If the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router receives an IP packet that is destined for a prohibited destination because this destination is defined in an access list then it sends an ICMP Destination unreachable Communication with destination is administratively prohibited message to the originator of the packet With this attribute you can define whether you want the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router to send such an ICMP message or not The sendAdminUnreachable attribute has the following values enabled The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router sends ICMP communication prohibited mes sages
225. is selected as the root bridge If all bridges are configured with the default priority 32768 the bridge with the lowest MAC address becomes the root bridge The selection of a designated bridge for every bridged LAN segment The removal of loops in the bridged network by blocking bridge ports connected to redun dant links Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 141 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 4 The Spanning Tree topology The cost factor is used to calculate the distance from each port of a bridge to the root bridge On the basis of this each port on a bridge is assigned one of the following states T T E root port The port that is closest to the root bridge Only one port on each bridge is assigned as the root port designated port The port that connects to bridges further away from the root bridge The root bridge only has designated ports blocking If a port is not assigned a root port or a designated port state they are assigned a blocking state Frames with the exception of Configuration BPDUs are not accepted or transmitted by the port when it is in the blocking state The port can be said to be in stand by An elementary example of a Spanning Tree topology is given in the figure below segment 1 DP segment 2 BP Bridge B l RP l l l l DP Bridge C I segment 3 RP Root Port DP Designated Port BP Blocking Port 142 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Cha
226. is expressed in bps Any value between 0 and 2048000 bps can be con figured If the eir value is set to 0 default it means no excess burst is allowed The bursts of data that are allowed are the CIR value EIR value l e If you want a CIR of 1 Mbps and you want to allow bursts up to 1 5 Mbps then set the CIR to 1024000 bps and the EIR to 512000 bps Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Reference manual Chapter 10 187 Configuration attributes telindus1421Router wanInterface frameRelay Imi Use this attribute to select the Local Management Interface LMI protocol and to fine tune the LMI operation Refer to 6 3 4 Configuring LMI on page 80 for more information on LMI The Imi structure contains the following elements Default Range structure see below C mode Use this element to set the Frame Relay mode The mode element has the following values Default auto Range enumerated see below No LMI is used The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is defined as Frame Relay user l e Frame Relay access device or DTE network The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is defined as Frame Relay network l e Frame Relay node or DCE auto When you have two Telindus 1421 SHDSL Routers in your network and they are both set to auto they mutually decide who will be user or network type Use this element to set the LMI variant There are sev eral standards for the LMI protocol with small varia
227. is the name as you configured it Note that the interface can also be a DLCI an ATM PVC a tunnel etc discard Packets for this destination are discarded encapsulation This is the used encapsulation It is related to the interface for this route Possible values are none The IP packets are not encapsulated ethernet The IP packets are encapsulated with the ARPA MAC header frameRelay The IP packets are encapsulated in Frame Relay RFC1490 ppp The IP packets are encapsulated in PPP The IP packets are encapsulated in ATM status This is the route status Possible values are up The route can be used down The route is currently not in use discard Packets for this destination are discarded 278 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes Bement ossempion OO preference This displays the route preference If more than one route matches the IP destina tion address this attribute determines which route is used The route with the low est preference value will be used This is the type of the route Possible values are This is a host route i e a route to a single IP address instead of a complete network This is also used for the router its own IP address internal A route with this status is irrelevant local This route is for directly connected networks rip This route has been received by a RIP update This
228. it positive transmit negative UL T ge 8 receive positive not used not used receive negative not used not used Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 17 365 Reference manual Technical specifications 17 3 Control connector specifications The control connector sometimes also called NMS port is a 9 pins subD connector labelled CTRL The signals on these connector are V 24 V 28 signals The control connector has the following pin layout not used Receive Data Transmit Data not used GND not used not used not used o N MO aj A WwW N not used 366 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 17 Reference manual Technical specifications 17 4 ATM encapsulation specifications e ATM cell format ITU T 1 361 e ATM forum UNI 3 1 4 0 PVCs e ATM forum ILMI 3 1 4 0 e OAM F5 loopback support ITU T 1 610 e Supports up to 8 ATM PVCs e Supports ATM Forum Traffic Management 4 0 service types CBR and UBR ATM AAL5 encapsulation RFC1483 RFC2684 PPPoA RFC2364 PPPoE RFC2516 17 5 Frame Relay encapsulation specifications e Encapsulation compliant with RFC1490 RFC2427 Support of multiple DLCI s PVC e CIR Committed Information Rate configurable per DLCI e Support of Reverse ARP over Frame Relay for automatic gateway configuration EIR Excess Information Rate configurable per DLCI e Suppo
229. itations 119 limitations workaround 120 what is 113 when use 114 why use 113 PAT and NAT combining 123 PCR basic configuration 87 performance attributes 301 ATM 312 bridge 322 bridge access list 324 bridge group 323 default NAT 319 Frame Relay 309 L2TP tunnel 321 LAN interface 304 line 313 line pair 314 management 325 operating system 327 overview 302 router 316 router general 317 WAN interface 307 WAN interface general 308 policies on the bridge basic configuration 152 policies on the router basic configuration 127 power requirements 368 PPP authentication basic config uration 72 basic configuration 69 configuration attributes 181 handshake 70 introducing 70 specifications 366 status attributes 260 what is 70 priority policy applying on an interface 134 configuration attributes 228 configuring 132 how to configure on the bridge 153 how to configure on the router 130 what is 128 priority queuing what is 128 private IP address range 113 product information 375 PVC basic configuration 86 R reading a DIP switch table 47 TMA attribute string 48 reading DIP switch tables and TMA attribute strings 46 rear view of the device 16 referring to an added object example 43 how to 43 what is 43 relative and absolute address ing 240 releasing IP addresses DHCP versus BootP 213 remarks on bridging traffic policy on the LAN interface 155 CIR 81 dhcpStatistics
230. itted over the line l e the line is idle The idleCellFormat element has the following values itu Sets the cells according to the ITU T format In this case they are effectively called idle cells atmForum Sets the cells according to the ATM forum format In this case they are actually called unassigned cells Some devices use the ITU T format others the ATM forum format Should the per formance attribute telindus1421Router wanInterface atm unknownCells increase rapidly then try selecting a different format However the default value suffices in most cases scrambling Use this element to enable or disable scrambling Default enabled Range enabled disabled Scrambling is designed to randomise the pattern of 1s and Os carried in ATM cells or the physical layer frame Randomising the digital bits can prevent continuous non variable bit patterns in other words long strings of all 1s or all Os Several physical layer protocols rely on transitions between 1s and Os to maintain clocking Use this element to enable or disable coset Default enabled Range enabled disabled Coset is an ATM parameter which indicates when to calculate the header error correction bit if it is to be OR ed with another value or not known as the COSET Polynomial Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 195 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 4 5 HDLC configuration attributes
231. lAlarmLevel attribute is also communicated to the central management system e g HP OpenView where it determines the colour of the icon This colour is an indication of the severity of the alarm ra telindus1421Router alarmInfo This attribute contains the actual alarm information of the corresponding object The alarminfo structure contains the following elements Element This element displays for the corresponding object discriminator the total alarm count since the last cold boot currentAlarms the current alarms previousAlarms the second most recent alarms alarmMask the alarmMask as you configured it alarmLevel the alarmLevel as you configured it Reference manual 334 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 13 3 General alarms Chapter 13 Alarm attributes Refer to 13 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 331 for general information on the alarm attributes telindus1421Router alarminfo The different alarms related to the telindus1421Router object together with their explanation and default alarmMask and alarmLevel value are given in the following table The alarm notResponding is generated by the management concentrator when the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router does not respond on its polling ses sion Default value alarmMask enabled alarmLevel alarmSyncLoss when the internal alarm buffer overflows enabled configChanged when the local
232. lindus 1421 SHDSL Router Reference manual 13 1 Alarm attributes overview gt telindus1421Router totalAlarmLevel alarmIinfo notResponding alarmSyncLoss configChanged access unknownStatus coldBoot warmBoot codeConsistencyFail configConsistencyFail gt gt lanInterface alarminfo linkDown gt gt wanlnterface alarminfo linkDown gt gt gt line alarminfo linkDown gt gt gt gt linePair alarminfo linkDown gt gt router alarminfo pingActive 1 In case of a 2 pair version two objects are present linePair 1 and linePair 2 Chapter 13 Alarm attributes Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 13 331 Reference manual Alarm attributes 13 2 Introducing the alarm attributes Before discussing the alarm attributes of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router in detail some general infor mation on the alarm attributes of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is given The following gives an overview of this chapter e 13 2 1 Configuration alarm attributes on page 332 e 13 2 2 General alarm attributes on page 333 332 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 13 Reference manual Alarm attributes 13 2 1 Configuration alarm attributes telindus1421Router alarmMask Use this attribute to enable unmasked or disable masked for each alarm of the corresponding object whether it is communicated to the central management system e g HP OpenView or not Alarms are always seen in
233. lindus1421Router router priorityPolicy algorithm attribute is set to weightedFairQueueing Example Suppose queue 1 has weight 2 queue 2 has weight 1 and both queues contain data In that case the queues are emptied in the following order queue 1 queue 1 queue 2 queue 1 queue 1 queue 2 gt etc kal telindus1421Router router priorityPolicy lowdelayQuotum Default 1500 Range 1 25000 Use this attribute to set the number of bytes packets that is dequeued from the low delay queue when the queue is addressed The unit of the quotum bytes or packets can be set with the telindus1421Router router priorityPolicy countingPolicy attribute Refer to 7 6 1 Introducing traffic and priority policy on page 128 for more information on queues Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 231 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 7 Bridge configuration attributes This section discusses the configuration attributes concerned with bridging First it describes the general bridging configuration attributes Then it explains the configuration attributes of the extra features as there are access listing user priority mapping etc The following gives an overview of this section e 10 7 1 Bridge group configuration attributes on page 232 e 10 7 2 Bridge access list configuration attributes on page 236 e 10 7 3 Bridge traffic policy configuration attributes on page 237 232 Telindu
234. llow bursts up to 2 Mbps Obviously this means that if on both DLCls a burst up to 2 Mbps occurs at the same time the speed of the physical connection 2 Mbps is exceeded and some data is discarded In that case the principle of first come first served is applied l e the DLCI on which the burst occurred first its data is passed on to the Frame Relay network If however somewhere else on the network a congestion occurs it is still possible that some of the excess data is discarded Suppose you assign to both DLCls a CIR of 2 Mbps and an EIR of 0 gt In that case you over dimensioned your CIR You can not guarantee 2 Mbps of bandwidth for both DLCls due to the bandwidth limit of 2 Mbps on the physical connection Also in this case the prin ciple of first come first served is applied l e the DLCI which sends data first gets its data onto the Frame Relay network Chapter 6 81 82 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 6 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 4 Configuring ATM encapsulation This section introduces the ATM encapsulation protocol and gives a short description of the attributes you can use to configure this encapsulation protocol The following gives an overview of this section 6 4 1 Introducing ATM on page 83 e 6 4 2 Configuring IP addresses on the ATM WAN on page 85 e 6 4 3 Configuring the PVCs on page 86 e 6 4 4 Configuring the PCR on page 87 e 6 4 5 Configuring multi prot
235. loopback ifDescr This attribute displays the interface description This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter telindus1421Router management loopback ifType This attribute displays the interface type This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter telindus1421Router management loopback ifOperStatus This attribute displays the current operational status of the loop back interface This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter telindus1421Router management loopback ifMtu This attribute displays the interface its Maximum Transfer Unit i e the maximum number of bytes that one packet can contain on this interface This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter telindus1421Router management loopback ipAddress This attribute displays the IP address of the loop back interface as you configured it Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 297 Reference manual Status attributes 11 9 File system status attributes ra telindus1421Router fileSystem fileList Part of the flash memory of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is organised as a file system and a number of files are stored in it The fileList attribute shows all the files that are present on the file system Usually the following files are present e The configuration file of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router file config1 db e Up to two application software files of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router files CONTROL1 and CON TROL 2 The fileList table contains the following elements ES peen O O This is the file nam
236. m 01s messages 00000d 00h 00m 10s Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Reference manual Chapter 10 Configuration attributes a bridgeForwardDelay Use this element to set e the delay a bridge port applies to move from listen ing state to learning state or from learning state to Default 00000d 00h 00m 15s Range 00000d 00h 00m 04s 00000d 00h 00m 30s forwarding state Refer to 8 5 The Spanning Tree bridge port states on page 142 for more information on the possible states of a bridge port the time out or ageing for purging MAC addresses from the bridge cache in case a topology change is detected kal telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup vian Use this attribute to configure some VLAN parameters Default Range structure see below Although the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router bridges IEEE 802 1Q tagged frames when connected to a VLAN aware switch the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router itself can only be managed via IP if some VLAN parameters are configured The vian structure contains the following elements mm pen OOO dotQTagging Use this element to enable or disable e the 802 1Q tagging of Ethernet frames sent by the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Default disabled Range enabled disabled the recognition of 802 1Q tagged frames received by the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Use this element to set the ID of the VLAN over which the Telindus 1
237. m routes on which NAT or PAT should be applied Refer to telindus1421Router router defaultNat gateway on page 216 Important remark using NAT on the LAN interface Consider the following configuration e telindus1421Router laninterface ip address 172 31 74 1 e telindus1421Router router defaultNat addresses officialAddress 172 31 74 1 privateAddress lt opt gt e telindus1421Router waninterface ppp ip address 2 2 2 2 The above means that NAT is used on the LAN interface and the router uses the address 172 31 74 1 as Official IP address The problem that arises here is that the router can no longer be managed via the LAN interface using the management tool TMA Telnet etc This because the NAT route has priority over the LAN route and because it is a NAT address the router does not accept incoming traffic on the address 172 31 74 1 The solution is to add the WAN IP address to the addresses table as private address telindus1421Router router addresses officialAddress 172 31 74 1 privateAddress 2 2 2 2 In that case the management tool service runs on the WAN IP address This means however that the WAN has to be up 122 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 4 8 How does the NAT address table work If a local station sends data to the Internet for the first time NAT looks for an unused official IP address It assigns this official IP address to the loc
238. mance table H telindus1421Router wanlnterface line linePair 1 d7LineParameters This attribute displays the 7 days line parameter summary The d7LineParameters table contains the same elements as the telindus1421Router wanlnterface line linePair 1 h2LineParameters table ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface line linePair 1 d7Performance This attribute displays the 7 days performance summary of the line The d7Performance table contains the same elements as the telindus1421Router wanlnterface line linePair 1 h2Performance table ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface line linePair 1 lineParameters This attribute displays the line parameter summary since the last cold boot Except for the sysUpTime the lineParameters table contains the same elements as the telindus1421Router wanInterface line linePair 1 h2LineParameters table ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface line linePair 1 performance This attribute displays the performance summary of the line since the last cold boot Except for the sysUp Time the performance table contains the same elements as the telindus1421Router wanlnterface line linePair 1 h2Performance table 316 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 12 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 5 Router performance attributes This section discusses the performance attributes concerned with routing First it describes the general routing performance attributes Then it explains the performance attributes of
239. me Service netbios dgm UDP NETBIOS Datagram Service netbios ssn UDP NETBIOS Session Service snmp UDP SNMP snmptrap UDP SNMPTRAP telindus UDP Telindus Protocol used by TMA 374 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Annex A Annex common TCP and UDP numbers Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Annex Annex B product information Annex B 375 product information The following table displays the product information of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Product name Description 177446 TELINDUS 1421 SHDSL ROUTER 230VAC IP router and bridge with a 10 100Mbit s Ethernet interface and a 1 pair SHDSL line interface ATM Frame Relay and PPP WAN encapsulation Includes European AC power adapter 177450 TELINDUS 1421 SHDSL ROUTER NPWR IP router and bridge with a 10 100Mbit s Ethernet interface and a 1 pair SHDSL line interface ATM Frame Relay and PPP WAN encapsulation Delivered without power adapter 177452 TELINDUS 1421 SHDSL ROUTER 2P 230VAC IP router and bridge with a 10 100Mbit s Ethernet interface and a 2 pair SHDSL line interface ATM Frame Relay and PPP WAN encapsulation Includes European AC power adapter 177454 TELINDUS 1421 SHDSL ROUTER 2P NPWR IP router and bridge with a 10 100Mbit s Ethernet interface and a 2 pair SHDSL line interface ATM Frame Relay and PPP WAN encapsulation Delivered without power adapter 177483 USER AND REFER
240. me synchro When the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router cannot synchronise on the nisation SHDSL framing it retrains signal to noise margin too When the S N margin becomes too low during a certain period of time low the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router retrains When start a retrain The retrain structure contains the following elements Beene Beseipio O OO OOOO errorPersistence Use this element to set the period in seconds during Default 10 Time which each criterion is measured If within this period Range 1 30 the predefined criterion value is equalled or exceeded the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router retrains errorThreshold Use this element to set the CRC errors in promille at Default 10 which the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router should Range 1 1000 retrain 198 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes kal telindus1421Router wanInterface line startupMargin Default 2dB Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to set the target margin in function of which a line speed has to be selected during the ITU T G 994 1 auto speed negotiation The startupMargin attribute is only relevant in case on both the central and remote Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router or any other compatible SHDSL device a speed range is selected In other words the startup Margin attribute has no function in case a fixed speed is selected i e minSpeed 2P maxS
241. ment to set the new TOS field value Default unchanged Range 0 256 that matches an entry in the trafficShaping table its TOS field value is changed Selecting unchanged leaves the TOS field value as it is When you select a new TOS field value then a packet priority Use this element to set the destination queue for a Default Queue1 packet matching an entry in the trafficShaping table Range enumerated see below In case an overload condition occurs then a packet that matches an entry in the trafficShaping table is sent to the specified queue The priority element has the following values Queue1 Queue2 Queue3 Queue4 Queue5 lowDelayQueue Start and end values Except for the ipProtocol newTosValue and priority elements it is possible to specify ranges using the start and end values There are two special cases e A start value is entered but no end value gt an exact match is needed for the start value e Neither a start nor an end value is entered gt the field is not checked 226 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Reference manual Chapter 10 Configuration attributes kal telindus1421Router router trafficPolicy dropLevels Use this attribute to define for each user configurable queue how many packets may be queued before they are dropped The dropLevels table contains the following elements Default Range table see below omn pe O maxLength1 This is the m
242. ments a a interface This is the interface through which the station can be reached macAddress This is the MAC address of the station situated on the network connected to the interface type This displays whether the MAC address entry is static or dynamic dynamic The corresponding MAC address is learned on one of the interfaces static There are only two static entries e the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router its own MAC address e a MAC address used for Spanning Tree This is the elapsed time since a frame was received from the station Example The following figure shows part of a bridge cache table as an example bridgeCache interface macAddress b 1 Bridge Protocol Entity 01 80 c2 00 00 00 static 00000d 00h 00m 00s gt 2 Bridge Protocol Entity O0 c0 89 00 fe 20 static 00000d 00h 00m 00s b3 lan 00 c0 89 00 d4 56 dynamic OO000d 00h 00m 01s b4 lan 00 c0 89 00 70 98 dynamic OO000d 00h 00m 09s b5 lan 00 c0 89 00 6b 9 dynamic OO000d 00h 00m 16s gt 6 lan 00 c0 89 01 26 86 dynamic O0000d 00h 00m 05s b7 lan 00 10 b5 ec 36 24 dynamic OO000d 00h 00m 00s gt 8 lan 00 a0 24 42 97 6c dynamic OO000d 00h 01m 25s b9 lan 00 c0 89 00 d4 53 dynamic OO0000d 00h 01m 53s gt 10 lan 00 60 8c 95 bb fe dynamic OO000d 00h 00m 00s gt 11 lan 00 10 4b 47 38 fa dynamic OO000d 00h 00m 15s gt 12 lan 00 c0 89 00 d4 c2 dynamic OO000d 00h 01m 40s Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 293 Reference manual Status attribu
243. messages are exchanged and the operational status of the tunnel becomes up ifLastChange This is the system up time on the moment the tunnel entered its current opera tional state l e the moment the value of the ifOperStatus status element changes from up to down or vice versa the system up time value is written into the ifLastChange status element This displays the IP information of the tunnel Refer to telindus1421Router wanInterface frameRelay diciTable ip on page 266 for a detailed description of the ip structure bridging This displays the bridging information of the tunnel Refer to telindus1421Router laninterface bridging on page 254 for a detailed description of the bridging structure This displays the specific L2TP related status information of the tunnel Refer to the telindus1421Router router tunnels I2tpTunnels I2tp on page 285 for a detailed description of the l2tp structure This displays the PPP information of the tunnel For a detailed description of the elements in the ppp structure refer to telindus1421Router wanInterface ppp icpState on page 260 telindus1421Router wanInterface ppp ipcpState on page 260 telindus1421Router wanInterface ppp bcpState on page 260 telindus1421Router wanInterface ppp myAuthenstate on page 264 telindus1421Router waninterface ppp hisAuthenstate on page 264 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 285 Reference manual Status attributes telindus1421Router
244. mitting bridge believes to be the root bridge The cost of the path to the root from the transmitting port The unique port identifier of the transmitting port When a bridge transmits a BPDU frame all bridges connected to the LAN on which the frame is trans mitted receive the BPDU When a bridge receives a BPDU it does not forward the frame Instead it uses the information in the frame to e calculate a BPDU e initiate a BPDU transmission if the topology changes The propagation of Configuration BDPUs When a bridged network is in a stable condition switches continue to send Configuration BPDUs to its neighbouring bridges at regular intervals Configuration BPDUs are transmitted down the spanning tree from designated ports to root ports If a Configuration BPDU is not received by the root port of a bridge within a predefined time interval for example because a bridge along the path has dropped out the port enters the listening state to re determine a stable path 144 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 7 The Spanning Tree behaviour The following are some examples of how Spanning Tree behaves when certain events occur in your net work Bridging loops Bridges connected in a LAN must detect potential bridge loops They must then remove these loops by blocking the appropriate ports to other bridges Bridge A segment 1 This is illustrated in the following f
245. n IP address with a mask you can uniquely iden Range up to 255 255 255 255 tify a range of addresses Example fiter This example shows a filter that only forwards RIP updates coming from subnet 192 168 48 0 network mask b 1 192 168 48 0 255 255 255 0 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 223 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 6 5 Traffic policy configuration attributes The trafficPolicy object is not present in the containment tree by default If you want to use traffic policy then add this object first Refer to 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 39 telindus1421Router router trafficPolicy method Default trafficShaping Use this attribute to choose on traffic overload conditions how and which Range enumerated see below queues are filled with the excess data The method attribute has the following values trafficShaping The data is redirected to the queues based on the settings of the attribute telindus1421Router router trafficPolicy trafficShaping Note that the traffic shaping can be used for more than queuing alone It can also be used to set up an extended access list tos DiffServ The data is redirected to the queues based on DiffServ refer to RFC2597 regard ing class and drop precedence This means that depending on their Type Of Service TOS field some packets are moved to other queues and or dropped sooner than o
246. n adding objects priority Use this element to set the port priority of the inter Defayit 128 face Range 0 255 Each port of a bridge has a unique port identifier The priority element is a part of this port identifier and allows you to change the priority of the port It is taken as the more significant part in priority comparisons The other part of the unique port identifier has a fixed relationship to the physical or logical port This assures the uniqueness of the unique port identifier among the ports of a single bridge Refer to 8 8 The Spanning Tree priority and cost on page 145 for more informa tion on port priority pathCost Use this element to set the path cost of the interface Defayit 100 The path cost is the value that is added to the total Range 1 65535 cost of the path to the root bridge provided that this particular port is a root port l e that the path to the root goes through this port Refer to 8 8 The Spanning Tree priority and cost on page 145 for more informa tion on port priority topologyChange Detection Use this element to enable or disable the communica Default enabled tion of Spanning Tree topology changes to the root Range enabled disabled bridge 152 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 10 Configuring traffic and priority policy on the bridge This section introduces traffic and p
247. n an administrative name to Default lt empty gt the PVC Range 0 24 characters adminStatus Use this element to activate up or deactivate down Default up the PVC Range up down mode Use this element to determine whether for the corre Default routing sponding PVC the packets are treated by the routing Range enumerated see below process the bridging process or both The mode element has the following values bridging All packets received on the PVC are bridged routing All packets received on the PVC are routed routingAndBridging The SNAP header is checked to determine whether the packets have to be bridged or routed priorityPolicy Use this element to set a priority policy per PVC Default lt empty gt Refer to telindus1421Router wanInterface priorityPolicy on _ Range 0 24 characters page 180 for more information ip Use this element to configure the IP related parame Defauit ters of the PVC Range structure see below Refer to 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure on page 52 for a detailed description of the ip structure 190 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes Benet Besson O OO ridging se this element to configure the bridging relate bridgi Use this el tt fi the bridgi lated Default parameters of the PVC Range structure see below Refer to e 8 Configuring the bridge o
248. n attributes 229 absolutePriority This is a priority queuing mechanism In this case queues with a high priority have absolute priority over queues with a low priority In other words no lower priority queue is emptied as long as a higher priority queue contains data The priority of the queues runs parallel to the queue number l e the user config urable queue number 1 has the lowest priority whereas the system queue number 7 has the highest priority ew po 1 5 user config Queue 1 has the lowest priority whereas queue 5 has urable queue the highest priority A lower priority queue is only emptied in case no higher priority queue contains data 6 low delay queue This queue is only emptied in case the system queue contains no data 7 system queue This queue has priority over all other queues As soon as it contains data it is emptied Note that there is a risk of starvation This means that it is possible that the lower priority queues are never emptied because a higher priority queue continuously receives data weightedFair This is a priority queuing mechanism In this case the user configurable queues Queueing are addressed based on their weight However the low delay queue and system queue still have priority over the user configurable queues ew po ooo 1 5 user config These queues are addressed based on their weight urable queue The weight can be configured in the telindus1421Router route
249. n element has the following values rip1 The transmitted RIP updates are RIP version 1 updates rip2 The transmitted RIP updates are RIP version 2 updates rip1 compatible The contents of the RIP update packet is a RIP version 2 packet but it is encapsulated as a RIP version 1 packet This allows some older implementations of RIP 1 to be interoperable with RIP 2 rxVersion Use this element to set which version of received RIP Default rip2only updates is accepted on the interface Range enumerated see below The rxVersion element has the following values rip1only Only RIP version 1 received RIP updates are accepted rip2only Only RIP version 2 received RIP updates are accepted rip1 amp 2 Both RIP version 1 and 2 received RIP updates are accepted If you want to accept RIP 1 compatible updates on the interface then set the rxVersion attribute to rip1 amp 2 108 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router come eee Se splitHorizon Use this element to enable or disable split horizon Default poisonedReverse operation Range enumerated see below The splitHorizon element has the following values disabled Split horizon is disabled enabled Split horizon is enabled Split horizon operation prevents that routing information exits the interface through which the information was received in the first place This optimises communica tions amo
250. n interface multiple secrets are present in the ripv2SecretTable then the first entry in the ripv2SecretTable is used to transmit RIP updates Authentication of the received RIP updates is done by looking for the first secret with a matching key e Ifyou use text and if for a certain interface multiple secrets are present in the ripv2SecretTable then only the first entry in the ripv2SecretTable is used to transmit and receive RIP updates 110 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router ec E filter Use this element to apply a filter on the RIP updates Default lt empty gt on the interface Range 0 24 characters Do this by entering the index name of the filter you want to use You can create the filter itself by adding a routingFilter object under the router object and by configuring the attributes in this object Example If you created a routingFilter object with index name my_filter i e filter routingFilter my_filter and you want to apply this filter here then enter the my_filted index name as value for the filter element N Refer to e 10 6 4 Routing filter configuration attributes on page 222 for more information on RIP filtering 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 39 for more information on adding objects Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 111 User manual Configuring the router 7 3 4 Configuring RIP authentication Refer to
251. n it is still not possible to have two simultaneous TMA sessions to the same outside world address portT ranslations l l If you do not want that UDP packets with port numbers in the range 2000 up to 3000 are sent to the out side world then you also have to include those in the table Example of a servicesAvailable table In this example a web server with address Y lservices vailable 192 168 47 250 on the local network is acces sible from the Internet using the PAT address lean Landan te instead of using the server address tep lt Opt gt Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 121 User manual Configuring the router 7 4 7 Configuring NAT Despite the workarounds offered by the previous two PAT configuration attributes to overcome the lim itations of PAT there are situations where PAT is inadequate For example it is not possible to have several web servers on your local network It is also impossible to run an application with fixed source port numbers on several local devices that are connected simultaneously to a single Internet device This can only be solved by using several official IP addresses Network Address Translation Use the following to configure NAT Use the addresses attribute to enter all the official IP addresses that have to be used for Network Address Translation Refer to telindus1421Router router defaultNat addresses on page 216 e Use the gateway attribute to define the gateway addresses fro
252. n page 137 for more information on bridging e 8 9 6 Explaining the bridging structure on page 150 for a detailed description of the bridging structure Use this element to configure the specific PVC param Default eters Range structure see below Refer to telindus1421Router wanInterface atm pvcTable atm on page 191 for a detailed description of the atm structure Use this element to configure the PPP related param Defauit eters of the PVC in case you choose to map PPP onto Range structure see below AALS refer to the elements higherLayerProtocol and mul tiProtocolMech on page 191 For a detailed description of the elements in the ppp structure refer to e telindus1421Router wanInterface ppp linkMonitoring on page 182 e telindus1421Router wanInterface ppp authentication on page 183 e telindus1421Router wanInterface ppp authenPeriod on page 183 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 191 Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1421Router waninterface atm pvcTable atm Default Range structure see below Use the atm structure in the pvcTable to configure the ATM related parame ters of the corresponding PVC Refer to 6 4 3 Configuring the PVCs on page 86 for more information on PVCs The atm structure contains the following elements C Use this element to set the Virtual Path Identifier Default 0 VPI Range 0 255
253. n the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router ra telindus1421Router loaderVersion This attribute displays the code version release date and time of the loader software currently used in the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 250 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 im Reference manual Status attributes telindus1421Router messages This attribute displays informative and error messages e g Reconfigured Cold Boot The messages table displays maximum 20 messages If you open a TMA session on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router over IP i e not through the control port then the messages are also sent to the control port This means that if you open a terminal emulation session on the control port you can monitor these messages If you hit the ENTER key the messages stop and you get the CLI password prompt telindus1421Router deviceld This attribute displays a unique code This code is programmed into the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router before it leaves the factory You can use this code for inventory purposes telindus1421Router configurationSaving This attribute indicates when the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is writing its new configuration to the flash memory Possible values are The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is busy writing its configuration to the flash memory During this state do not power down or reboot the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router else the new configuration will be lost The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router has finishe
254. n then associate this password with a certain access level Default lt empty gt Range 0 10 characters accessRights Use this element to set the access level associated with the password It is a bit string of which each bit corresponds to an access level The different access levels are listed below Default 1111 Range bit string see below The following table shows for each access level what you can or can not do Read Change attributes attributes readAccess Read secu rity attributes Change security attributes Execute actions Access file system writeAccess securityAccess fileSystem Access 1 The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router has the following security attributes telindus1421Router sysName telindus1421Router security telindus1421Router router sysSecret pppSecretTable and ripv2SecretTable telindus1421Router router priorityPolicy and trafficPolicy telindus1421Router wanInterface ppp authentication and authenPeriod telindus1421Router management accessList snmp telnet and tftp 2 Actions are e g Cold Boot clearArpCache clearBridgeCache etc Important remarks e Ifyou create no passwords everybody has complete access e Ifyou define at least one password it is impossible to access the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router with one of the management systems without entering the correct password e Ifyou create a list of passwords
255. nce gt gt router gt gt wanInterface routingTable iflnOctets i pingResults iflnUcastPkts Action startPing iflnNUcastPkts l Action stopPing ifInDiscards ifInErrors gt gt gt defaultNat ifInUnknownProtos socketsFree ifOutOctets allocFails ifOutUcastPkts discards ifOutNUcastPkts addressesAvailable ifOutDiscards tcpSocketsUsed ifOutErrors udpSocketsUsed ifOutQLen icmpSocketsUsed ifOutPQLen tcpAllocs h2Performance udpAllocs h24Performance icmpAllocs gt gt gt frameRelay diciTable Imi cllmInFrames Action resetNat gt gt gt atm pvcTable unknownCells gt gt gt tunnels I2tpTunnels Incase of a 2 pair version two objects are present linePair 1 and linePair 2 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Reference manual gt gt bridge gt gt gt bridgeGroup bridgeCache bridgeDiscards bridgeFloods gt gt gt accessList bridgeAccessList gt gt management cms2SessionCount tftpSessionCount cliSessionCount tcpSessionCount gt gt operatingSystem currUsedProcPower usedProcPower freeDataBuffers totalDataBuffers largestFreeBlockSize freeBlockCount freeMemory totalMemory taskInfo Chapter 12 303 Performance attributes 304 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 12 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 2 LAN interface performance attributes ra telindus1421Router lanInterface iflnOctets This attribute displays the number of octets bytes recei
256. ndshake is in progress continuously on The handshake was successful Layer 1 is up 2 7 4 The line data LED LINE ACT This LED reflects the status of the user data on the line continuously off Layer 2 is down monitoring Layer 2 is up and user data is present both transmit and receive data continuously on Layer 2 is up but no user data is present 2 7 5 The LAN LED LAN ACT This LED reflects the status of the link and monitors the user data on the LAN interface continuously off Nothing is connected to the LAN interface monitoring The Ethernet link is up and there is network activity on the LAN continuously on The Ethernet link is up but there is no network activity on the LAN 22 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 3 23 User manual DIP switches of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 3 DIP switches of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router This chapter locates the DIP switches on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router motherboard It gives an overview of their function and it explains how to change their settings The following gives an overview of this chapter e 3 1 The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router motherboard on page 24 e 3 2 DIP switches of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router on page 25 e 3 3 Opening and closing the housing on page 26 24 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 3
257. nfiguring HDLC The only thing that is configurable for the HDLC encapsulation protocol is the attribute telindus1421Router wanlinterface hdlc bridging on page 195 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 93 User manual Configuring the router 7 Configuring the router This chapter introduces routing on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router and lists the attributes you can use to configure routing It also introduces the most important features of the router besides routing and lists the attributes you can use to configure these features The following gives an overview of this chapter e 7 1 Introducing routing on page 94 e 7 2 Configuring static routes on page 96 e 7 3 Configuring the Routing Information Protocol on page 103 e 7 4 Configuring address translation on page 112 e 7 5 Configuring L2TP tunnelling on page 124 e 7 6 Configuring traffic and priority policy on the router on page 127 e 7 7 Configuring an extended access list on page 135 q Refer to the Reference manual on page 167 for a complete overview of the attributes of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 94 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 1 Introducing routing What is routing Routing is the act of moving information across an internetwork from a source to a destination Routing versus bridging Routing is often contrasted with bridging At first sight bridging might seem to do the same as routing The prima
258. ng and gives a short description of the attributes you can use to con figure static routing The following gives an overview of this section e 7 2 1 Configuring static routes on page 97 e 7 2 2 Configuring the routing table on page 98 e 7 2 3 Configuring static routes examples on page 99 7 2 4 The rerouting principle on page 102 i Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 97 User manual Configuring the router 7 2 1 Configuring static routes Refer to 7 1 Introducing routing on page 94 for an introduction on routing Static routes versus RIP You have to determine whether you are going to use static routes or the RIP routing protocol exclusively uses the RIP routing protocol you may skip this section Proceed with 7 3 Con figuring the Routing Information Protocol on page 103 does not use the RIP routing protocol or only part read this section to learn how to define static of it does routes to the remote IP networks that have to be reached The static routing configuration attributes Use the following to configure static routes e Use the routingTable attribute to specify routing entries for specific networks Refer to telindus1421Router router routingTable on page 202 7 2 2 Configuring the routing table on page 98 for more information on the behaviour of the rout ing table when configuring it e Use the defaultRoute attribute to specify a default route also called gateway Packe
259. ng multiple routers particularly when links are broken It also prevents routing loops poisonedReverse Poisoned reverse split horizon is used Whereas simple split horizon simply omits the routes learned from one neighbour in updates sent to that neighbour poisoned reverse split horizon includes such routes in updates but sets their metrics to infinity Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 109 FM E authentication Use this element to enable or disable RIP authentica Default disabled tion Range enumerated see below Refer to 7 3 4 Configuring RIP authentication on page 111 for more information on RIP authentication The authentication element has the following values disabled No authentication is used text The authentication secret is exchanged in clear text md5 Instead of sending the authentication secret together with the RIP updates it is hashed together with the rout ing information into a unique value This authentication is the most secure This because it provides also protec tion against tampering with the contents of a packet both an incorrect password and modified routing infor mation result in different hash values Remarks e If authentication is enabled either text or md5 then only updates using that authentication are processed All other updates on that interface are discarded e Ifyou use md5 and if for a certai
260. ng state Blocking i state When the spanning tree algorithm places a port in the for warding state the following process occurs Listeni Disabl 1 The port is put into the listening state while it waits for eae o protocol information that suggests it should go to the blocking state Forward delay 2 The port waits for the expiration of the forward delay timer moves the port to the learning state and resets the forward delay timer Learning state 3 In the learning state the port continues to block frame Forward delay forwarding as it learns station location information for the forwarding database Forwarding state 4 The port waits for the expiration of the forward delay timer and then moves the port to the forwarding state where both learning and forwarding are ena bled Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 143 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 6 The Spanning Tree Bridge Protocol Data Unit What is a BPDU To establish a stable path each bridge sends Configuration Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs to its neighbouring bridges These Configuration BPDU messages contain information about the spanning tree topology The contents of these frames only changes when the bridged network topology changes or has not been established Each Configuration BPDU contains the following minimal information The unique bridge identifier of the bridge that the trans
261. nge table see below The secondarylp table contains the elements address and netMask See above for an explanation of these elements remote This element is only present for a Frame Relay DLCI a PPP link an ATM PVC and an L2TP tunnel Use this element to assign an IP address to the Default 0 0 0 0 remote end of the Frame Relay DLCI PPP link ATM Range up to 255 255 255 255 PVC or L2TP tunnel If supported by the network the Reverse ARP protocol can obtain the remote IP address automatically In that case the remote IP address is not displayed in the configuration window but can be found in the status window Use this element to configure the RIP related param Defauit eters of the interface Range structure see below Refer to 7 3 3 Explaining the rip structure on page 106 for a detailed description of the rip structure Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual 53 Basic configuration Fea trafficPolicy i directedBroadcasts This element is not present in the telindus1421Router wanInterface frameRelay ip struc ture You have to specify a traffic policy per DLCI Use this element to apply a traffic policy on the routed Default lt empty gt data on the interface Range 0 24 characters Do this by entering the index name of the traffic policy you want to use You can create the traffic policy itself by adding a trafficPolicy object under
262. ning Tree Protocol option For more information on the LCP configuration options refer to RFC2878 This is the length of the option field This is the option value represented as an octet string hexadecimal ASCII repre sentation kal telindus1421Router wanInterface ppp bcpHisOptions This attribute lists the BCP options for the router at the other side remote side of the link The bcpMyOptions table contains the same elements as the telindus1421Router wanInterface ppp bcpMyOptions table Other option values than the ones supported by the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router may be present 264 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes kal telindus1421Router waninterface ppp myAuthenstate This attribute displays the authentication state of the router at this side local side of the link l e the state of the authenticator Possible values are No Authentication The local side does not request PPP authentication or still has to start the CHAP authentication LCP handshake is busy Wait On Response The local side has sent a challenge packet and is waiting for an answer Authen Successful The response packet is found to be correct This is the state when authentication succeeded Authen Failure The response packet is found to be incorrect This is a transient state since the router starts the LCP handshake again after a failing authentication kal telindus1421Rou
263. nt to set the timingMode attribute correct when using the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router in combination with other SHDSL devices For more information on compatibility issues refer to CROSS_REF The timingMode attribute has the following values synchronous There are always 2 stuffing bits are present in the SHDSL frame plesiochronous Either 0 or 4 stuffing bits are present in the SHDSL frame Important remark Plesiochronous mode can only work when the speed falls within the range of 192 kbps and 2048 kbps i e minSpeed 192kbps or minSpeed2P 256kbps and maxSpeed 2P 2048kbps If a speed is selected which is e lower than 192 kbps the actual speed is automatically increased to 192 kbps or 256 kbps in case of a 2 pair version e higher than 2048 kbps the actual speed is automatically limited to 2048 kbps Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 197 Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1421Router wanInterface line retrain Default Range structure see below Use this attribute to determine when the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router should retrain The retrain criteria The following criteria determine when to retrain SHDSL frame CRC error SHDSL framing sends 166 blocks per second over the line independ threshold exceeded ently of the speed Each block has a CRC check When a certain per centage of frames has a CRC error the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router retrains no SHDSL fra
264. nterface line region This attribute displays the SHDSL standard currently used Possible values are auto annexA annexB Refer to telindus1421Router wanlnterface line region on page 196 for more information on these values ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface line maxSpeedSearch This attribute displays the status of the maximumSpeedSearch action Possible values are idle No maximumSpeedSearch action has been performed progressing The maximumSpeedSearch action is running aborted The maximumSpeedSearch action stopped without result completed The maximumSpeedSearch action is finished The result is displayed in the maxSpeedResult attribute ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface line maxSpeedResult This attribute displays the maximum speed that was achieved during the execution of the maximumSpeedSearch action ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface line linePairsSwapped This attribute is only present on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2 pair version This attribute indicates whether the line pairs have been swapped when connecting the central with the remote device Possible values are The line pairs are swapped The line pairs are not swapped unknown The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is unable to determine whether the line pairs have been swapped e g because it is still training 274 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes WS telindus1421Router wanInterf
265. nual Configuration attributes telindus1421Router wanInterface line minSpeed2P Default 128kbps Range enumerated see below This attribute is only present on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2 pair ver sion Use this attribute to set the lowest line speed the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2 pair version may select if itis truly in 2 pair operation refer to telindus1421Router wanInterface line mode The minSpeed2P attribute has the following values 128kbps up to 4608kbps in steps of 128kbps Refer to 5 3 2 Selecting a line speed range on page 57 for more information telindus1421Router wanInterface line maxSpeed2P Default 2304kbps Range enumerated see below This attribute is only present on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2 pair ver sion Use this attribute to set the highest line speed the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2 pair version may select if it is truly in 2 pair operation refer to telindus1421Router wanInterface line mode The maxSpeed2P attribute has the following values 128kbps up to 4608kbps in steps of 128kbps Refer to 5 3 2 Selecting a line speed range on page 57 for more information telindus1421Router wanInterface linejmode Default dualPair Range singlePair dualPair This attribute is only present on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2 pair ver sion Use this attribute to select between single pair or dual pair operation When you change the mode attribute th
266. o add e g routingFilter lt CREATE INSTANCE gt and press the enter key gt A new window appears displaying the string Give the instanceValue Press the enter key and type the instance value i e the index name for the child object e g my_filter and press the enter key again The new child object is created e g gt routingFilter name my filter 42 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 4 User manual Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Adding an object in the Web Interface Enter the parent object e g select the router object and double click it or click on Open The Web Interface window shows the sub objects and attributes of the parent object Select the line displaying the string lt cREATE INSTANCE gt and the name of the object you want to add e g routingFilter lt CREATE INSTANCE gt and double click it or click on Open gt A new window appears displaying the string Give the instanceValue Type the instance value i e the index name for the child object e g my_filter and click on exit The new child object is created e g gt routingFilter name my filter Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 4 43 User manual Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 4 4 3 Referring to an added object What is referring to an added object If at a certain place in the containment tree you want to apply the function associated with an object you added then you h
267. ocal Ethernet segment connected to three dif oo a ferent net works DLCI 21 through three differ ent DLCls DLCI 19 router modem modem Frame Relay DLCI 20 192 168 100 4 The follow ing screenshot shows part diciTable of the diciTable of the set up i adminStatus ip bridging gt frameRelay gt depicted in the figure gt 1 network2 up routing g tructs lt Struct gt Structy above gt 2 network3 up routing lt Struct gt lt Struct gt KStructy b3 network4 up routing Struct lt Struct gt lt Struc gt y diciT able row 1 ip diciT ableSrow 1 frameRelay netMask remote dici cit eir 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 2 gt BE 0 0 dil able row 2 ip diciTable row 2 trameRelay netMask remote dici cit eir 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 3 gt E 0 0 diciT able row 3 ip diciT able row 3 frameRelay netMask remote dici cit eir 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 4 gt E 0 0 80 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 6 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 3 4 Configuring LMI Refer to 6 3 1 Introducing Frame Relay on page 74 for an introduction on LMI The LMI provides a status mechanism which gives an on going status report on the DLCls These status reports are R router modem exchanged between the Frame Relay LMI Status Enquiry access device or Frame Relay DTE or 1 u
268. ocol over ATM on page 90 e 6 4 6 Configuring Classical IP on page 90 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 6 83 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 4 1 Introducing ATM What is ATM ATM is a cell switching and multiplexing technology that combines the benefits of circuit switching guar anteed capacity and constant transmission delay with those of packet switching flexibility and efficiency for intermittent traffic It provides scalable bandwidth Because of its asynchronous nature ATM is more efficient than synchronous technologies such as time division multiplexing TDM With TDM each user is assigned to a time slot and no other station can send in that time slot If a station has much data to send it can send only when its time slot comes up even if all other time slots are empty However if a station has nothing to transmit when its time slot comes up the time slot is sent empty and is wasted Because ATM is asynchronous time slots are available on demand with informa tion identifying the source of the transmission contained in the header of each ATM cell What is VPI and VCI ATM networks are fundamentally connection oriented which means that a virtual channel must be set up across the ATM network prior to any data transfer A virtual channel is roughly equivalent to a Per manent Virtual Circuit or PVC Two types of ATM connections exist e virtual paths which are identified by Virtual Path
269. of Status Enquiries sent to the network outStatus This is the number of Status Reports sent to the network outStatusUpdate This is the number of unsolicited Status Updates sent to the network netPollNotRevd This is the number of times the expectedPolllnterval expired without an incoming sta tus enquiry userNoResponse This is the number of times a response was not received Revd userBadResponses This is the number of times an invalid response was received Revd Ta telindus1421Router waninterface frameRelay cllminFrames This attribute displays the total number of received CLLM Consolidated Link Layer Management frames 312 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 12 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 3 3 ATM performance attributes ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface atm pvcTable This attribute lists the complete performance information of all known PVCs The pvcTable table contains the following elements COE name This is the name of the PVC as you configured it mibCounters This displays the SNMP MIB2 parameters of the PVC These are the same as the SNMP MIB2 parameters on the LAN interface Refer to 12 2 LAN interface performance attributes on page 304 priorityQLengths In case an overload condition occurs and priority queuing is activated then this elements displays how many packets the different queues contain atm This displays the specific ATM related performan
270. of addressing is meant for a network topology where the Telindus devices are connected in line on management level l e with extended manage ment connections between two Telindus devices An extended management con nection is realised with a crossed cable between the control connectors of two Telindus devices La PC running relative 0 relative 1 relative 2 relative 3 TMA extended management connection To enable relative addressing no address has to be specified in the Telindus device absolute This type of addressing is meant for a network topology where the Telindus devices are not connected in line on management level l e when there is a digital multipoint device present a fe C9 1 S absolute 11 absolute 22 PC running absolute 10 absolute 20 en Lf TMA digital multipoint absolute 33 absolute 44 To enable absolute addressing an address has to be specified in the Telindus device Do this with the cms2Address attribute Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Reference manual Chapter 10 241 Configuration attributes kal telindus1421Router managementl accessList Use this attribute to control the access from certain hosts or networks Default lt empty gt Range table see below The access list filters incoming traffic based on the source IP address You can specify multiple entries within the access list When more than one entry applies to the same packet then only the most specif
271. oise actualBitRate Incase of a 2 pair version two objects are present linePair 1 and linePair 2 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 247 Reference manual Status attributes gt gt router routingTable igmpTable dhcpBinding dhcpStatistics gt gt gt defaultNat addresses gt gt gt tunnels 2tpTunnels gt gt bridge gt gt gt bridgeGroup ifDescr ifType ifOperStatus ifMtu ip arpCache bridgeCache bridging spanningTree Action clearArpCache Action clearBridgeCache gt gt management cms2Address gt gt gt loopback ifDescr ifType ifOperStatus ifMtu ipAddress gt gt fileSystem fileList freeSpace status corruptBlocks Action Delete File Action Rename File gt gt operatingSystem taskInfo 248 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 mm Reference manual Status attributes 11 2 General status attributes telindus1421Router sysDescr This attribute displays a textual description of the device It is an SNMP MIB2 parameter Example Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Txxxx xxxxx 01 01 00 12 00 In this example the following parameters are visible e Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is the device name e Txxxx Xxxxxx is the application software code and version e 01 01 00 12 00 is the application software release date and time telindus1421Router sysObjectID This attribute displays the identification string This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter
272. om puter e g COM1 through a straight DB9 male female cable with the control connector of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Open a DOS window on your computer Go to the directory where the TML executable is located Typically this is C Program Files TMA Place the software file you want to download in this directory Type the following command tml c1 v b fTXXXXXXX 00 CONTROL my pwd where tml is the executable Telindus Memory Loader to download files to the Telindus devices through their control port c1 specifies the COM port of the computer connected to the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router in this example COM1 v returns graphical information on the download status b puts the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router in boot mode This is only necessary when you want to download loader software fTxxxxxxx 00 s the software file you want to download e g T1234001 00 CONTROL in capitals specifies that the file being downloaded is an application or loader software file my_pwd is the write access password as configured in the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router If no password has been configured you may omit the and the password To see a list of all the possible TML options type Tmt in your DOS windows and press the ENTER key If you press the ENTER key the software download begins If you used the v option together with the TML command a graphical bar shows the download progress 360
273. on Such sessions whether PAT or NAT is in use remain active for 3 minutes by default Only decrease this attribute if some UDP applications do not close properly filling up the available translation sessions telindus1421Router router defaultNatitcpSockets Default 1024 Range 500 4500 Use this attribute to set the maximum number of TCP session that may be used simultaneously for address translation telindus1421Router router defaultNat udpSockets Default 1024 Range 500 4500 Use this attribute to set the maximum number of UDP session that may be used simultaneously for address translation telindus1421Router router defaultNat dmzHost Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 Use this attribute to set the address of the DMZ demilitarised zone host What is a DMZ host In computer networks a DMZ demilitarised zone is a computer host or small network inserted as a neutral zone between a company s private network and the outside public network It prevents outside users from getting direct access to a server that has company data A DMZ is an optional and more secure approach to a firewall and effectively acts as a proxy server as well In a typical DMZ configuration for a small company a separate computer receives requests from users within the private network for access to Web sites or other companies accessible on the public network The DMZ host then initiates sessions
274. on This section introduces the Frame Relay encapsulation protocol and gives a short description of the attributes you can use to configure this encapsulation protocol The following gives an overview of this section e 6 3 1 Introducing Frame Relay on page 74 e 6 3 2 Configuring IP addresses on the Frame Relay WAN on page 76 e 6 3 3 Configuring the DLCls on page 79 e 6 3 4 Configuring LMI on page 80 e 6 3 5 Configuring CIR and EIR on page 81 74 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 6 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 3 1 Introducing Frame Relay What is Frame Relay Frame Relay is a networking protocol that works at the bottom two levels of the OSI reference model the physical and data link layers It is an example of packet switching technology which enables end stations to dynamically share network resources Frame Relay devices fall into the following two general categories e Data Terminal Equipment DTEs which include terminals personal computers routers and bridges e Data Circuit terminating Equipment DCEs which transmit the data through the network and are often carrier owned devices What is DLCI Frame Relay networks transfer data using one of the following connection types e Switched Virtual Circuits SVCs which are temporary connections that are created for each data transfer and then are terminated when the data transfer is complete not a widely used connection e
275. on Add In the Remote filename window do the following Look in ja Tma 7 El c j E 1 Select the file you want to download fg ezev edie a e g T1234001 00 a Cms2Serv ini_java T TMA exe a Uninst isu a SDSL_TT_configuration cms 5 TMA ini Type ConTROL in the Remote file 211400 aneia maTftp exe field Click on Open Filename T2114003 00 Files of type fan files z Cancel Remote file CONTROL If you are currently connected to the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router without write access then you can enter a password in the Password tab which gives you write access Else leave the Password tab blank When the TMA Download window reappears click on OK Password Configuration Options A window opens and shows the download is The download list box specifies the files that will be sent to the device Use the Add and Remove progress buttons to edit the list 72114009 00 CONTROL Remove Cancel 358 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 16 Reference manual Downloading software 16 3 Downloading application software using TFTP When downloading with TMA over an IP connection you actually evoke TFTP Trivial File Transfer Pro tocol through TMA You can also use TFTP without opening TMA To download application software to the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router using TFTP proceed as follows Start a TFTP session on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router For example by t
276. one PVC PVC 4 does not use the bandwidth as specified in its PCR As a result the total available bandwidth 2 Mbps is divided proportionally over the PVCs The spare bandwidth that PVC 4 does not use is also proportionally divided over the three PVCs which can use this extra bandwidth PVC 1 2 and 3 89 90 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 6 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 4 5 Configuring multi protocol over ATM Refer to 6 4 1 Introducing ATM on page 83 for an introduction on multi protocol over ATM In order to configure multi protocol over ATM use the element e higherLayerProtocol to define which protocol e multiProtocolMech to define how the protocol has to be mapped onto ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AALS Refer to telindus1421Router wanInterface atm pvcTable atm on page 191 6 4 6 Configuring Classical IP Classical IP RFC1577 is one of the first commonly used encapsulations of IP over ATM The encapsu lation method is the same as described in RFC2684 formerly RFC1483 The IP traffic is encapsulated without Ethernet header Reverse ARP is in use for the resolution of IP addresses to PVC channels In order to configure Classical IP use the following elements Set the mode element to routing for the relevant PVC refer to telindus1421Router wanInterface atm pvcTable on page 189 e Set the higherLayerProtocol to rfc2684 for the relevant PVC refer to telindus1421Router
277. onfiguration actions 63 extended access list basic configuration 135 F feedback iv file system status attributes 297 Frame Relay basic configuration 73 configuration attributes 184 introduction 74 performance attributes 309 specifications 366 status attributes 265 what is 74 G general alarm attributes 333 alarms 334 configuration attributes 172 status attributes 248 group what is 37 Index H HDLC basic configuration 91 92 configuration attributes 195 introducing 92 status attributes 271 housing opening and closing 26 ICMP message communication prohibited 210 port unreachable 210 TTL exceeded 209 ICMP redirect what is 53 IGMP topology 280 what is 280 index name what is 36 installation and connection pre cautions 13 installing and connecting the device 9 introducing alarm attributes 331 ATM 83 bridging 138 Frame Relay 74 HDLC 92 L2TP 125 management terminology 34 management tools 6 NAT 113 PAT 113 PPP 70 RIP 104 router applications 5 routing 94 the device 4 traffic and priority policy 128 introduction 3 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Annex IP addresses automatically obtaining 50 basic configuration 49 on the ATM WAN 85 on the Frame Relay WAN 76 on the PPP WAN 71 explaining the IP structure 52 Frame Relay DLCI global IP 77 Frame Relay DLCI specific IP 78 getting the LAN IP address 345 where to find the IP related parameters 51 IP structure
278. onfigure the IP related parameters of the LAN inter face Important remark Default Range structure see below If you set the configuration attribute telindus1421Router lanInterface mode to bridging then the settings of the configuration attribute telindus1421Router laninterface ip are ignored As a result if you want to manage the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router via IP you have to configure an IP address in the bridgeGroup object instead telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup ip Refer to 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure on page 52 for a detailed description of the ip structure Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 177 Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1421Router lanInterface arp Default Range structure see below Use this attribute to configure the Address Resolution Protocol ARP cache The arp structure contains the following elements timeOut Use this element to set the ageing time of the ARP Default 00000d 02h 00m 00s cache entries Refer to The ARP cache time out Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s 24855d 03h 14m 07s proxyArp Use this element to enable or disable the ARP cache pefault enabled mechanism Range enabled disabled What is the ARP cache The LAN interface has been allocated a fixed Ethernet address also called MAC Medium Access Con trol address This MAC address is not user configurable The IP address of the LAN interface on the
279. ons 367 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Annex routing table configuring the 98 routing traffic policy applying on an interface 133 S safety compliance 368 instructions 10 requirements ii sales codes 375 security correcting the security table 60 selecting a site 12 self learning bridge what is 139 SNMP configuration attributes 238 software downloading 355 what is boot loader and ap plication 356 Spanning Tree behaviour 144 bridge failure 144 bridging loops 144 network extension 144 BPDU 143 propagation of 143 what is 143 bridge port states 142 bridge priority what is 145 path cost example 146 path cost what is 145 port priority example 146 port priority what is 145 priority and cost 145 root bridge 140 how selected 140 what is 140 topology 141 specifications ATM encapsulation 366 bridging 367 control connector 365 dimensions 368 EMC compliance 368 environmental compliance 369 Frame Relay encapsulation 366 IP routing 367 LAN interface 364 line 362 connector lay out 362 maximum covered dis tance 363 over voltage and over cur rent protection compli ance 368 power requirements 368 PPP encapsulation 366 routing and bridging per formance 367 safety compliance 368 statements iii static routes basic configuration 96 97 examples 99 with IP address on the WAN 100 without IP address on the WAN 101 status attributes 245 ATM 269 bridge 290 default NAT 283
280. ontainment tree on page 39 e 4 5 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router attribute overview on page 44 28 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 4 User manual Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 4 1 Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router with TMA First this section introduces TMA Then it describes how to start a session on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router The following gives an overview of this section e 4 1 1 What is TMA on page 29 e 4 1 2 How to connect TMA on page 29 e 4 1 3 Connecting through the control connector on page 30 e 4 1 4 Connecting over an IP network on page 32 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 4 29 User manual Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 4 1 1 What is TMA TMA is the acronym for Telindus Maintenance Application TMA is a free Windows software package that enables you to maintain the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router i e to access its configuration attributes and look at status performance and alarm information using a user friendly graphical user interface TMA is an excellent tool for complete management of the Telindus access devices When using TMA in combination with a network management system such as HP OpenView complete networks can be managed from one central site Consult the TMA manual how to install TMA and to get acquainted with the user interface You will need a new version of the model file distribution if changes have been made to the attributes of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router The mo
281. ontains the following elements I The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router supports the following IPCP option e 3 the IP Address option For more information on the IPCP configuration options refer to RFC1332 This is the length of the option field This is the option value represented as an octet string hexadecimal ASCII repre sentation telindus1421Router wanlInterface ppp ipcpHisOptions This attribute lists the IPCP options for the router at the other side remote side of the link The ipcpHisOptions table contains the same elements as the telindus1421Router wanInterface ppp ipcpMyOptions table Other option values than the ones supported by the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router may be present Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 263 Reference manual Status attributes kal telindus1421Router waninterface ppp bcpMyOptions During the BCP handshake a number of options can be exchanged between the local and remote side of the link This attribute lists the BCP options for the router at this side local side of the link The bcpMyOptions table contains the following elements FM The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router supports the following LCP options This is the Bridge Identification option This is the Line Identification option This is the MAC Support option This is the Tinygram Compression option This is the LAN Identification option This is the MAC Address option This is the Span
282. or retrieved auto matically Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 291 Reference manual Status attributes telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup arpCache This attribute displays all the MAC address IP address pairs from ARP requests and replies received on the LAN interface Refer to What is the ARP cache on page 177 for more information The arpCache table contains the following elements om pe O macAddress This is the MAC address ipAddress This is the associated IP address type This is the ARP cache entry type Possible values are dynamic The MAC IP address pair is retrieved from an ARP request or reply message static The MAC IP address pair is configured There is only one static entry i e the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router its own IP and MAC address timeOut This is the time the entry will remain in the ARP cache For the static entry this value is 0 292 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes ra telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup bridgeCache When a port of the bridge enters the learning state it stores the MAC addresses of the stations situated on the network that is connected to this port The MAC addresses are stored ina MAC address database or bridge cache The bridgeCache attribute visualises this address database Refer to What is the bridge cache on page 232 for more information The bridgeCache table contains the following ele
283. outer modem V VPI 103 VCI 103 AA VPI 104 192 168 100 4 VCI 104 The following screenshot shows part of the pvcTable of the set up depicted in the figure above pycT able name adminStatus mode priorityPolicy ip gt bridging gt atm_ gt ppp b1 network2 up routing lt Struct gt lt Struct gt gt 2 network3 up routing lt Struct gt lt Struct gt gt 3 network4 up routing lt Struct gt lt Struct gt pycT able row 1 ip y lt py cT able row 1 atm netMask remote gt PANAN 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 2 pvcT able row 2 ip y pvcT able row 2 atm netMask remote gt PANAN 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 3 pycT able row 3 ip pycT able row 3 atm netMask remote YC gt PANAN 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 4 gt pU 104 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 4 4 Configuring the PCR The Peak Cell Rate PCR is comparable to the EIR in Frame Relay refer to What is EIR on page 74 In other words it is the specified amount of unguaranteed bandwidth measured in bits per second on an ATM service Refer to the Important remarks below to see how to set a guaranteed bandwidth The major difference between the PCR mechanism on ATM and the CIR EIR mechanism on Frame Relay refer to 6 3 5 Configuring CIR and EIR on page 81 is that in case of ATM the bandwidth assigned to
284. p in combination with an object may have actions assigned to them These actions are displayed in the action window 38 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router User manual Chapter 4 Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 4 3 The objects in the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router containment tree The following table lists the different objects of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router containment tree gt telindus1421Router gt gt gt accessList gt gt lanInterface gt gt snmp gt gt waninterface gt gt management gt gt gt ppp gt gt gt loopBack gt gt gt frameRelay gt gt fileSystem gt gt gt atm gt gt gt hdic gt gt gt line gt gt gt gt linePair gt gt router gt gt gt tunnels gt gt gt routingFilter gt gt gt priorityPolicyf gt gt gt trafficPolicy 1 gt gt gt defaultNat gt gt bridge gt gt gt bridgeGroup 1 In case of a Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2 pair version two linePair objects are present 2 Not present by default Has to be added refer to 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 39 The index name is user defined gt gt operatingSystem Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 4 39 User manual Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree This section explains why and how you can add an object to the
285. p structure refer to 7 3 3 Explaining the rip structure on page 106 204 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes kal telindus1421Router router alternativeRoutes Default backup Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to determine how the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router deals with identical routes If more than one route to a sub network is defined in the routing table and these routes have e identical destination addresses masks preferences and metrics e a different gateway then you can use the alternativeRoutes attribute to determine which route the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router uses to reach the sub network The alternativeRoutes attribute has the following values backup The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router always uses the same route to reach the sub network Only when this route goes down it uses the alternative route roundRobin The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router alternately uses the two possible routes to reach the sub network However once a certain route is used to reach a specific address this same route is always used to reach this specific address telindus1421Router router ripUpdatelnterval Default 00000d 00h 00m 30s Range 00000d 00h 00m 05s Use this attribute to set the interval the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router trans 00000d 00h 10m 00s mits RIP update messages Normally RIP update messages are transmitted
286. packet goes through the routing decision process If the result of this decision is a route which uses the tunnel interface then the packet is encapsulated in PPP first then L2TP UDP and finally IP IP from LAN outer IP Then the packet goes through the routing decision process again This time using the outer IP header The packet is routed over the Internet using the outer IP header The packet is received in the tunnel s end point where it is then routed again using the original IP header 7 5 3 Configuring L2TP Use the 2tpTunnels attribute to set up and configure an L2TP tunnel Refer to telindus1421Router router tunnels I2tpTunnels on page 218 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 127 User manual Configuring the router 7 6 Configuring traffic and priority policy on the router This section introduces traffic and priority policy and gives a short description of the attributes you can use to configure these features on the router It also shows you the difference with the traffic policy on the bridge The following gives an overview of this section 7 6 1 Introducing traffic and priority policy on page 128 7 6 2 Traffic and priority policy on routed and bridged data on page 129 7 6 3 How to configure a traffic and priority policy on the router on page 130 7 6 4 Configuring a traffic policy on the router on page 131 7 6 5 Configuring a priority policy on page 132 7 6 6 Applying a ro
287. packet has passed too many routers Probably the packet is looping between a number of routers This mechanism avoids that routers with configuration errors bring down a complete network The ICMP message TTL exceeded If a router discards a packet because its TTL is exceeded it normally sends an ICMP TTL exceeded message to the originator of the packet With the sendTtlExceeded attribute you can define whether you want the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router to send such ICMP messages or not The sendTtlExceeded attribute has the following values enabled The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router sends ICMP TTL exceeded messages disabled The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router does not send ICMP TTL exceeded mes sages This also implies that the router is not recognised by the UNIX or Windows trace route feature 210 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes kal telindus1421Router router sendPortUnreachable Default enabled Range enabled disabled Use this attribute to enable or disable the sending of ICMP Destination unreachable Port unreachable messages The ICMP message port unreachable The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router supports a number of higher layer IP protocols Telnet SNMP and TMA for management purposes If an IP packet is sent to the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router for a higher layer protocol that it does not support it normally sends an ICMP Destinat
288. peed 2P The higher the startupMargin the lower the selected line speed but the more stable the line will be The startupMargin attribute has the following values disabled 0dB 1dB 2dB 3dB 4dB 5dB 6dB 7dB 8dB 9dB 10dB When you set the startupMargin to disabled the target margin is not considered during the ITU T G 994 1 auto speed negotiation l e all the speeds in the range as set with the attributes minSpeed 2P and maxSpeed 2P are available What is the target margin The target margin is the amount of received signal power in excess of that required to achieve the DSL target bit error rate of 107 r telindus1421Router wanlnterface line minSpeed Default 64kbps Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to set the lowest line speed the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router may select The minSpeed attribute has the following values 64kbps up to 2304kbps in steps of 64kbps Refer to 5 3 2 Selecting a line speed range on page 57 for more information ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface line maxSpeed Default 2304kbps Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to set the highest line speed the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router may select The maxSpeed attribute has the following values 64kbps up to 2304kbps in steps of 64kbps Refer to 5 3 2 Selecting a line speed range on page 57 for more information im m ma i i Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 199 Reference ma
289. psulation multiplexes multiple protocols over a single virtual circuit The proto col of a carried protocol data unit PDU is identified by prefixing the PDU with an LLC header vcMultiplexing Virtual Circuit VC based multiplexing uses one Virtual Channel VCI VPI pair for each protocol This uses more VCs than LLC encapsulation but reduces over head because a header is not necessary The following table gives an overview of which multi protocol mechanism can be used for which higher layer protocol encapsulation It also shows whether this can be combined with NAT PAT Device as router or higherLayerProtocol multiProtocolMech NAT PAT bridge router rfic2684 llcEncapsulation support ppp llcEncapsulation veMultiplexing pppOverEthernet llcEncapsulation rfic2684 llcEncapsulation ppp llcEncapsulation veMultiplexing pppOverEthernet llcEncapsulation peakCellRate Use this element to set the maximum bandwidth of the PVC Default auto Range enumerated see below The peakCellRate element has the following values auto and 64kbps up to 2304kbps in steps of 64kbps In auto mode the PVC will try to get the maximum bandwidth i e the speed of the physical connection towards the ATM network This is the line speed on which the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is trained Refer to 6 4 4 Con figuring the PCR on page 87 for more information on the peak cell rate
290. pter 8 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 5 The Spanning Tree bridge port states Bridge port states There are four possible states a bridge port can be in State A port in this state blocking e does no frame forwarding e does not incorporate station location into its address database There is no learning on a blocking port so there is no MAC address database update e receives BPDUs but does not process or propagate them A bridge always enters the blocking state following bridge initialisation listening does no frame forwarding does not incorporate station location into its address database There is no learning on a listening port so there is no MAC address database update receives and processes BPDUs but does not propagate them learning does no frame forwarding incorporates station location into its MAC address database receives processes and propagates BPDUs forwarding forwards frames incorporates station location into its MAC address database receives processes and propagates BPDUs Bridge port state transition diagram The following figure shows how a bridge port moves through the different states when the bridge is powered Power on initialisation When you enable Spanning Tree every bridge in the net work goes through the transitory states of listening and learning at power up If properly configured each port sta bilises to the forwarding or blocki
291. r Example 2 Static IP route without an IP address on the WAN interface IP address LAN interface IP address LAN interface 192 168 47 254 192 168 48 254 Router A Router B modem IP subnet 192 168 47 0 IP subnet 192 168 48 0 mask 255 255 255 0 mask 255 255 255 0 This example is similar to the previous one except that now the WAN interfaces do not have an IP address To make network 192 168 48 0 reachable from network 192 168 47 0 and vice versa you have to define one static route in router A left and one static route in router B right as follows Router A routingT able network interface preference metric b 1 192 168 48 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 498 254 wan 10 2 Router B routingT able network interface preference metric gt 1 192 168 47 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 47 254 wan 10 2 102 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 2 4 The rerouting principle What is the rerouting principle If the gateway of a route does not belong to the subnet of an interface then the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router adds a special route Then a second route look up occurs this time using the gateway field of the route This can be used as a back up functionality as shown below Example Suppose you have the following set up 172 31 76 0 255 255 255 0 172 31 77 6 255 255 255 252 172 31 77 2 DLCI 16 255 255 255 252 gt Frame Relay 172 31
292. r in the office does not need any static routes All traffic is sent to the ISP Hence the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router its default route is towards the Inter net Router modem IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 defaultRoute gateway interface preference metric gt 192 168 100 3 wan 10 2 Chapter 7 100 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router User manual Configuring the router Example 1 Static IP route with an IP address on the WAN interface IP address WAN interface IP address WAN interface 192 168 100 1 192 168 100 2 IP address LAN interface IP address LAN interface 192 168 47 254 192 168 48 254 Router A Router B modem modem C3 WS IP subnet 192 168 47 0 IP subnet 192 168 48 0 mask 255 255 255 0 mask 255 255 255 0 In this example two LANs are interconnected via a modem link The two routers have an IP address on their WAN interface To make network 192 168 48 0 reachable from network 192 168 47 0 and vice versa you have to define one static route in router A left and one static route in router B right as fol lows Router A routingT able network interface preference metric gt 1 192 168 48 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 100 2 10 2 Router B routingT able interface preference metric 2 network gt 1 192 168 47 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 100 1 10 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 101 User manual Configuring the route
293. r layer protocol Action When a session is started a specific port number is assigned to this ses sion All traffic from this session is assigned this specific port number The specific port number is freed within 5 minutes after the TCP session is closed i e after TCP Reset or TCP Finish is seen If the session has not been properly closed the port number is freed 24 hours after the last ses sion traffic This time is configurable refer to telindus1421Router router default Nat tcpSocketTimeOut on page 217 Description This is a connection less protocol user data can be sent without first build ing a session Examples of such applications are SNMP and TFTP Although TFTP is ses sion oriented it builds the session at a higher level and uses UDP for its simplicity as transport protocol The UDP header contains a port field indi cating the higher layer protocol Action The Source Port Number is replaced by a specific port number All traffic from this source IP address port number pair is assigned this specific port number If there is no traffic for 5 to 10 minutes the specific port number is freed Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 117 User manual ICMP Description Configuring the router This is a connection less protocol user data can be sent without first build ing a session An example of such an application is ping These protocols do not have port numbers Action Each ICMP
294. r plug and play installation at cus tomer premises while the configuration is prepared at a central site Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 1 5 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 1 2 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router applications Some examples of Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router applications are LAN to LAN connection over a line e LAN extension over a network LAN to Internet connection Point to point LAN interconnection 6 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 1 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 1 3 Management tools The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is manageable in many different ways This section gives a quick overview of the various management tools Management Description and reference tool TMA TMA Telindus Management Application is a free Windows software package that enables you to manage the Telindus products completely l e to access their con figuration attributes and look at status performance and alarm information Refer to 4 Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router on page 27 and the TMA manual for more information TMA for HP OpenView TMA for HP OpenView is the management application that runs on the widely spread network management platform HP OpenView It offers the combination of the easy to use graphical interface of the stand alone version of TMA together with the advantages and features of HP OpenView Refer to the TMA for HP OpenView manual for more
295. r priorityPolicy queueConfigurations attribute 6 low delay queue This queue is addressed between every user config urable queue 7 system queue This queue has priority over all other queues As soon as it contains data it is emptied 230 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes kal telindus1421Router router priorityPolicy countingPolicy Default bytes Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to define whether the quotum of the queues is expressed in bytes or packets kal telindus1421Router router priorityPolicy queueConfigurations Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to e set the number of bytes packets that is dequeued from the user configurable queue when the queue is addressed e set the relative importance of the user configurable queues The queueConfigurations table contains the following elements e T A a a Use this element to set the number of bytes packets Default 1500 that is dequeued from the user configurable queue Range 1 25000 when the queue is addressed The unit of the quotum bytes or packets can be set with the telindus1421Router router priorityPolicy countingPolicy attribute Use this element to set the relative importance of the Default 1 user configurable queues Range 1 10 The weight element is only relevant in case the te
296. r the nose of the housing A Closing the housing To close the housing of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router proceed as follows Replace the cover as follows 1 Gently push the cover under the nose of the housing 2 Lower the back of the cover witii 3 Push on the back of the cover click i E ing cover and bottom together Fasten the two screws located at the back of the housing Reconnect the external power supply Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 4 27 User manual Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 4 Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Once you installed the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router you can proceed with the configuration of the Tel indus 1421 SHDSL Router You can do this using any of the management tools introduced in 1 3 Man agement tools on page 6 This chapter briefly highlights one of those management tools the Telindus Maintenance Application TMA It introduces TMA and describes how to start a session on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router It also introduces the terminology concerning the management of a Telindus device Furthermore it explains why and how to add an object to the containment tree The following gives an overview of this chapter e 4 1 Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router with TMA on page 28 e 4 2 Introducing the management terminology on page 34 e 4 3 The objects in the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router containment tree on page 38 e 4 4 Adding an object to the c
297. r the server on the net work If the server is on a remote LAN then the detection may fail Therefore if you configure a helper IP address the received broadcasts address is replaced by this helper IP address and the packets are re routed using the des tination address Multiple helper IP addresses can be configured The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router only substitutes addresses for the protocols which are selected in the helperProtocols attribute Refer to telindus1421Router router helperProtocols on page 208 Use this element to enable Network Address Transla Default lt empty gt tion on the interface Range 0 24 characters Do this by entering the string default as nat element value By doing so fal the NAT settings are applied as defined in the defaultNat object under the defaut router object In future releases it will also be possible to refer to user IN defined NAT object analogous to the routing filter traffic policy etc Refer to e 7 4 Configuring address translation on page 112 for more information on NAT e 10 6 2 Default NAT configuration attributes on page 215 for a detailed description of the NAT configuration attributes Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 55 User manual Basic configuration 5 3 Configuring the line When you want to establish a line connection successfully you have to configure some line attributes This section shows you which line attributes are
298. red Status Enquiry messages within 4 x 10s 40s then the interface is declared down expectedPollinterval Use this element to set the maximum time between Default 00000d 00h 00m 15s two consecutive incoming Status Enquiry messages Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s Select the value 0 in order to disable verification 00000d 00h 00m 30s This element is only relevant when using Frame Relay over a point to point link no Frame Relay network In Frame Relay language a router is normally considered as a DTE However if two routers are connected to each other in Frame Relay but without a real Frame Relay network in between then the routers also take the role of a DCE refer to the mode element The Status Enquiry messages are sent in both directions fullEnquirylnterval Use this element to set the number of Status Enquiry Default 6 intervals that have to elapse before sending a Full Range 1 255 Status Enquiry message Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 189 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 4 4 ATM configuration attributes ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface atm pvcTable Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to configure the ATM Permanent Virtual Circuits PVCs Refer to 6 4 3 Configuring the PVCs on page 86 for more information on PVCs The pvcTable contains the following elements e E name Use this element to assig
299. ress automatically Then it shows you for each interface where you can find the IP related parameters Finally this section explains these IP related parameters The following gives an overview of this section e 5 2 1 Automatically obtaining an IP address on page 50 e 5 2 2 Where to find the IP related parameters on page 51 e 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure on page 52 50 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Basic configuration 5 2 1 Automatically obtaining an IP address Obtaining an IP address on the LAN interface The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router supports the BootP protocol to automatically obtain an IP address on its LAN interface Refer to 15 Auto installing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router on page 343 for more information on auto install Obtaining an IP address on the WAN interface Currently the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router does not support any protocols to automatically obtain an IP address on its WAN interface However if you do not configure an IP address on the WAN interface then the IP address of the LAN interface is used In other words the LAN interface shares its IP address with the WAN interface This is called unnumbered mode A An IP address that was obtained using a dynamic procedure is not displayed in the configuration window but can be found in the status window Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 51 User manual Basic configuration 5 2 2 Where to find the IP related parameters
300. resses LAC L2TP Access L2TP Network Concentrator Server L2TP terminology The following table gives some specific L2TP terminology L2TP Access Con Anode that acts as one side of an L2TP tunnel It is a peer to the L2TP Network centrator LAC Server LNS Packets sent from the LAC to the LNS require tunnelling with the L2TP protocol L2TP Network A node that acts as one side of an L2TP tunnel It is a peer to the L2TP Access Server LNS Concentrator LAC The LNS is the logical termination point of a PPP session that is being tunnelled from the remote system by the LAC Tunnel A tunnel exists between a LAC LNS pair The tunnel consists of a Control Con nection and zero or more L2TP sessions The tunnel carries encapsulated PPP datagrams and Control Messages between the LAC and the LNS Control Connection A control connection operates in band over a tunnel to control the establish ment release and maintenance of sessions and of the tunnel itself Control Messages Control messages are exchanged between LAC and LNS pairs operating in band within the tunnel protocol Control messages govern aspects of the tunnel and sessions within the tunnel 126 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 5 2 How does L2TP work Suppose a packet coming from the LAN has a destination address for a network that is accessible through a tunnel The following happens CN The
301. rface ip are ignored As a result if you want to manage the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router via IP you have to configure an IP address in the bridgeGroup object instead telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup ip Refer to 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure on page 52 for a detailed description of the ip structure telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup arp Default Range structure see below Use this attribute to configure the Address Resolution Protocol ARP cache of the bridge Refer to telindus1421Router laninterface arp on page 177 for a detailed description of the arp structure 234 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes kal telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup spanningTree Default Range structure see below Use this attribute to configure the bridging related parameters Whereas the bridging attribute groups the bridging related parameters per interface the spanningTree attribute groups the bridging related parameters of the bridge as a whole The spanningTree structure contains the following elements SN protocol Use this element to select the bridging protocol Defaultnone The protocol element has the following values Range enumerated see below The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router uses the self learning principle This means that the bridge itself learns which data it has to forward and which data it has to block l e it builds
302. rgest contiguous free memory block expressed in bytes telindus1421Router operatingSystem freeBlockCount This attribute displays the number of free contiguous memory blocks 328 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 12 Reference manual Performance attributes kal telindus1421Router operatingSystem freeMemory This attribute displays the total free memory expressed in bytes telindus1421Router operatingSystem totalMemory This attribute displays the total RAM memory expressed in bytes kal telindus1421Router operatingSystem taskInfo This attribute contains status information concerning the different tasks running on the processor It is a table grouping up to 31 task slots which is the maximum number of parallel tasks running on the proc essor s operating system This attribute contains the same elements as the status attribute telindus1421Router operatingSystem taskInfo on page 299 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 13 329 Reference manual Alarm attributes 13 Alarm attributes This chapter discusses the alarm attributes of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router The following gives an overview of this chapter e 13 1 Alarm attributes overview on page 330 e 13 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 331 e 13 3 General alarms on page 334 e 13 4 LAN interface alarms on page 336 e 13 5 WAN interface alarms on page 337 e 13 6 Line alarms on page 338 e 13 7 Router alarms on page 339 330 Te
303. ributes on page 331 for more information on the configuration attributes alarmMask and alarmLevel and on the alarms in general e 13 4 LAN interface alarms on page 336 for more information on the alarms of the lanInterface object Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 179 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 4 WAN interface configuration attributes This section discusses the configuration attributes of the WAN interface First it describes the general configuration attributes of the WAN interface Then it explains the configuration attributes of the encap sulation protocols that can be used on the WAN interface The following gives an overview of this section 10 4 1 General WAN interface configuration attributes on page 180 10 4 2 PPP configuration attributes on page 181 10 4 3 Frame Relay configuration attributes on page 184 10 4 4 ATM configuration attributes on page 189 10 4 5 HDLC configuration attributes on page 195 180 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 im im agal Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 4 1 General WAN interface configuration attributes telindus1421Router wanInterface name Default wan Range 1 24 characters Use this attribute to assign an administrative name to the WAN interface telindus1421Router wanlInterface encapsulation Default atm Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to select the encapsulation protocol on th
304. ridge eeeceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeceeeeeneeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeseenseseneeaeeees 140 8 4 The Spanning Tree topology spacscarecics yadiee eee ici unease 141 8 5 The Spanning Tree bridge port states ccceceeecescceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesesseeeeneeenenens 142 8 6 The Spanning Tree Bridge Protocol Data Unit ee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 143 8 7 The Spanning Tree behaviour ss 1 00c ces cesatensine sts Quen teteen aah covec dancer eesti 144 8 8 The Spanning Tree priority ANd COSt eee eee cece eeetteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaaaees 145 8 9 Configuring bridging 5 cscs2h vv sahie hace scart avakunsdiieedek ladle Andsnes eatiehaie Wiagdunnivbeadeleatwens 147 8 10 Configuring traffic and priority policy on the bridge 0 0 ee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 152 9 Configuration examples lt o sccciiciscecsescceisecesheaseteci gen naceteccsanecenssetsieeesstceseeete eee 157 9 1 LAN extension over a PDH SDH network 0 cece ee eeeeeee cece eee eeeneaeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeees 158 9 2 LAN extension over a Frame Relay network eeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeees 159 9 3 LAN extension over an ATM network 2 c cccccceeeeeseeccceeeeeeteseeeneeeeeeeeeeseeseeneeeenens 160 9 4 Connecting a LAN to the Internet using NAT and PAT eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneaees 161 9 5 Using PAT over PPP with a minimum of official IP addresses ccceeeees 162 9 6 Combining bridging and
305. riority policy and gives a short description of the attributes you can use to configure these features on the bridge The following gives an overview of this section e 8 10 1 How to configure a traffic and priority policy on the bridge on page 153 e 8 10 2 Configuring a traffic policy on the bridge on page 154 e 8 10 3 Applying a bridging traffic policy on a certain interface on page 155 a Refer to e 7 6 1 Introducing traffic and priority policy on page 128 for an introduction on traffic and priority pol icy e 7 6 2 Traffic and priority policy on routed and bridged data on page 129 for the difference between traffic and priority policy on the bridge and the router Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 153 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 10 1 How to configure a traffic and priority policy on the bridge Refer to 7 6 1 Introducing traffic and priority policy on page 128 for an introduction The following table explains you step by step how to configure a traffic and priority policy on the bridge To configure a traffic and priority policy for the bridged data of a certain interface proceed as follows Add a trafficPolicy object under the bridge object and give it a certain index name e g trafficPolicy my_traffic_policy Refer to 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 39 Configure the traffic policy related parameters Refer to 8 10 2 Configuring a traffic pol icy on the bridge on pa
306. route has been configured i e it is a static route metric If two routes exist with the same preference then the route with the lowest metric value is chosen The metric attribute serves as a cost for using the route In most cases it indicates the number of hops routers required to reach a destination timeOut In case of a RIP route the timeOut attribute displays the time the route will remain in the routing table if no RIP updates are received anymore For other routes this attribute always displays 00000d 00h 00m 00s Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 279 Reference manual Status attributes Example The following figure displays the routing table for the example in 9 1 LAN extension over a PDH SDH network on page 158 Y routinaT able network mask gateway interface encapsulation status preference type metric _ timeout b1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 127 0 0 1 discard none discard 255 intemal 0 00000d 00h 00m 00s gt 2 192168 47 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 47 254 lan ethernet up 1 local 1 00000d 00h 00m 00s gt 3 192168 47 254 255 255 255 255 127 0 0 1 internal none up 1 host 0 00000d 00h 00m 00s b 4 2240 09 255 255 255 255 127 0 0 1 internal none up 1 host 0 00000d 00h 00m 00s gt 5 192 168 100 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 100 1 wan ppp down 1 local 1 00000d 00h 00m 00s gt 6 1921681001 255 255 255 255 127 0 0 1 internal none down 1 host 0 00000d 00h 00m 00s gt 7 192 168 48 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 100 2 w
307. router tunnels I2tpTunnels I2tp The 2tp structure in the 2tpTunnels table displays the specific L2TP related status information of the tun nel The l2tp structure contains the following elements mom oeseepton O sendingSeqNum In case sequence numbering on the data messages is enabled dataChannelSequen ceNumbering on then this displays the transmit data sequence numbers receivingSeqNum In case sequence numbering on the data messages is enabled dataChannelSequen goeq q g g q ceNumbering on then this displays the receive data sequence numbers I2tpType This displays which L2TP server type the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router currently is LAC or LNS If you set the configuration attribute I2tpMode to auto then the status attribute I2tpType displays the auto value until the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Routers have mutually decided who will be the LAC and who the LNS controlState This displays the states associated with the LNS or LAC control connection estab lishment Refer to L2TP status control states on page 286 for more information callState This displays the states associated with the LNS or LAC incoming or outgoing calls Refer to L2TP status call states on page 287 for more information deliveryState This displays the states associated with the LNS or LAC packet delivery Refer to L2TP status delivery states on page 288 for more information authenState This displays the states associated with the LN
308. routing in a network eee ceeeeeee cece eeeetteeeeeeteeeeeeneeneeeeeees 163 9 7 Connecting two networks through a tunnel ee cece ceeeeeee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeaees 164 9 8 Connecting VLAN enabled switches over a WAN ccceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeentaaeaees 166 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Table of contents ix User and reference manual Reference manual scciiiiccctesecesiccetsaiersactcdeeusinneccasarresiee nnen nnn nnen nnmnnn nnna 167 10 Configuration attributes annnssennsnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 169 10 1 Configuration attribute OVErViOW ccs becci2iaocsenuges tai becsstecaaseeraaient phancsdyatvecuaumbacgdnarsees 170 10 2 General configuration attributes 2 0 0 0 ceeeeceececeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeesesseeneneeee 172 10 3 LAN interface configuration attributes eee ee eeenneeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaees 176 10 4 WAN interface configuration attributes eee cece eeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 179 10 5 Line configuration attributes i cc suscssinsseiersdcntiaceas acaeis nesgauaraa eran danepdtasalaasd meenanauadavdes 196 10 6 Router configuration attributes bvehnse d veh daetsesantanyade ieadeapnclald sche Mvecwausduedieandoniediushes 200 10 7 Bridge configuration attribUtes cceeeeeceeceseeeeee esse eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 231 10 8 SNMP configuration AtIDULGS oz ssecescisscrtecevee ctu nine a
309. rt of LMI revision 1 LMI ANSI T1 617 and ITU T 17 6 PPP encapsulation specifications e Encapsulation compliant with RFC1661 RFC1662 e IPCP RFC1332 e BCP RFC2878 e Support of CHAP authentication with MD5 hashing RFC1994 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 17 367 Reference manual Technical specifications 17 7 IP routing specifications e IP RFC791 e ARP RFC826 e Static routing RIP1 RFC1058 RIP2 with MD5 hashing and authentication RFC2453 e Router requirements RFC1812 e Standard and extended access filtering on LAN and WAN interfaces e NAT Network Address Translation with dynamic or static IP address conversion and PAT Port Address Translation RFC3022 e BOOTP DHCP server relay agent RFC2131 RFC2132 e BOOTP client RFC951 e Numbered unnumbered WAN Interface e DiffServ priority tagging and queuing RFC2474 RFC2475 e L2TP tunnelling RFC2661 on WAN and LAN interfaces 17 8 Bridging specifications e Bridging with spanning tree protocol IEEE 802 1D e VLAN interconnect IEEE 802 1Q e Integrated Routing and Bridging IRB 17 9 Routing and bridging performance specifications e Full forwarding performance of 64 byte packets at maximum line speed 2 3 or 4 6 Mbps e Buffering up to 4800 packets 64 bytes packet 368 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 17 Reference manual Technical specifications 17 10 Power requirements e 7 5 Vdc 750 mA 1 pair version e 9 Vdc 1000 mA 2 pair
310. rver can not give the same name to all clients of this IP address range a number is added to the host name from the second IP address onwards The number goes up to 99 Example Suppose the host name is Telindus In that case the name for the start IP address is Telindus for the second IP address Telindus1 and so on domainName Use this element to set the name the client should use Default lt empty gt when resolving hostnames via the Domain Name Range max 20 characters System DNS netbiosNameServer Use this element to set the IP address of the NetBios Defauit 0 0 0 0 server Range up to 255 255 255 255 netbiosNodeType Use this element to configure the client as described Default lt opt gt in RFC1001 RFC1002 Range enumerated see below The netbiosNodeType element has the following values no node B node P node M node H node DHCP server reaction on a BootP request The DHCP server reacts on a BootP request as follows the source MAC address of the incoming BootP request packet is compared with the MAC addresses that have been entered in the dhcpStatic table Then there are two possibilities If the source MAC address corresponds with a MAC address in the dhcpStatic table then the DHCP server replies with a BootP reply packet In this reply the IP address that is linked with the MAC address in question as defined in the dhcpStatic table is returned e Ifthe source MAC
311. ry difference between the two is that bridging occurs at layer 2 the link layer of the OSI ref erence model whereas routing occurs at Layer 3 the network layer In other words bridging occurs at a lower level and is therefore more of a hardware function whereas routing occurs at a higher level where the software component is more important And because routing occurs at a higher level it can perform more complex analysis to determine the optimal path for the packet Basic routing activities Routing involves two basic activities e determining optimal routing paths e transporting information groups typically called packets Determining the optimal routing path In order to determine a routing path routers initialise and maintain routing tables These routing tables contain a variety of information For example e Destination next hop associations tell a router that a particular destination can be reached optimally by sending the packet to a particular router representing the next hop on the way to the final desti nation When a router receives an incoming packet it checks the destination address and attempts to associate this address with a next hop e Desirability of a path Routers use metrics to evaluate what path will be the best for a packet to travel Routers communicate with one another and maintain their routing tables through the transmission of a variety of messages The routing update message is one such message that
312. s in case of a designated port e the bridge believed to be the designated bridge for the LAN that is currently connected to this port in all other cases This bridge identifier is used e together with the designatedPortPriority and designatedPortld attributes to determine whether this port should be the designated port for the LAN that is currently connected to this port to test the value of the bridge identifier parameter conveyed in received Config uration BPDUs designatedPort Together these two elements form a unique port identifier They display the Priority unique port identifier of the bridge port through which the designated bridge trans designatedPortld mits the configuration message information stored by this port This port identifier is used e together with the designatedPriority and designatedMac attributes to determine whether this port should be the designated port for the LAN that is currently connected to this port by the management system to determine the topology of the bridged LAN topologyChangeAck This displays the value of the Topology Change Acknowledgement flag in the next Configuration BPDU that will be transmitted on this port This element is used to assess the need to set the Topology Change Acknowl edgement flag in response to a received Topology Change Notification BPDU configuration This is used to determine whether a Configuration BPDU should be transmitted on
313. s 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 7 1 Bridge group configuration attributes telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup bridgeCache Default learning Range learning disabled Use this attribute to enable or disable the filter functionality of the bridge The bridgeCache attribute has the following values learning The bridge acts as a fil ter Data coming from net work 1 will only be let through by the bridge if network networks this data has a destina tion outside network 1 or if it has a broadcast or multicast address This means the bridge filters the data and decreases the amount of data traffic on the separated LAN segments Bridge disabled The bridge acts as a repeater All the data which originates from network 1 will be let through to network 2 Even if the data is not destined for that network What is the bridge cache Whereas the ARP cache keeps MAC address IP address pairs the bridge cache also called address database keeps MAC address interface pairs This allows the bridge to know which device is reacha ble through which interface Refer to telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup bridgeCache on page 292 for an example of such a table telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup bridgeTimeOut Default 00000d 00h 05m 00s Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s Use this attribute to set the ageing time of the bridge cache entries ae 24855d 03h es 7
314. s 1421 SHDSL Router appear in the TMA window 32 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 4 User manual Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 4 1 4 Connecting over an IP network To established a connection between TMA and the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router over an IP network proceed as follows Connect the IP network to the network port of your TTT PC the LAN connector of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Start TMA In the TMA window either select from the menu bar Connect gt Address Device Please specify how to reach the device you wish to connect to or press the short cut key Ctrl N C seid feom F or press on the Connect to device button No C PSTN moden The Connect to a device window is being dis IPaddess 10 0 11 100 played as in the following figure I AssigtoMae oo Suunetma E Security Specify a password for connecting to this device This field may be left open Password Carcel In the Connect to a device window specify the following e Select the option P address and enter the IP address of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router If a password has previously been configured in the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router then also fill in the password field Before you are able to establish a connection over an IP network you have to configure an IP address and a default gateway in the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router You can do this by first connecting TMA to the Telindus 14
315. s applied for the following proto cols Time Server IEN 116 Host Name Server Domain Name Server TACACS database service Boot Protocol BootP DHCP server NetBIOS Name Server NetBIOS Datagram Server Important remark Specifying at least one value in the helperProtocols table clears the default helper list automatically In that case if you want that for instance NetBios Datagram Server broadcast is forwarded you have to specify port number 138 again For BootP DHCP broadcast packets the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is also a BootP DHCP Relay Agent If the protocol is selected then the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router will write the IP address of its Ethernet interface in the BootP or DHCP gateway field and increment the hops field in addition to the address substitution Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 209 Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1421Router router sendTtlExceeded Default enabled Range enabled disabled Use this attribute to enable or disable the sending of ICMP TTL exceeded messages What is Time To Live TTL Each IP packet has a Time To Live TTL value in its header Each device that sends an IP packet sets this parameter at some fixed or predefined value When the packet enters a router the router decre ments the TTL value If a router finds a value 0 after decrementing the TTL it discards the packet This because a value 0 means the
316. s this until it reaches the minimum speed 58 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Basic configuration 5 3 3 Power back off The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router features power back off Power back off is a part of the ITU T G 991 2 SHDSL recommendation It reduces the maximum transmit power level if the line conditions are suffi ciently good to operate at a lower transmit level Power back off is performed by default no configuration attribute During the ITU T G 994 1 hand shake the two sides of the line mutually agree on the transmit level The transmit level is lowered between 0 and 6 dB in steps of 1dB Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 59 User manual Basic configuration 5 4 Configuring passwords This section shows you how to create a list of password s with associated access level in the security table It also explains how to correct the security table in case of error or in case you forgot your pass word Furthermore this section shows you how to enter the passwords in the different management tools The following gives an overview of this section e 5 4 1 Creating passwords in the security table on page 60 e 5 4 2 Correcting the security table on page 60 e 5 4 3 Entering passwords in the different management tools on page 61 60 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Basic configuration 5 4 1 Creating passwords in the security table In order to avoid unauthorised access to the
317. s workaround on page 120 7 4 7 Configuring NAT on page 121 7 4 8 How does the NAT address table work on page 122 7 4 9 Combining PAT and NAT on page 123 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 113 User manual Configuring the router 7 4 1 Introducing NAT and PAT What is NAT and PAT Network Address Translation NAT and Port Address Translation PAT are used to translate private IP addresses into official IP addresses This is also known as IP masquerading If you use the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router to have a permanent connection to the Internet you may need NAT and or PAT Why use NAT and PAT Each device connected to the Internet must have an official i e unique IP address The success of the Internet has caused a lack of these official IP addresses As a result your Internet Service Provider ISP may offer you only one or a small number of official IP addresses If the number of IP devices on your local network is larger than the number of official IP addresses you can assign test or private IP addresses to your local network In that case you have to configure your Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router to translate IP addresses using NAT or PAT Even when there are sufficient official IP addresses available you may still choose to use NAT e g for preserving previously assigned test addresses to all the devices on your local network Private IP address range The international authority IANA assigns the official also calle
318. s1421Router wanlnterface line linePair 1 h2Performance This attribute displays the 2 hours performance summary of the line The h2Performance table contains the following elements Element For the corresponding period this element displays sysUpTime the elapsed time since the last cold boot codeViolations the number of line errors that was counted erroredSeconds the number of erroneous seconds that was counted sevErroredSeconds the number of severely erroneous seconds that was counted unavailableSeconds the number of unavailable seconds that was counted loswSeconds the number of lost synchronisation words that was counted l A For the correct and unambiguous definition of code violations errored and severely errored seconds unavailability and lost sync words refer to the recommendation G 826 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 12 315 Reference manual Performance attributes ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface line linePair 1 h24LineParameters This attribute displays the 24 hours line parameter summary The h24LineParameters table contains the same elements as the telindus1421Router wanlnterface line linePair 1 h2LineParameters table ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface line linePair 1 h24Performance This attribute displays the 24 hours performance summary of the line The h24Performance table contains the same elements as the telindus1421Router wanlnterface line linePair 1 h2Perfor
319. se a Telindus router at both sides of the tunnel In conjunc tion with routers from other vendors e g Cisco specifically select an L2TP mode lac or Ins tunnelAuthentication Use this element to enable on or disable off tunnel Default off authentication Range on off L2TP incorporates a simple optional CHAP like tunnel authentication system dur ing control connection establishment If the LAC or LNS wishes to authenticate the identity of the peer it is contacting or being contacted by it sends a challenge packet If the expected response and response received from a peer does not match the tunnel is not opened To participate in tunnel authentication a single shared secret has to exist between the LAC and LNS tunnelSecret Use this element to set the tunnel secret This secret Default lt empty gt is used in the tunnel authentication in order to verify Range 0 64 characters the peer its response copyTos Use this element to enable on or disable off the cop Defauit on ying of the Type Of Service TOS field value of the Range on off packets maxNrOfRetrans Use this element to set the number of times a control Defauit 4 missions message has to be retransmitted in case no acknowl Range 0 10 edgement follows before the tunnel is closed Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 221 Reference manual Configuration attributes eom pe O O OO
320. secret of the remote router in this table Default lt empty gt Range table see below Refer to 6 2 4 Configuring PPP authentication on page 72 for more information on CHAP authentica tion The ripv2SecretTable table contains the following elements ES peen OO OOOO OOOO OS Use this element to set the CHAP name of the remote router Default lt empty gt Range 0 64 characters If the remote router is a Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router then the name element should correspond with the remote Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router its sysName attribute secret Use this element to set the CHAP secret of the remote router Default lt empty gt Range 0 64 characters If the remote router is a Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router then the secret element should correspond with the remote Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router its sysSecret attribute 208 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1421Router router helperProtocols Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to define the TCP and UDP port numbers for which broad cast forwarding is required Use this attribute if you specified helper IP addresses using the helperAddresses element in the ip structure of the LAN interface Refer to 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure on page 52 If the helperProtocols table is empty default then address substitution i
321. ser and Frame Relay node or Frame LMI Status Enquiry reply Relay DCE or network At regular intervals the DTE sends Full Status Enquiry messages to the DCE The DCE answers with the status of all its DLCIs on the interface At smaller intervals the DTE sends Status Enquiry messages In that case the DCE only answers with DLCI status changes You can select the Local Management Interface LMI protocol and fine tune the LMI operation using the Imi attribute Refer to telindus1421Router wanInterface frameRelay Imi on page 187 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 3 5 Configuring CIR and EIR Refer to 6 3 1 Introducing Frame Relay on page 74 for an introduction on CIR and EIR As said before CIR is the data rate which the user expects to pass into the Frame Relay network with few problems Note that the CIR is unrelated to the actual bit rate of the physical connection A user could have a physical connection operating at 2 Mbps but a CIR across this physical connection of only 64 kbps This would mean that the user s average data rate would be 64 kbps but data bursts up to 2 Mbps would be possible EIR You can configure the CIR and EIR using the cir and eir elements of the frameRelay structure within the diciTable Refer to telindus1421Router wanInterface frameRelay diciTable frameRelay on page 186 Important remarks Be careful not to over dimension the CIR l e do not let th
322. ser configurable queues this is only relevant in case the telindus1421Router router priorityPolicy algorithm attribute is set to weightedFairQueueing Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 133 User manual Configuring the router 7 6 6 Applying a routing traffic policy on a certain interface This section shows you where to find the appropriate traffic policy elements in order to apply a traffic policy on a certain interface The following table shows you in which trafficPolicy element you have to enter the index name of the earlier created trafficPolicy object in order to apply a traffic policy on the routed data of a certain interface For the LAN interface WAN interface you can find the trafficPolicy element in the ip structure under the lanInterface object telindus1421Router laninterface ip Important remark On the LAN interface you can not apply a traffic policy with the purpose of queue ing On this interface the traffic policy is intended to serve as extended access list Refer to 7 7 Configuring an extended access list on page 135 each WAN encapsulation object frameRelay You can find the trafficPolicy element in the ip structure within the diciTable attribute under the frameRelay object telindus1421Router wanInterface frameRelay diciTable ip trafficPolicy This means that you can specify a traffic policy per DLCI You can find the trafficPolicy element in the ip structure under the
323. ser manual Introducing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Management Description and reference tool SNMP You can manage the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router through SNMP using any SNMP browser The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router supports MIB2 and a private MIB including traps 7 The private MIB comes with your copy of TMA After installation of the TMA data files the private MIB file is available in directory C Program Files TMA snmp with the name lt filename gt mib Refer to 10 8 SNMP configuration attributes on page 238 and the documentation of your SNMP browser for more information 1 The first part of the directory path may be different if you did not choose the default path during the installation of the TMA data files 2 The filename is product dependent To determine which MIB file corresponds with which prod uct refer to the models nms file located in C Program Files TMA model 8 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 1 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 1 4 Management tools connection possibilities The following table gives an overview of all the management tools and how you can connect them with the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Management PC Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router PC management concentrator con tool connection nection Serial IP Serial IP EasyConnect CLI ATWIN TMA TMA CLI TMA for HPOV SNmpP amp Web Interface 1 Exampl
324. sider the following Spanning Tree Topology DP RP DP RP eS RP Root Port DP Designated Port What is bridge priority In the example above Bridge A is selected as the root bridge This because the bridge priority of all the bridges is set to the default value 32768 and Bridge A has the lowest MAC address However due to traffic patterns or link types Bridge A might not be the ideal root bridge By increasing the bridge priority lowering the numerical priority value of the ideal bridge so that it becomes the root bridge you force a Spanning Tree recalculation to form a new spanning tree topology with the ideal bridge as the root What is port priority and path cost When the spanning tree topology is calculated based on default parameters the path between source and destination stations in a bridged network might not be ideal The goal is to make the fastest link the root port For example assume on Bridge B that e port 1 currently the root port is an unshielded twisted pair link e port 2 is a fibre optic link Network traffic might be more efficient over the high speed fibre optic link By changing the spanning tree port priority or path cost for port 2 to a higher priority lower numerical value than port 1 port 2 becomes the root port 146 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 User manual Configuring the bridge Example By changing the priority and or the pathCost you can create a pr
325. sions that are currently active on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router telindus1421Router management cliSessionCount This attribute displays the number of CLI sessions that are currently active on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router There are always minimum two fixed sessions active Connecting with TMA CLI the Web Interface etc opens additional sessions This is explained in the following table Session count Purpose 1 fixed session A fixed session for the control port 1 fixed session A fixed session for Web Interface 1 session When connecting with TMA CLI or starting a CLI session 1 session When connecting with the Web Interface 326 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 12 Reference manual Performance attributes kal telindus1421Router management tcpSessionCount This attribute displays the number of TCP sessions that are currently active on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router The following table shows when a TCP session opens Session count Purpose 1 session When connecting with Telnet 1 session When connecting with the Web Interface Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 12 327 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 8 Operating system performance attributes telindus1421Router operatingSystem currUsedProcPower This attribute displays the amount of processing power used during the last 650 milliseconds expressed as a percentage of the total available processing power t
326. st recent model files and TMA engine can always be down loaded from the Telindus web site at http www telindusproducts com TMA 4 1 2 How to connect TMA There are two ways to establish a connection between the computer running TMA and the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router e through a serial connection i e through the control connector of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Refer to 4 1 3 Connecting through the control connector on page 30 e through an IP connection i e through the LAN connector of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Refer to 4 1 4 Connecting over an IP network on page 32 30 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 4 User manual Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 4 1 3 Connecting through the control connector To established a connection between TMA and the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router through the control connector proceed as follows Connect a serial port of your com puter e g COM1 through a straight DB9 male female cable with the control connector of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Start TMA In the TMA window either select from the menu bar Connect gt ladies D evi ce Please specify how to reach the device you wish to connect to or press the short cut key Ctrl N occ ME or click on the Connect to device button Dialout No PSTN modem The Connect to a device window is displayed as in the following figure C IP address Shpnetr Sera Security Specify
327. state for the authentication process authenSuccessful Authentication was successful The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router remains in this state during data transfer authenFailure Authentication failed This is a transient state since the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router starts the handshake again after a failing authentication 290 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 im a Reference manual Status attributes 11 7 Bridge status attributes telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup ifDescr This attribute displays the interface description This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup ifType This attribute displays the interface type This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup ifOperStatus This attribute displays the current operational status of the bridge group This is an SNMP MIB2 param eter telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup ifMtu This attribute displays the interface its Maximum Transfer Unit i e the maximum number of bytes that one packet can contain on this interface This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup ip This attribute displays the IP information of the bridge The ip structure contains the following elements mon Bessie address This is the IP address of the bridge It is either configured or retrieved automati cally netMask This is the IP subnet mask of the interface It is either configured
328. stays open incoming The tunnel is an incoming tunnel dataChannelSe quenceNumbering Use this element to enable on or disable off Default off sequence numbering on the data messages These _ Range on off sequence numbers are used to detect lost packets and or restore the original sequence of packets that may have been reordered dur ing transport On control messages sequence numbering is always enabled Itis recommended that for connections where reordering or packet loss may occur dataChannelSequenceNumbering is enabled 220 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes ee a E keepAliveTimeOut Use this element to set the amount of time in sec Default 30 onds the tunnel waits before it sends a keep alive Range 1 3600 message in case it receives no data If the tunnel does not receive incoming data during a certain time it sends a keep alive message to the other side and waits for an acknowledgement I2tpMode Use this element to set the L2TP function of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router The 2tpMode element has the following values The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router acts as an L2TP Access Concentrator The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router acts as an L2TP Net work Server If both local and remote Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router are set to auto they mutually decide who will be the LAC and who the LNS Select auto only if you u
329. structure see below parameters of the tunnel The l2tp structure contains the following elements Benet oeseepton O locallpAddress Use this element to set the official IP address that Default lt opt gt serves as start point of the L2TP connection Range up to 255 255 255 255 remotelpAddress Use this element to set the official IP address that Default lt opt gt serves as end point of the L2TP connection Range up to 255 255 255 255 Both locallpAddress and remotelpAddress together with the well known port number for L2TP i e 1701 make up the socket used for the L2TP session At the moment only one L2TP session can exist between one locallpAddress and remotelpAddress combination pppAuthentication Use this element to enable or disable CHAP authenti Defauit disabled cation on the PPP connection in the tunnel Range enabled disabled Refer to telindus1421Router wanlInterface ppp authentication on page 183 for more infor mation Use this element to specify the tunnel type Default outgoingDial Range enumerated see below The type element has the following values outgoingDial The outgoing tunnel is not continuously open It is opened whenever data has to be sent through the tun nel and closed when no data is detected for a certain time outgoingLeasedLine The outgoing tunnel is opened as soon as the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router is up and it
330. tate on page 264 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 271 Reference manual Status attributes 11 4 5 HDLC status attributes kal telindus1421Router waninterface hdlc bridging This attribute displays the bridging status of the HDLC link Refer to telindus1421Router laninterface bridging on page 254 for a detailed description of the bridging structure 272 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes 11 5 Line status attributes telindus1421Router waninterfacelline ifDescr This attribute displays the interface description This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter telindus1421Router waninterface line ifType This attribute displays the interface type This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter telindus1421Router wanInterface line ifOperStatus This attribute displays the current operational status of the line This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter Possible values are up The line is up data transfer is possible down The line is down data transfer is not possible testing A line test is active telindus1421Router wanInterface line ifSpeed This attribute displays the current line speed in bits per second bps This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter In case of a Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 2 pair version the line ifSpeed attribute displays the sum of the speed of line pair 1 and 2 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 273 Reference manual Status attributes ra telindus1421Router wanl
331. te to set the function of the control connector The ctrlPortProtocol attribute has the following values Default console Range enumerated see below management SHDSL Router to Select this value if you want to connect the control connector of the Telindus 1421 a management concentrator for management purposes e the control connector of another Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router using a crossed cable i e they are connected back to back in order to create an extended management link Refer to What is relative and absolute addressing on page 240 for more information on extended management links When connecting the control connector of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router to a COM port of your computer you can still open a TMA session on the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router You can however not open a CLI or ATWIN session console Select this value if you want to connect the control connector of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router to a COM port of your computer in order to manage the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router using TMA CLI ATWIN etc Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 243 Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1421Router management alarmFilter Default0 Range 0 50000 Use this attribute to selectively ignore drop alarms in TMA for HP Open View if these alarms are below a certain level The filter number that you define using the alarmFilter attribute has to correspond with a
332. ted by the interface including framing characters This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra telindus1421Router lanInterface ifOutUcastPkts This attribute displays the total number of packets that higher level protocols requested to be transmitted to a unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 12 305 Reference manual Performance attributes ra telindus1421Router lanInterface ifOutNUcastPkts This attribute displays the number of non unicast packets that higher level protocols requested to be transmitted to a non unicast i e a broadcast or multicast address including those that were discarded or not sent This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra telindus1421Router lanInterface ifOutDiscards This attribute displays the number of outgoing packets that were discarded to prevent they are transmit ted by the interface This could be due to for instance the presence of an access list This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra telindus1421Router laninterface ifOutErrors This attribute displays the number of outgoing packets that could not be transmitted by the interface because they contained errors This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra telindus1421Router lanInterface ifOutQLen This attribute displays the length expressed in packets of the output packet queue on the interface This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter 306 Telindus 1421 SH
333. ter wanInterface ppp hisAuthenstate This attribute displays the authentication state of the router at the other side remote side of the link l e the state of the peer Possible values are No Authentication This is the start up state Wait On Challenge During the LCP handshake the authenticator already indicates it wants to authen ticate From that moment on the peer awaits a challenge packet Wait On Success Once the peer has sent a response it awaits a success or failure message Authen Successful The peer has received a success packet It remains in this state during data trans fer Authen Failure The peer has received a failure packet This is a transient state since the router starts the LCP handshake again after a failing authentication Authen Not Allowed This state only occurs when the peer does not accept the authentication request during the LCP handshake A possible reason might be that the peer router does not support CHAP kal telindus1421Router wanInterface ppp bridging This attribute displays the bridging status of the PPP link Refer to telindus1421Router laninterface bridging on page 254 for a detailed description of the bridging structure Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Reference manual Status attributes 11 4 3 Frame Relay status attributes ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface frameRelay ip This attribute displays the IP information of the Frame Relay link Refer to telindus1
334. tervals If consecutive cells are not returned by the remote side then the ifOperStatus of the PVC becomes down interval Use this element to set the time interval between the Default 00000d 00h 00m 10s sending of two consecutive OAM F5 loop back cells Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s 24855d 03h 14m 07s failsPermitted Use this element to set the number of non returned Default 4 OAM F5 loop back cells after which the Telindus 1421 Range 1 30 SHDSL Router declares the PVC down Example Suppose failsPermitted is set to 10 If 10 consecutive OAM F5 loop back cells are not returned by the remote side then the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router declares the PVC down What are OAM F5 loop back cells The ATM protocol features OAM F5 loop back cells These are used to verify whether a PVC is truly up or down Refer to the operation element in the attribute telindus1421Router waninterface atm pvcTable atm oamF5Loopback 194 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface atm atmConfig Default Use this attribute to configure the general ATM parameters Range structure see below The atmConfig structure contains the following elements idleCellFormat Description Use this element to set the format of the ATM idle Defaultitu cells These cells are transmitted when no data is Range enumerated see below transm
335. tes telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup bridging The bridging attributes or elements in the individual interface objects display the bridging information for that particular interface This bridging attribute however displays the bridging information of all the bridged interfaces of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Refer to telindus1421Router laninterface bridging on page 254 for a detailed description of the bridging structure Note however that the bridge group bridging structure contains one extra element name This is the name of the interface as you configured it Note that the interface can also be a DLCI an ATM PVC a tunnel etc kal telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup spanningTree This attribute gives you the Spanning Tree status information of the bridge The spanningTree structure contains the following elements C E designatedPriority Together these two elements form the unique bridge identifier designatedMAC They display the unique bridge identifier of the root bridge as it is indicated in the root identifier parameter of the Configuration BPDUs These BPDUs are transmit ted by the designated bridge for the LAN that is currently connected to this port This bridge identifier is used to test the value of the root identifier parameter con veyed in received Configuration BPDUs rootPathCost This is the cost of the path from this bridge to the root bridge If this bridge is the root bridge the root
336. the end of the file br Bs Save this file to a file with an extension cli 354 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 15 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 16 355 Reference manual Downloading software 16 Downloading software This chapter explains how to download loader software in the memory and application software to the file system of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router But first it explains the difference between boot loader and application software The following gives an overview of this chapter e 16 1 What is boot loader and application software on page 356 e 16 2 Downloading application software using TMA on page 357 16 3 Downloading application software using TFTP on page 358 e 16 4 Downloading application or loader software using TML on page 359 e 16 5 Downloading application or loader software in loader mode on page 360 356 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 16 Reference manual Downloading software 16 1 What is boot loader and application software What is boot software The boot software takes care of the initial phase in the start up sequence of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router It is located on the lowest software level What is loader software The boot software takes care of the second phase in the start up sequence of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router It is located on the middle software level As opposed to boot mode
337. the extra features as there are default NAT filtering L2TP tunnelling etc The following gives an overview of this section e 12 5 1 General router performance attributes on page 317 e 12 5 2 Default NAT performance attributes on page 319 e 12 5 3 L2TP tunnel performance attributes on page 321 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 12 317 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 5 1 General router performance attributes ra telindus1421Router router routingTable This attribute lists all known routes and how many times they are used The routingTable contains the following elements ES peen network This is the IP address of the destination network mask This is the network mask of the destination network gateway This is the IP address of the next router on the path to the destination network interface This is the interface through which the destination network can be reached Pos sible values are internal The own protocol stack is used lt name gt The destination network can be reached through this particular interface The lt name gt of the interface is the name as you configured it Note that the interface can also be a DLCI an ATM PVC a tunnel etc discard Packets for this destination are discarded This lists how many times the route has been used since it is listed in the routing table For each IP packet that matches this route the attribute v
338. the password for connecting to this device This field may be left open Password Cancel In the Connect to a device window specify the following e Select the option Serial and specify the COM port of your computer to which the Tel indus 1421 SHDSL Router is connected e f previously a password has been configured in the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router then also fill in the password field Click on the Next gt button The second Connect window is displayed Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 4 User manual Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 31 In the Connect select a device window pro ceed as follows to connect to the Address z local Tel ind us 1421 S H DS L Route r Se lect On Choose whether to connect on the network device itself de vi e oa device erect if so specify its address On device remote Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router select C After device After device enter 1 in the NMS address field Hd atl and select Relative If previously a password has been configured in the remote Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router then also fill in the password field You can only connect to a remote Telindus 1421 Security SHDSL Router if the data link is up You might specify a password to connect to the device If not the network password will be used if any Password Cancel Click on the Finish button After a couple of seconds the attributes of the Telindu
339. ther packets in case the queue is full The highest 3 bits of the TOS field are mapped as follows 000 up to 100 queues 1 up to 5 respectively 101 and higher the low delay queue The next 2 bits define the drop levels Bit values correspond with 00 and 01 maxLength1 10 maxLength2 11 maxLength3 Refer to the attribute telindus1421Router router trafficPolicy dropLevels for more informa tion on drop levels tosMapped The data is redirected to the queues based on the settings of the attribute telindus1421Router router trafficPolicy tos2QueueMapping 224 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Reference manual Chapter 10 Configuration attributes kal telindus1421Router router trafficPolicy trafficShaping The function of this attribute is twofold Default lt empty gt Range table see below e Incase you have set the telindus1421Router router trafficPolicy method attribute to trafficShaping then use the trafficShaping table to specify which data has to be redirected to which queue If an overload condition occurs then a packet is redirected to the specified queue when the criteria as specified in the trafficShaping table are met e You can use the trafficShaping table to set up an extended access list A packet is forwarded if the criteria as specified in the trafficShaping table are met When more than one entry applies to the same packet then only the most spec
340. top the ping session is by executing the stopPing action interval This is the interval in seconds between consecutive Default pings Range 0 100 dataLength This is the length of the data transmitted in a ping Default 31 Range 0 1300 timeOut If a ping is sent the system will wait for a certain Default 00000d 00h 00m 05s period on the answer l e the system expects the Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s answer within this period Use the timeOut argument to 24855d 03h 14m 07s set this period WS telindus1421Router router stopPing Stops the pending pings Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 12 319 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 5 2 Default NAT performance attributes telindus1421Router router defaultNat socketsFree This attribute shows the remaining number of new connections i e sockets that can be initiated A socket is a set of source and destination IP addresses and port numbers Initially 2048 simultaneous sockets can be initiated Sockets are freed using a garbage mechanism This means that every five minutes all sockets are checked If a socket has been released by PAT or NAT then this socket is returned to the pool of free sockets ICMP and UDP sockets are released when they have no data traffic during five minutes TCP sockets are released after the TCP session has been closed or when the session has been idle for 24 hours telindus1421Router router def
341. tributes on page 331 for more information on the configuration attributes alarmMask and alarmLevel and on the alarms in general e 13 5 WAN interface alarms on page 337 for more information on the alarms of the wanInterface object Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 181 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 4 2 PPP configuration attributes ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface ppp ip Default lt empty gt Range structure see below Use this attribute to configure the IP related parameters of the PPP link Refer to 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure on page 52 for a detailed description of the ip structure ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface ppp mode Default bridging Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to determine whether the packets are treated by the rout ing process the bridging process or both The mode attribute has the following values bridging All packets received on the PPP link are bridged BCP is set up routing All packets received on the PPP link are routed IPCP is set up routingAndBridging The SNAP header is checked to determine whether the packets have to be bridged or routed IPCP and BOP is set up ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface ppp bridging Default Range structure see below Use this attribute to configure the bridging related parameters of the PPP link Refer to e 8 Configuring the bridge on page 137 for more in
342. tries to avoid situations as described above Suppose router B has a ripHoldDownTime attribute In that case the situation is as follows 1 Route X goes down Router A sends a RIP update message to router B declaring route X down Router B starts the RIP hold down timer 2 The status of route X starts toggling between up and down Router A sends several RIP update messages concerning route X to router B Router B holds the status of route X down as longs as the RIP hold down timer has not expired q When the RIP hold down timer expires and the route is down then the route status stays down up then the route status changes to up 206 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes kal telindus1421Router router ripv2SecretTable Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to define the secrets used for the RIP authentication g Refer to 7 3 4 Configuring RIP authentication on page 111 for more information on RIP authentication The ripv2SecretTable table contains the following elements en pee O O OOOO OS keyld Use this element to set a unique identifier for each Default 0 secret Range 0 255 secret Use this element to define the secret Default lt empty gt Range 0 16 characters This secret is sent with the RIP updates on the speci fied interface It is also used to authenticate incoming RIP updates
343. ts for destinations that do not match one of the routing table entries are sent to this default route Refer to telindus1421Router router defaultRoute on page 201 If you only have to reach one remote LAN network from your local Ethernet via this router you may skip the routingTable attribute In that case it is sufficient to define the defaultRoute attribute only 98 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 2 2 Configuring the routing table The following are some rules when configuring the routingTable ES pe O O As a rule of thumb one can say that the interface name has priority over the gateway In case you enter a correct i e existing interface name and in case it refers toa point to point PTP interface the route is always added to the routing table no matter which gateway GW is specified multi point MP interface then the route is only added to the routing table when a local gateway is specified the route is not added to the routing table when no gateway is specified a reroute occurs when no local gateway is specified In case you enter an incorrect interface name the route is not added to the routing table In case you enter no interface name then the route is added to the routing table when a local gateway is specified the route is not added to the routing table when no gateway is specified the route is not added to the routing table when th
344. ts the file 192168100001 cms or 192168100001 cli If the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router received a valid configuration file then it stores the configuration and possibly reboots Else it restarts with phase 1 348 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 15 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router The following figure illustrates the procedure as described in the table above It shows the procedure over a WAN link The IP address of the router is 192 168 100 1 and its hostname is his_name In this example the DNS server and TFTP server are on different machines However in reality these two serv ices often reside on the same machine IP helpers e 195 7 12 251 e 195 7 12 252 helper protocols e DNS 53 e TFTP 69 Telindus Router with WAN IP address 192 168 100 1 central router DNS server with IP address 195 7 12 251 Se N DNS request broadcast DNS unicast request DNS reply with hostname his_name damain topleveldomain TFTP server __ j with IP address 195 7 12 252 Se TFTP request for file his_name cms TFTP unicast request TFTP reply with file his_name cms TFTP request for file his_name cli broadcast TFTP unicast request TFTP reply with file his_name cli Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 15 349 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router 15 4 Creating configuration files In 15 3 Getting the configuration wit
345. ttributes 10 4 3 Frame Relay configuration attributes i telindus1421Router wanInterface frameRelay ip Default lt empty gt Range structure see below Use this attribute to globally configure the IP parameters of the DLCls More specifically use this attribute to configure the IP related parameters of all the DLCls for which e in the diciTable no IP address is defined for that specific DLCI and the mode element is set to routing or routingAndBridgning q If you want to configure the IP related parameters for one specific DLCI then configure for that DLCI the ip structure in the dlciTable Refer to e 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure on page 52 for a detailed description of the ip structure e 6 3 2 Configuring IP addresses on the Frame Relay WAN on page 76 for more specific information on configuring IP addresses in Frame Relay Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Reference manual Chapter 10 185 Configuration attributes i telindus1421Router waninterface frameRelay dlciTable Use this attribute to configure the Frame Relay Data Link Connection Iden tifiers DLCIs Default lt empty gt Range table see below Refer to 6 3 3 Configuring the DLCls on page 79 for more information on DLCls The diciTable contains the following elements a Use this element to assign an administrative name to the DLCI Default lt empty gt Range 0 24 characters adminStatus
346. uration Action Load Default Configuration Action Cold Boot gt gt laninterface name ip arp mode bridging adapter alarmMask alarmLevel gt gt waninterface name encapsulation priorityPolicy maxFifoQLen alarmMask alarmLevel gt gt gt ppp ip mode bridging linkMonitoring authentication authenPeriod gt gt gt frameRelay ip diciTable Imi gt gt gt atm pvcTable atmConfig gt gt gt hdlc bridging gt gt gt line channel region timingMode retrain startupMargin minSpeed maxSpeed minSpeed2P maxSpeed2P mode alarmMask alarmLevel gt gt gt gt linePair alarmMask alarmLevel gt gt router defaultRoute routingTable routingProtocol alternativeRoutes ripUpdatelnterval ripHoldDownTime ripv2SecretTable sysSecret pppSecretTable helperProtocols sendTtlExceeded sendPortUnreachable sendAdminUnreachable dhcpStatic dhcpDynamic dhcpCheckAddress alarmMask alarmLevel 1 Only present in case of a 2 pair version Incase of a 2 pair version two objects are present linePair 1 and linePair 2 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 171 Reference manual Configuration attributes gt gt gt defaultNat gt gt snmp patAddress trapDestinations portTranslations mib2Traps servicesAvailable addresses gt gt management gateway cms2Address tcpSocketTimeOut accessList udpSocketTimeOut snmp tcpSockets telnet udpSockets tftp dmzHost
347. us1421Router router priorityPolicy object are used for both routed and bridged data 130 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 6 3 Howto configure a traffic and priority policy on the router Refer to 7 6 1 Introducing traffic and priority policy on page 128 for an introduction The following table explains you step by step how to configure a traffic and priority policy on the router To configure a traffic and priority policy for the routed data of a certain interface proceed as follows Add a trafficPolicy object under the router object and give it a certain index name e g trafficPolicy my_traffic_policy Refer to 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 39 Configure the traffic policy related parameters Refer to 7 6 4 Configuring a traffic policy on the router on page 131 Add a priorityPolicy object under the router object and give it a certain index name e g priorityPolicy my_priority_policy Refer to 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 39 Configure the priority policy related parameters Refer to 7 6 5 Configuring a priority pol icy on page 132 Apply the traffic policy to a certain interface Do this by typing the index name of the added trafficPolicy object in the appropriate element Refer to 7 6 6 Applying a routing traf fic policy on a certain interface on page 133 Apply the priority policy to a certain interface
348. use on the WAN Do this using the encapsulation attribute Refer to telindus1421Router wanInterface encapsulation on page 180 Once you selected a WAN encapsulation protocol you can fine tune it as described in this chapter Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 6 69 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 2 Configuring PPP encapsulation This section introduces the PPP encapsulation protocol and gives a short description of the attributes you can use to configure this encapsulation protocol The following gives an overview of this section 6 2 1 Introducing PPP on page 70 e 6 2 2 Configuring an IP address on the PPP WAN on page 71 e 6 2 3 Configuring link monitoring on page 71 e 6 2 4 Configuring PPP authentication on page 72 70 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 6 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 2 1 Introducing PPP What is PPP The Point to Point Protocol PPP originally emerged as an encapsulation protocol for transporting IP traffic over point to point links PPP also established a standard for assigning and managing IP addresses asynchronous and bit oriented synchronous encapsulation network protocol multiplexing link configuration link quality testing error detection and option negotiation for added networking capa bilities What is LCP IPCP and BCP PPP provides a method for transmitting datagrams over serial point to point links which include the fol low
349. user can decide which data goes into which queue low delay queue The user can decide which data goes into this queue This queue usually is addressed more often then the user con figurable queues system queue This queue is filled with mission critical data e g link moni toring messages etc and has priority over all other queues Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 129 User manual Configuring the router 7 6 2 Traffic and priority policy on routed and bridged data Refer to 7 6 1 Introducing traffic and priority policy on page 128 for an introduction The following table shows which traffic policy is used to fill the queues with routed data and which is used to fill the queues with bridged data In case is enabled only routing the routed data is queued as specified in the traffic policy settings as defined in the telindus1421Router router trafficPolicy object routing and bridging e the routed data is queued as specified in the traffic policy settings as defined in the telindus1421Router router trafficPolicy object the bridged data is queued as specified in the traffic policy settings as defined in the telindus1421Router bridge trafficPolicy object only bridging the bridged data is queued as specified in the traffic policy settings as defined in the telindus1421Router bridge trafficPolicy object To empty the queues the priority policy settings as defined in the telind
350. uting traffic policy on a certain interface on page 133 7 6 7 Applying a priority policy on a certain interface on page 134 128 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 6 1 Introducing traffic and priority policy What is traffic and priority policy Because of the bursty nature of voice video data traffic sometimes the amount of traffic exceeds the speed ofa link At this point the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router has to decide what to do with this excess of traffic Buffer the traffic in a single queue and let the first packet in be the first packet out Or put packets into different queues and service certain queues more often also known as priority queuing These questions are dealt with by the traffic and priority policy mechanisms The traffic policy determines on traffic overload conditions how and which queues are filled with the excess data The priority policy determines how and which queues are emptied What is a priority queuing Using the traffic and priority policy features you can perform priority queuing This allows you to define how traffic is prioritised in the network E g to ensure that voice video or other streaming media is serv iced before or after other traffic types to ensure that web response traffic is routed before normal web browsing traffic etc There are 7 queues Queue Queue type Description user configurable queue The
351. ved on this interface This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra telindus1421Router lanInterface iflnUcastPkts This attribute displays the number of unicast packets received on this interface and delivered to a higher layer protocol Unicast packets are all non multicast and non broadcast packets This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra telindus1421Router laninterface ifInNUcastPkts This attribute displays the number of non unicast packets received on this interface and delivered to a higher layer protocol Non unicast packets are all the multicast and broadcast packets This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter 4 telindus1421Router lanInterface iflnDiscards This attribute displays the number of incoming packets that were discarded to prevent their deliverance to a higher layer protocol This even though no errors were detected in these packets This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter Ty telindus1421Router lanInterface iflnErrors This attribute displays the number of incoming packets that could not be delivered to a higher layer pro tocol because they contained errors This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter i telindus1421Router lanInterface iflnUnknownProtos This attribute displays the number of incoming packets that were discarded because they contained an unknown or unsupported protocol This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra telindus1421Router lanInterface ifOutOctets This attribute displays the total number of octets bytes transmit
352. w 330 alarms general 334 LAN interface 336 line 338 router 339 WAN interface 337 application software downloading using TFTP 358 using TMA 357 using TML 359 version iv what is 356 ARP cache how works the 177 time out 177 what is 177 ATM basic configuration 82 configuration attributes 189 introducing 83 performance attributes 312 specifications 366 status attributes 269 what is 83 ATM layers what are 84 ATM switching how works 83 attribute overview 44 what is 36 attribute action Activate Configuration 65 174 clearArpCache 256 295 clearBridgeCache 295 Cold Boot 175 Delete File 298 Load Default Configuration 65 174 Load Saved Configuration 65 174 maximumSpeedSearch 274 Rename File 298 resetNat 320 retrain 313 startPing 318 stopPing 318 attribute alarm alarminfo 333 alarmLevel 332 alarmMask 332 totalAlarmLevel 333 attribute configuration accessList 241 adapter 178 addresses 216 alarmFilter 243 alarmLevel laninterface object 178 line object 199 router object 214 top object 174 wanInterface object 180 alarmMask laninterface object 178 line object 199 router object 214 top object 174 wanInterface object 180 algorithm 228 alternativeRoutes 204 arp 177 233 atmConfig 194 authenPeriod 183 authentication 183 bootFromFlash 172 bridgeCache 232 bridgeTimeOut 232 bridging 178 181 195 channel 196 cms2Address 240 Index 377 consoleNoTrafficTimeOut 242
353. ward con gestion and this since the virtual circuit was created inDe This is the number of frames received with the Discard Eligibility bit set inOctets This is the number of octets received over this virtual circuit since it was created inFrames This is the number of frames received over this virtual circuit since it was created outFecn This is the number of frames sent to the network indicating forward congestion and this since the virtual circuit was created outBecn This is the number of frames sent to the network indicating backward congestion and this since the virtual circuit was created outDe This is the number of frames sent to the network with the Discard Eligibility bit set outOctets This is the number of octets sent over this virtual circuit since it was created This is the number of frames sent over this virtual circuit since it was created Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 12 311 Reference manual Performance attributes ra telindus1421Router wanlnterface frameRelay Imi This attribute gives a complete LMI performance overview The Imi structure contains the following elements E a a E inStatusEnquiry This is the number of Status Enquiries received from the network inStatus This is the number of Status Reports received from the network inStatusUpdate This is the number of unsolicited Status Updates received from the network outStatus Enquiry This is the number
354. y change indication in transmitted Configuration BPDUs e determine whether the short bridgeForwardDelay or long bridgeTimeOut time out or ageing value is used to purge dynamic MAC addresses from the bridge cache topologyChange This is a Boolean value 0 or 1 to report that a topology change has been detected Detection by or notified to the bridge topologyChange This displays the time during which the root bridge transmits Configuration BPDUs Time indicating a topology change after it detected this topology change The topologyChangeTime element value is equal to the sum of the root bridge its bridgeMaxAge element value and bridgeForwardDelay element value Refer to telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup spanningTree on page 234 for more infor mation on the latter two elements Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 295 Reference manual Status attributes WS telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup clearArpCache If you execute this action the ARP cache table is cleared NS telindus1421Router bridge bridgeGroup clearBridgeCache If you execute this action the bridge cache table is cleared 296 a a m Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes 11 8 Management status attributes telindus1421Router management cms2Address This attribute displays the absolute device address as you configured it Loop back status attributes telindus1421Router management
355. y vianPriorityMap Default Range structure see below Use this attribute to impose a traffic policy on the bridged VLAN frames received by the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Each VLAN frame has a certain priority this is specified in the 802 1p part of the 802 1Q header of the VLAN frame In case a traffic overload condition occurs and in case you imposed this traffic policy on a certain interface then the VLAN frames are sent to a queue Using the vianPriorityMap attribute you can specify which VLAN frame is sent to which queue based on the priority of the VLAN frame The vianPriorityMap structure contains the following elements mon Bessie priorityO Use these elements to define which priority corresponds with which queue The possible queues are queue1 up to queued and lowDelayQueue To empty these ee queues specify a priority policy priority Refer to 8 10 Configuring traffic and priority policy on the bridge on page 152 for more information on traffic policy priority policy and priority queuing 238 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 8 SNMP configuration attributes ra telindus1421Router snmp trapDestinations Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to define to which IP address the SNMP traps have to be sent The Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router translates all alarm status changes into SNMP traps These traps can then
356. you can force the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router to run in loader mode In this mode you can then download new loader or application software This may be necessary in case a soft ware download failed or a flash memory error occurred making the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router inac cessible or even inoperative What is application software The application software also called control software or firmware completely controls the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router It is located on the highest software level Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 16 357 Reference manual Downloading software 16 2 Downloading application software using TMA To download application software to the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router using TMA proceed as follows w pooo oo o Establish a link between TMA and the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router either over a serial or an IP connection Refer to 4 Managing the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router on page 27 In the TMA window select Tools gt Download In case you made e an IP connection skip this step Password Files Options e aserial connection select the Options tab in ile asta ead cies the TMA Download window Then set the followi ng Serial port com ad Set the initial transfer speed to 9600 bps Ifyou set the maximum transfer speed to 115200 bps the actual transfer speed will be negotiated between 9600 bps and 115200 bps EE In the TMA Download window select the Configuration tab and click
357. yping tftp 10 0 11 1 at the command prompt of your computer where 10 0 11 1 is the LAN IP address of the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Set the following TFTP parameters Set the retransmission time out to at least 20 seconds The syntax to do this is typi cally rexmt 20 Set the total TFTP time out sufficiently large e g 40 seconds The syntax to do this is typically timeout 40 Set the transfer mode to binary octet format The syntax to do this is typically binary Or octet Type the following command tftp gt put Txxxxxxx 00 CONTROL my pwd Where put is the TFTP command to send a file Txxxxxxx 00 is the application software file e g T1234001 00 CONTROL in capitals specifies that the file being downloaded is an application soft ware file my_pwd is the write access password as configured in the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router If no password has been configured you may omit the and the password When the file transfer is finished close the TFTP session Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 16 359 Reference manual Downloading software 16 4 Downloading application or loader software using TML When downloading with TMA over a serial connection you actually evoke TML Telindus Memory Loader through TMA You can also use TML without opening TMA To download application or loader software to the Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router using TML proceed as follows w pooo S Connect a serial port of your c
358. ysName my name router sysSecret my secret ppp authentication CHAP router pppSecretTable name my name secret my secret PPP link aay T router A 4 gt router B Step 1 Router A sends a challenge packet containing its sysName_ or a default value if no hic ae RRC Step 2 Router B sends a response _ using its own sysName and sysSecret as hashing value Step 3 Router A uses the sysName it receives from router B to look up the corresponding secret in its pppSecretTable Step 4 If the two secret names are equal then router A sends a success reply else it sends a failure reply on both routers then they both request and respond to the authentication If the remote router is a router from another vendor then read the documentation in order to find out how to configure the CHAP name and secret values The authentication configuration attributes As can be seen in the figure above you have to use the following configuration attributes to configure PPP authentication e telindus1421Router wanInterface ppp authentication on page 183 e telindus1421Router wanInterface ppp authenPeriod on page 183 e telindus1421Router router sysSecret on page 207 e telindus1421Router router pppSecretTable on page 207 Telindus 1421 SHDSL Router Chapter 6 73 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 3 Configuring Frame Relay encapsulati

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  1 - CCE Cheminots  Motorola MTM800 Automobile Accessories User Manual  Introducción - Massey Ferguson  Henny Penny COMPUTRON 8000 User's Manual  Audiovox VME 9520NAV  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file